JP6344285B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Within the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states.

JP 2008-73181 A Patent No. 4260075 JP 2011-92337 A Japanese Patent No. 5202970 Japanese Patent No. 5185915 Japanese Patent No. 469975 JP 2012-24501 A

  However, since there are many such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that can realize further innovative gaming properties.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
An effect display unit capable of displaying the effect,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as a first hold until the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
First success / failure determination means for executing the determination of success / failure based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information is controlled so as to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit. Display control means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as a second hold until the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
Second success / failure determination means for executing the determination of correctness / failure based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means;
A second identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information is controlled to stop and display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit. Display control means;
When the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group, or If the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group, the player Special game control means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game Lottery state control means that can be controlled to be in a high probability lottery state in
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution of the special game;
The first variation pattern table as a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and the second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information from the first variation pattern table And a variation state that can be controlled to be either a first variation state that refers to the first variation pattern table or a second variation state that refers to the second variation pattern table after completion of execution of the special game. Control means, and when the second hold exists, the first success / failure determination permission condition is not satisfied, whereas the second success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied regardless of whether or not the first hold exists. It is configured as
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
When one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed In, it is configured so that the execution contents of the special game are different from each other,
During the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable prize opening or a predetermined time elapses.
The unit in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is easier to enter the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group It is configured to be easier than entering a specific area in a game,
In the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the determination of success / failure by the first success / failure determination means is winning. The specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is configured to be relatively easy to stop and display, compared to the case where the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed.
If a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group has entered a specific area, the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variation state While
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, after the execution of the special game, the specific game state and the second variable state Configured to
As a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information is different from both the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table is further provided. Have
The unit from the start of change display to the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information as one unit, and in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, there is a ball entering a specific area. In such a case, after the execution of the special game has been completed and the one unit has been performed a predetermined number of times, the third variation state is referred to the third variation pattern table.
In the case of the first fluctuation state, when the number of holds related to the second hold at the time when the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and at the time when the second determination result permission condition is satisfied The result of the go / no-go decision by the second go / no-go judgment means when the second hold / hold decision permission condition is satisfied in the case where the hold number related to the second hold is the second hold number larger than the first hold number. While the average value difference of the predetermined time occurs in the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second identification information in the case of non-winning,
In the case of the third variation state, as the average value of the variation display time of the second identification information in the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the second failure determination means when the second failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won The average value difference for the predetermined time according to the number of holds related to the second hold at the time when the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied,
A pre-reading effect that suggests or notifies the presence of the second hold that satisfies the predetermined condition can be executed in the effect display unit,
In the case where the execution of the one unit related to the certain second hold is scheduled in the third change state even though a certain second hold occurs before the third change state is reached. The pre-reading effect corresponding to the certain second hold is not executed during the variation display of the second identification information prior to the third variation state.
Regardless of whether or not a specific game has entered a specific area corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, it is definite that the specific game state will be entered after the execution of the special game. While
Whether or not to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is determined according to the presence or absence of entering the specific area in the unit game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group Configured to be
A specific condition that is executed when the change display of the second identification information is performed when the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means in the third variation state is satisfied when the second failure determination permission condition is satisfied. The effect is executed when the second identification information is displayed in a variable state when the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second determination / non-permission determination means is unwinned when the second determination of whether or not the second determination is satisfied. Is configured to not
More than the number of candidates related to the variable display time of the second identification information that can be selected when the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second success / failure determination means is a non-winning state, the third variation state and The number of candidates related to the variable display time of the second identification information that can be selected when the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is non-winning is configured to be smaller,
It is possible to execute a specific notice effect in advance in the effect display section to notify that the ease of entering a specific area is high
A specific suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the ease of entering a specific area is high can be executed in the production display unit,
When the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is executed, the specific notice effect can be executed before the start of the special game,
Even when a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is executed, or even when a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is executed, The specific suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the special game,
The stop identification information of the first identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit is a specific group when the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is won in the low probability lottery state and the normal gaming state While executing the special game executed when it is the specific stop identification information belonging to, while executing the specific suggestion effect,
The stop identification information of the second identification information stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit is the specific group when the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second success / failure determination means is won in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state. It is configured not to execute the specific suggestion effect during the execution of the special game executed when the specific stop identification information belongs to ,
During the execution of a special game, it is possible to execute a launch instruction effect for encouraging a player to enter a specific area, and during the execution of a special game in which the result of the success / failure determination is won in the low probability lottery state and the normal game state When the launch instruction effect is executed, the launch instruction effect is displayed, and the launch instruction effect during the execution of the special game generated when the result of the success / failure determination is won in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be different from the effect display mode of the firing instruction effect when is executed .
<Appendix>
In addition, although the different aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it can implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this different aspect is
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable number of winnings or variable winnings are made until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined period elapses in the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20). Special game execution means (for example, special game execution) capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times that can make the mouth (for example, the first grand prize port C10, the second grand prize port C20) advantageous to the player Means MP33),
There are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port A10, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game In the case of a specific game state, a unit from the start of the identification information change display to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times from the end of the execution of the special game. Until, it is provided with game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Effect display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20) for controlling the effect display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG).
With
There are a plurality of high expectation effect candidates indicating that a special game may be executed as an effect executed at least in a specific game state, and the first group includes a plurality of high expectation effect candidates and Have multiple groups, including a second group that includes one or more high-expectation direction candidates,
In a situation where the specific gaming state is maintained, the high expectation effect candidate in the first group has priority over the high expectation effect candidate in the second group until a specific effect is displayed. It becomes the first production state that can be displayed as production,
In the case of the first effect state, after the special effect is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode and the special game is not executed, the high expectation effect in the first group is performed. While the high expectation stage production candidate in the second group is prioritized over the candidates, it becomes a second stage production state that can be displayed as production,
In the case of the first effect state, the specific effect is displayed, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, and the special game is executed. After the execution of the special game, the specific game is performed again. When it becomes the state, it is configured to be in the first production state,
When the first unit is performed a predetermined number of times that is less than the predetermined number of times without executing the special game, the next time the identification information is changed and displayed. In this case, the pachinko is configured such that a predetermined specific high-expected degree production candidate among the high-expected degree production candidates in the first group can be displayed as the specific production. It is a gaming machine.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in the gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table used in the limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the pre-reading effect execution determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an effect content determination table configuration diagram on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the pre-reading effect execution determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the effect mode determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the end demonstration time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the end demonstration extension effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is an operation image diagram of the distribution of game balls to the start port in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 66 is a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table used in the limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of a normal-time battle hold lottery process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the hold display mode determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 71 is an effect content determination table configuration diagram on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 72 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is a display image according to the number of holds in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of normal prefetch effect determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the hold change effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution initial processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change suggestion effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 81 is a holding change effect / holding display mode change suggestion effect execution image in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 85 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 87 is a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table used in the limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the execution of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a short effect stage lamp lighting effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during the short effect stage on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 96 is an image of execution of a bomb effect / maximum profit determination effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during the long effect stage on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the promotion effect notification mode determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 100 is an operation diagram related to main game symbol variation during a specific game on the sub-main control unit side in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 101 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the round execution initial process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 106 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 107 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 108 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the round execution initial process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 110 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a configuration diagram of a game board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a front view and a perspective view according to the structure of the special winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an operation diagram relating to opening / closing of the special winning opening and the shielding member during the special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 115 is an operation diagram relating to opening / closing of a special winning opening and a shielding member during a special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an operation diagram related to opening / closing of a special winning opening and a shielding member during a special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is an operation diagram relating to opening / closing of the special winning opening and the shielding member during the special game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a main flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of limited frequency end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the special game start control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of a normal special prize opening control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a release mode determination table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of a normal prize opening opening / closing control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of normal preparation time control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the normal winning control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of normal round control end processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the large allocation winning opening control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the distribution big prize opening / closing control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a flowchart of distribution preparation time control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of the distribution winning control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of the discharged ball abnormality detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flowchart of distribution round control end processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 143 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the special game display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of special game end effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 147 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 148 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 149 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 151 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 152 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 153 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a flowchart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a flowchart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 170 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 174 is an effect content determination table in the probability variation gaming state on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a flowchart of overwinning effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decorative pattern (design)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main game part. It is identification information that is display-controlled on the (so-called main board) side, and “decorative design (drawing)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-game unit (so-called sub board) side. “The identification information can be displayed” is not limited to the display method. For example, the light emission means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) emits light (not only the presence / absence of light emission, but also the color difference, lighting / flashing mode) And a physical display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction (information)” refers to all output contents that enhance the fun of the game whose output is controlled on the side of the sub-game unit (so-called sub-board). The output can be listed as moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc., and actions of moving objects for sound and effects. Embodiments or combinations thereof may be mentioned. “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “Estimated average execution time of easy-to-play games per unit time” is assumed to be a situation in which there is a constant change in the auxiliary game symbol (for example, there is always a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the start port. In terms of internal processing, in other words, for example, When a variable member is attached to the start port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function activated / non-actuated state), the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member is won Probability level (so-called ordinary figure high probability state / low probability state), normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol), which is the trigger for opening the variable member, the length of change time (so-called usual figure fluctuation reduction function) Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the variation display period of identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the variation display period for each variation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the actual measurement value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are multiple types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (the sum of “selection probability × variable display period”). If there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type The variable display period itself is (that is, includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of loss, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variable display period with the highest selection probability In other words, it is possible to supplement the fact that the meaning of this wording is to be used as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that can be experienced by the player. As a method of realizing different "average values", the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are changed, or even if the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are the same, a further variable display period is added. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing this, but it is not limited to any method). “The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is different from the first period. "At least having a variable period state" means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states) For example, the state transition of “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” is made according to the number of times of display of the identification information. Including those that can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured as “first variation period state” <“second variation period state” <“third variation period state”, It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the reverse state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it becomes suitable when used in combination with the probability variation gaming state that continues until the next jackpot + the easy-to-open-chuo state (the next jackpot is not obtained despite the situation where the next jackpot occurrence is definite) As the situation continues, the speed of progress of the game increases, so there is a case where it is possible to dispel the feeling of fatigue during so-called humming. Further, as a feature of each state, in the “first variation period state”, the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is “ In the “third variation period state”, which is smaller than the difference in the “second variation period state”, the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of losing and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hitting In addition to the difference being smaller than that in the “second variation period state”, the identification information variation display period is likely to be relatively long compared to the “first variation period state” (particularly in the event of a loss) In other words, in the “second variation period state”, the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is relatively long compared to other states. (I.e., the fluctuation display period for short fluctuations where the loss is definitive and the fluctuation display period for medium fluctuations suggesting a hit are not selected (or difficult to select), but the fluctuations in reach fluctuations (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that it has a feature that only the display period is selected (or is easily selected)}. The “specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game” may be a period from immediately after the end of the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made. It may be a period from the time when one or more symbol changes are made after the execution of the game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed) If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within the range, so the aforementioned “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” The specific period may mean the stay period of the “first variation period state” and / or the “second variation period state”. “When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold” means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the hold-up, but there is a possibility that a special game will occur There are no particular limitations on the criteria. More specifically, “winning random number (random number for success / failure lottery)”, “variation mode determination random number” for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, “symbol determination random number” for determining the stop symbol, Random values such as “hit symbol determination random numbers” that determine whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a criterion for judgment, and event contents derived from these random values (results of success / failure determination) The length of the variation time, the type of stop symbol, whether or not to shift to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. “Suggesting or notifying the presence of a hold” means, for example, an effect at the time of the on-hold digestion until reaching the hold (a design variation mode of a decorative design, or in conjunction with it) In the case of notification, for example, a display mode of a holding indicator lamp (which may be an image on a liquid crystal display device) at the time of occurrence of the holding Is changed (in that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the sound such as the on-hold sound or BGM is changed at the time of the on-hold occurrence, and the effect lamp at the time of the on-hold occurrence Changing the lighting mode of the (frame lamp, etc.), or executing mode of other effects (decoration pattern of the decorative pattern, background effects, etc. performed in conjunction with it) executed at the time of the hold occurrence The To reduction, and the like.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. In addition, in this example, “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that this is an associated mode. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, by the time shortening game and non- It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intention that the probability variation gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to continue substantially), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Prior to the detailed description of the present invention, a simple configuration according to the present invention will be described.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, in the game in the probability variation gaming state (and time-reduced gaming state) with a limited number of times, it is selected when the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol becomes a predetermined number A configuration in which the candidates for the variation mode (variation time) are different (switched) will be described in detail in this embodiment.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed, even if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed across the next effect stage, it is executed as it is. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect related to the loss is executed, if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next effect stage, the pre-reading effect ends with the final change in the current effect stage. The configuration changed to is described in detail in (Modification 1 from this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect content determination tables are provided in a certain stay stage, and which effect content table is to be determined with reference to which effect content table during a special game Will be described in detail in (Modification 2 from this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the present embodiment, the period (number of fluctuations) in the time-reduced gaming state after the special game varies depending on the jackpot symbol, and the period in the time-reducing gaming state is A configuration that is changed so that the same variation mode determination table can be referred to in the short and long cases will be described in detail in (Modification 3 from this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the present embodiment, a small hit that does not switch the gaming state related to the winning probability of the main game and / or the auxiliary game, and the winning probability of the main game and / or the auxiliary game A configuration in which a short opening big hit that can switch the gaming state according to the present invention is provided and the opening manner of the big winning opening is changed to be substantially the same (the contents of the effects are also substantially the same) is described in detail in (Modification 4 from this embodiment). Explained.

  Of the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, in the case of switching from the stage of staying (type of display mode such as background effects) to the next stage of production from the configuration of (this embodiment), the person is staying. In the final variation of the production stage, a dedicated production at the time of production stage switching (production that suggests that the stage is switched) can be executed, and at the time of production execution the change is made so that a dedicated table is referenced. This will be described in detail in (Modification 5 from this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the present embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game is determined by the jackpot symbol, and the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the probability The configuration in which the duration of the production stage can be different from the variable gaming state, and the configuration in which the expectation level of the probability variation gaming state is increased depending on the duration of the production stage (from this embodiment) The modification example 6) will be described in detail.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the present embodiment, at the end of the special game, it is configured to be able to execute an end demo effect that notifies the result of the special game, etc., and after the end of the demo effect ( After a special game), a predetermined period after the start of the main game symbol change (specific game) (if there is a big hit hold, if there is no big hit hold until the end of the big hit change, the change related to the hold currently present Until the end), if there is a big hit in the hold at the end of the special game by displaying an effect substantially the same as the demonstration effect, until the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit hold A configuration that is changed so that substantially the same image as the demonstration effect is displayed will be described in detail in (Modification 6 from this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a gaming machine that determines whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game, depending on whether or not the gaming ball has entered a specific area in the special game (so-called In the case of a game machine of the ball type), the variation mode (and production) in the non-stochastic game state and the time-reduced game state when the probability variation game state is not achieved is changed to the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation game state. A configuration that is different from the above will be described in detail in (Second Embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the (second embodiment), the big hit on the second main game side is more profitable than the big hit on the first main game side, and the main game hold is won. In a game machine that digests in order, in order to digest at a high speed the hold on the first main game side remaining at the start of the specific game immediately after the first hit, between the 8 fluctuations to digest the maximum number of remaining hold, A configuration in which the variation in loss is changed to be a short time will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the second embodiment).

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, in a gaming machine that does not have only one big winning opening, a block that restricts the entry to a specific area provided in the big winning opening by a big hit symbol (and a round to be executed) A configuration in which the drive patterns of the members are different will be described in detail in (Third Embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the (third embodiment), as the opening pattern of the shielding member provided in the special winning opening, a long opening pattern in which a game ball can easily enter a specific area, and a specific It has a short opening pattern in which game balls are difficult to enter in the area, and the first half of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the shielding member is the same operation in the long opening pattern and the short opening pattern The changed configuration will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the third embodiment).

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, after a discharge ball abnormality occurs in a certain round related to the opening / closing of the distribution winning prize opening, the opening / closing operation of the round related to the opening / closing of the normal winning opening which is the next round is completed. If the discharge ball abnormality has not been resolved even after the round end waiting time (the time when the closing time and the preparation time are combined) has elapsed, the round end waiting time for the round related to the opening / closing of the normal prize winning opening A configuration in which is extended will be described in detail in (Fourth Embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the (fourth embodiment), when the game ball enters the second main game start port (2) B10-2 during the special game, the second main game A configuration that has been changed so as to be able to cause a hold will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the game is selected in the event that the symbol variation related to the small hit is executed in the game in the probability variation gaming state (and the time shortening gaming state) with a limited number of times. When the variation mode (variation time) candidates are configured to be different and the selected variation mode (variation time) candidates are different (in the limited frequency state), A configuration in which a specific effect is not executed will be described in detail in (Fifth Embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of the (fifth embodiment), after the end of the special game, transition to the limited frequency state based on the jackpot symbol, after the end of the special game, A configuration that is changed so as to execute a specific effect related to the loss will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment).

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured so that the limited frequency state is different so that the display presence / absence of execution related to the remaining probability variation number, the execution mode of the content to be executed, and the like can be different. Next, a configuration in which the subsequent production mode may be different due to over winning in the special winning opening during the special game will be described in detail in (Sixth embodiment).

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has mechanisms for storing game balls, sending the game balls to the launching rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22, and a sound effect corresponding to the gaming state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and flow down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start opening A10, but difficult to be guided to the second main game start opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. . Note that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, based on the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are fired on the right side and the left side, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper portion of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) can be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. {However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game balls flowing down the reference) may be configured not to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Next, a first grand prize winning port C10 and a second grand prize winning port C20 are provided above the out port D36, and a game ball flowing down the right side or the left side (based on the center of the game region) of the game region D30. Is configured so as to easily pass through the area where the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out mouth D36.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and is an out port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above D36. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). A mouth electric accessory solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1 big prize opening electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) Velo type attackers) and the opening on the passage where the game ball can roll as a big prize opening, and a mode in which the opening is closed and open (so-called slide type attacker) Well, it is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above the opening D36. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). A mouth electric accessory solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of lose. {However, it is not limited to this. A 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 Turning on / off the launching device D42 that launches each ball, the launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch, is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st grand prize opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21s, general prize detection apparatus (not shown, but the general prize opening is always open regardless of whether or not a special game is executed) In addition, there is a winning entrance where there is a prize ball but no symbol lottery is performed)}, driving solenoids (not shown) (the first big prize opening electric combination solenoid C13, the second big prize opening electric combination solenoid C23 described above). Etc.), information display LEDs (not shown), and the like, which are input / output devices essential for the progress of the game, such as game peripheral devices (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first・ Second main game shared peripheral C, auxiliary game lap Equipment H) and are electrically connected to, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) relating to the production / game progress state can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching apparatus D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown) It is connected to a so-called movable object for production). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) Control of lighting of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control part SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  First, the main control board M has a game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of games such as special games and specific games. A game progress means MP for managing the game, a game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information relating to the game state and the like, and various game information {eg, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {eg, , 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss}, information relating to variation mode (for example, variation time), special game start signal / status information / end signal, hold information, etc.} (And a command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating unsent commands) and the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out predetermined prize balls based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes. Has a prize balls paid out determination means MH, the.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the entrance determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls to each entrance (starting opening, etc.), and the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting port during the variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the entrance determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start entrance A10, and a second main game start entrance. The second main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and the auxiliary game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10 In the first winning prize entrance determining means MJ11-C10 and the second winning prize opening C20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first winning prize opening C10. And a second grand prize opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result, To first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, first winning random number, first variation mode determining random number, first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and second main game starting port B10 And determining whether or not to acquire the second main game random number based on the incoming game ball, and depending on the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number and the like, and an auxiliary game random number for determining whether or not the auxiliary game side random number can be acquired and acquiring the random number based on the determination result Acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H That.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “random number” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 and the hold digest control means MJ31 for controlling the processing related to the hold digest and the fluctuation start, and the first main game random number obtained in a situation where the change permission of the first main game symbol is not given. Is stored temporarily in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until permission to change the first main game symbol is granted based on the determination result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game random number acquired in a situation where the main game symbol holding means MJ32-A and the second main game symbol variation permission is not given, and based on the determination result The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding the random number in the second main game symbol hold information means MJ32b-B until the second main game symbol change permission is lowered, and the auxiliary game symbol change permission is Going down It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the auxiliary game side random number acquired in the situation where there is not, and based on the determination result, the random number is held in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the change permission of the auxiliary game symbol is granted Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for performing the game.

  Here, the pending digest control means MJ31 has a change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not a condition for starting change is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store a maximum of four, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporary storage in the form Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN specially determines whether or not to shift to a special game and whether or not to open the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d, and whether or not the lottery means MN10 is a win. Special game transition determining means MN20 for determining transition to a game (actuating a so-called condition device), symbol content determining means MN40 for determining a stop symbol for each symbol based on each random number, and based on each random number, It has a variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol. Here, the success / failure lottery means MN10 is a first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A that performs a success / failure lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game winner / rejection lottery unit that performs a success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for making a winning / notifying lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the success / failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbol. The first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol on / off lottery Each of which has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 and the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number) and the acquisition Based on the determined game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game content determination means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the determination. The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the variation mode determination unit MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first primary game random number). MN 51-A and second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), Auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number, and the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol are predetermined. In the case where the symbols are stopped and displayed, the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a limited frequency) in which only a specific variation mode (variation time, etc.) can be selected until a predetermined number of symbol variations are completed. Can call Has a limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 for determining the fluctuation mode in the main game symbol (variable time, etc.), the at).

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state. The second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (for example, normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time shortening game → auxiliary game time shortening lottery table. ). Further, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 is a table that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol at the limited frequency, such as the game state and the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game. In order to determine which table of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta and the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to be referred to, the table to be referred to is determined. A limited frequency counter MN52c that counts the number of times the main game symbol has changed since the game has ended, and limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information related to the limited frequency (such as flag on / off). Have. When the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the variation mode selection rate is changed with reference to the common table (that is, the variation mode to be selected). The method is the same (but the selection rate is different) (or the variation mode and the selection rate to be selected are the same, but a further fixed value is added to the variation time value related to the selected variation mode. Or the like) may be adopted.

  Here, the limited frequency means that the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and / or selectivity.

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling to stop display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are assisted for a predetermined time. Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling to stop and display after changing the game symbol is provided.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a zero / clearable first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (for example, a decrement counter that is subtracted at predetermined intervals). Hereinafter, those similar to timers can be mounted with the same counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not a condition for performing the process of opening and closing the electric combination B11d of the second main game start opening B10 is satisfied. Second main game start port electric combination opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B and second main game start port electric combination for measuring the driving (opening) time of the electric combination B11d of the second main game start port B10 And an object release timer MP22t-B.

  Next, when the special game control means MP30 satisfies the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transfer condition, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second grand prize port C20 in a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first grand prize port) Special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second big prize opening C20). Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes first and second prize winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first prize winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 is provided. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. The special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table) Although not shown in detail, this is a table in which a large winning opening that is in an open state, the maximum number of rounds, the execution contents of one round, and the like are defined.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition for the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition for the time-reduced game state is satisfied. Has a short-time game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the probability change game end condition determination means MP51 and the time-short game end condition determination means MP52 each have a probability change count counter MP51c capable of counting the probability change count and a time-short count counter MP52c capable of counting the time limit count. Here, the probability variation gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of winning or failing the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is higher than the non-stochastic variation gaming state, and the time shortening gaming state Means that the average value of the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is shorter than the non-time-reduced game state, and / or the second main game start opening electric accessory per unit time It means a gaming state in which the ease of opening B11d is improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the auxiliary game symbol becomes a winning symbol with a high probability, and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 is relatively extended. (Open time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). The probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the short time game end condition determination means MP52 described above are, for example, a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. (A so-called pachinko gaming machine having a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, on / off of various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C are stopped according to the first or second main game symbol that is currently changing (the first or second main game symbol that satisfies the change start condition). There are first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as stop symbols related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbols (auxiliary game symbols for which the change start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. Effect display control means SM20 that controls the information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereafter, each said means is explained in full detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has main-side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the decorative pattern variation mode and stop symbol determination processing and display control processing, and the decorative symbol display control processing that holds the decorative symbol hold count management and hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, background effect display control means SM23 for determining background image determination processing and display control processing, notice effect display control means SM24 for controlling determination effect display processing and display control processing, and reach effect content It has a reach effect display control means SM25 that governs the determination process and the display control process, and a hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 for executing the hold prefetch effect.

  Here, the decorative design display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the display design content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design, and the decorative design display variation SM21n. The drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and the drawing variation time management timer SM21t for timing the variation time of the decorative symbols; ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further includes a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). (Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily stores information relating to the hold related to the decorative design (the same as the information transmitted from the main control board M side, details of which will be described later). For this purpose, it has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side, and the background effect (in this example, it is displayed on the back of the decorative symbol, and the possibility of executing the special game based on the information regarding the hold) In order to switch the effect stage, the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the effect), the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display, and the effect stage. The stay stage management counter SM23c that counts how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state since the end of the special game, and the number of consecutive resorts that counts the number of consecutive wins during the specific game Counter SM23c2.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side, and is displayed during the notice effect (in this example, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the expected degree of transition to the special game in the change) In order to temporarily store the information related to the notice effect display and the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content, display timing, etc. of the effect that suggests / informs the feasibility of the special game based on the information related to the hold. The notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, reaches the reach state (mainly during the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the reach state by the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. This is an effect that is executed after the fact that it has been notified, but it also includes an effect that is executed in conjunction with the change display of the decorative symbol even if it does not reach the reach state) Reach effect display content determining means SM25n to be determined, reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information relating to reach effect display, and effect content determination being a table for determining effect contents such as reach effects Table SM25ta.

  Next, the hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the hold pre-reading effect can be executed (for example, whether or not there is a hold that is expected to be a big hit in the hold). And a pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c for managing the progress of the reserved pre-reading effect when the reserved pre-reading effect is executed over a plurality of variations of the main game symbol.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control part) SS displays an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG and the sub information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub main control part SM side. Control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 includes a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display portion SG12 (and a second hold display portion SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. In addition, you may comprise so that another peripheral device may be controlled via the other peripheral device controlled by the main control board M and one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the initial setting is performed (not shown, but the register initialization, the input / output port setting, etc. are performed), and then in step 1002, the main control board M displays the RAM clear button Whether the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by a game hall manager or the like. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up to the RAM in Step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in Step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, at step 1550, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1910, the main control board M (especially the winning ball payout determining means MH) wins the winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH is executed, and a process for managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1920, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (information output to the external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1930, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being performed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball enters (inflow, passes in the case of a gate) at the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on how many pieces are held, in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 and step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and holds the ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag). In addition to obtaining the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, a stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, auxiliary game) When the time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off), and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are “D0, D1, D2” as the stop symbols, and “D1, D2” as the stop symbols as the winning symbols. In the non-time-reduced game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed), and the open mode of the electric combination that will be opened is stopped. When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is (0.2 second open → 0.8 second closed → 5.0 second open, closed) (longest open). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed). When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → close). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during non-time-reduced games, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during time-reduced games.

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H determines the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is off) is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. In step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1 · D2 in this example). Determine. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side, and in the release mode (for example, in the case of the winning symbol “D1”). Open for 1 second-> Close for 1 second-> Open for 1 second-> Close for 1 second-> Open for 1 second-> Closed for release symbol "D2": Open for 0.2 seconds, Close for 0.8 seconds, 5), and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric game product is set in the second main game start opening electric game product release timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B starts the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and then the second main game start port electric accessory opening combination. Open the object B11d. Next, in step 1238, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game short time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1239, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game stop symbol, and whether or not the stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2 in this example). Determine. In the case of Yes in Step 1239, in Step 1240, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is the information indicating that the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is started. The longest object release start command is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In addition, in this embodiment, when the main game time short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is kept open is the longest. Has been.

  Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and determines the time for opening the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B changes the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10. At the same time, it closes and turns off the opening of the electric-powered article in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1248, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is an information indicating that the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d has been completed, and is an electric accessory longest release end command to the sub side. Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1242. If No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224, and No in Step 1206, Step 1224, Step 1230, Step 1238, Step 1239, and Step 1242. In this case, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game start entrance entrance information from the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. Is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and determines the main game (especially the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning lottery random number for determining success / failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 sets information (holding occurrence command) indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM ( Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1930).

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game start entrance ball judging means MJ11-B enters the second main game start entrance ball from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. It is determined whether or not information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and determines the main game (especially the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired in the same manner as the first main game symbol determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the first lottery random number for the first main game and the right lottery random number for the second main game) Are set to the same range. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 sets information (holding occurrence command) indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM ( Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). In the case of No in Step 1302 and Step 1304, the process proceeds to Step 1312. In the case of No in Step 1312 and Step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 1400).

  In this embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in Step 1310 and Step 1320. The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, and the information indicating that a random number has been acquired can be substituted by these pieces of information.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether there is no hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {the process of steps 1400 (1) and (2)} Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and performs the next process {steps 1400 (1) and (2). Process}.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the pending digest control means MJ31 determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is displayed), during the variable fixed time, It may be configured not to satisfy

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digest control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation that is temporarily stored is read and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the success / failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. Based on 1 main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, a winning lottery random number), a main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A (second main game symbol determining means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second With reference to the main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number) Stop symbols related to the symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when winning a big hit, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of special game rounds determined by referring to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. May}

  Next, in step 1411, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN 52 c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1411, in other words, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation / non-time shortened gaming state), in step 1412, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51 -A (second main game variation) The mode determining means MN51-B) refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) corresponding to each game state, and the main game symbol Based on the result of the lottery determination and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the fluctuation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and these are determined as the first and second main games. The symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to Step 1414.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the result of lottery determination of the main game symbol. That is, when the result of the main game symbol is a winning lottery, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. It goes without saying. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the change is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, in other words, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, in step 1450, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN 52 executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1413, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1414. Further, the process of step 1413 may be executed immediately after the result of step 1420 becomes Yes (timing at which the variation time ends).

  Next, in step 1414, the game content determination means MN determines the commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) relating to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Change mode information, etc.) and a command (symbol change display start instruction command) relating to the current gaming state are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission processing in step 1930) Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1415, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the main game symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that the symbol variation has ended (the symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The change display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display part B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as the fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, at step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the game content determination means MN sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter. In addition, in this example, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a specific game state (the process of a probability variation game state with a frequency | count limitation and a time reduction game state) after completion of the special game which concerns on all the jackpot symbols. Next, in step 1440, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, at step 1500, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1550). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is a value within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50). . In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination first lottery table MN52ta-1, and based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination, the main game The variation mode (variation time) related to the symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 13 (limited frequency table 1) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 50). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. In addition, compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average variation time. The limited frequency table 1 and the limited frequency table 3 are configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  As a comparison method of the limited frequency table, as a variation time value selected when the number of reserves on the second main game side is a loss variation of a predetermined number (2 in this example) or more, a variation of a predetermined time or less Comparison based on whether or not a pattern is selected, comparison with a level of a big hit when variation over a predetermined time is selected, variation mode selected at the time of loss (or more than a predetermined time selected at the time of loss) There is a method of comparing the average value of the fluctuation mode), and the like, and the variation time may be different when the comparison is performed by the limited frequency table referred to when the fluctuation mode is determined.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining second lottery table MN52ta-2, and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, the second main game. Based on the number of reserved balls on the side, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 13 (limited frequency table 2) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50 ≧ G> 10). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time as compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3. Further, the limited frequency table 2 is configured such that the average fluctuation time is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved balls.

  In this example, the comparison of the length of the variation time is compared with the average variation time based on the selection probability of the variation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation time that can be selected in each limited frequency table is compared. You may compare by the minimum time value. For example, regarding a variation mode determination table for a loss in a time-saving gaming state, for a certain limited frequency table (for example, limited frequency table α), the minimum time value of the variable mode is set to 5 seconds regardless of the number of holds, while others For the limited frequency table (for example, the limited frequency table β), the minimum time value in the case of 0 hold is 5 seconds, the minimum time value in the case of 1 hold is 3 seconds, and the minimum in the case of 2 or 3 holds The time value may be 1 second. By configuring in this way, the limited frequency table β has higher fluctuation efficiency at the time of reference than the limited frequency table α, and the limited frequency table β has three minimum time values depending on the number of holds. It will be. In addition, when determining the change mode of the main game symbol after the end of the special game on a gaming machine configured so that the probability change game state will continue until the next big hit when the transition to the probability change game state after the end of the special game In the case where the limited frequency table α is referred to and the limited frequency table to be referred to is switched to the limited frequency table β after the end of the variation of the main game symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the special game ends, When the number of times of change of the main game symbol (for example, 100 times) more than the predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is required from the end of the special game until the next jackpot is won, the predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) ) By referring to the limited frequency table β when deciding the subsequent variation mode, the variation time is relatively shorter than when the limited frequency table α is referred to, and after the special game ends, It is possible to shorten the time until the Ritonaru, the player will be to be able to continue the game without getting tired in a situation where the next big hit is guaranteed. In addition, a game machine (so-called ST-type game machine) configured to shift to a normal game state at the end of a specific number of times (for example, 80 times) when a transition is made to a probability variation game state after the end of a special game. When determining the variation mode of the main game symbol after the end of the special game, the limited frequency table β is referred to, and after the end of the variation of the main game symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 75 times) after the end of the special game. When the limited frequency table to be referred to is switched to the limited frequency table α, the fluctuation time after a predetermined number of times (for example, 75 times) becomes a fixed time (for example, 5 seconds) or more, and the limited frequency table In the variation in which the variation mode is determined with reference to α, it is possible to reliably ensure the time for performing the effect of hitting the player whether or not the probability variation gaming state is ended. That. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the minimum time value, the type of the minimum time value, the predetermined number of times, the specific number of times, the fixed time, etc. in such a configuration are changed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1456, in other words, if the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the third stage range (10 ≧ G), in step 1460, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 determines the limited frequency variation. With reference to the mode determination third lottery table MN52ta-3, based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the next processing (processing of step 1413) Transition.

  Here, FIG. 13 (limited frequency table 3) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (10 ≧ G). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

  Note that the content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side is only in a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reserves (both on the first main game side and the second main game side). Otherwise, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holds, and on the second main game side, if the number of holds is a predetermined number or more, the number of holds It is desirable to have a relatively shorter variation time than when the number is less than or equal to the predetermined number.

  In this embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3 is switched in three stages in this order (so-called three-stage ST). However, there is no problem even if the number of types of the limited frequency tables is changed and the order of the tables to be referenced is changed. Furthermore, there are two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 1 as a three-stage ST mode. Also good.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, at step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the count value of the probability variation counter MP51c. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1510. Note that if the answer is No in step 1502 or 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

  Next, in step 1510, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Note that if the answer is No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the special game control means MP30 determines that the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in step 1556, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, at step 1558, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1562, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). In the case of No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In step 1930, the control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission is not granted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910).

  Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, when it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 is set to the release pattern set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (for example, keeps releasing). Open pattern and open / close pattern). Next, in step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 uses the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). Drive to open the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20), set a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer), and start, step 1622 Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1612, that is, when the big prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the special game executing means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current round number, game ball winning number, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930). Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. ) Is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) to determine a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the special prize opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. In the case of No in step 1626, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1910).

  Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 determines the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The driving is stopped and the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (especially an opening time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1930). Then, in step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1910). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1910).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1658, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1658, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910).

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting, such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is stored). If received, the sub-side RAM is initialized, various information commands are received, and the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (f) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the process of (f) of the figure, first, in step 2050, the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs a stay stage determination process to be described later. Execute. Next, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, at step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2900, the sub game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes a display command transmission control process (transmits commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side). The repetition processing routine is terminated.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2050 to S2900) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5E is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is sent to one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives the command input port (from the main control board M side). Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (eg, main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is restored.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the specific game has started on the main side (in this example, transition to the probability variation / time reduction game state). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2056, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific game running flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2066.

  Here, the specific game running flag is a flag indicating a specific game (for example, a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state, so-called ST) state, and is turned on when the specific game starts. The jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is turned off when the value exceeds an upper limit (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2052, in Step 2058, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the specific game has ended {for example, determination with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, or stay Determine whether the value of the stage management counter SM23c exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs)}. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2062, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game running flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2064, the background effect display control means SM23 counts the consecutive game count counter SM23c2 (a counter for counting the number of consecutive big hits during a specific game, and the value is added in the processing of step 2410 described later. ) Is reset (cleared to zero), and the process proceeds to Step 2066. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2058, the process proceeds to Step 2066.

  Next, in step 2066, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the specific game running flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 2066, in Step 2068, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2068, in step 2070, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c (increment), and proceeds to step 2072. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2068, the process proceeds to step 2072 without executing the process of step 2070.

  Next, in Step 2072, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is a value (1 to 30) within the first range. In the case of Yes in Step 2072, in Step 2074, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “short effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (Step 2100). The process proceeds to (1).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2072, in Step 2076, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the second range (31 to 70). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2076, in step 2078, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “long effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2100). The process proceeds to (1).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2076, in step 2080, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 80). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2080, in step 2082, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “fixed effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2100). The process proceeds to (1). It should be noted that if the result of Step 2066 and Step 2080 is No (for example, when the game is not in a specific game), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2100).

  In the present embodiment, the third stage (fixed production stage) is only one type (5 seconds in this example) and one type of production content (in this example, prefetching) regardless of the result of the lottery. Although the display contents are different at the time of non-prefetching, the system is only a fixed time effect), but a plurality of variation modes and effect contents may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the number of types of production contents in the third stage is smaller than that in the second stage (long production stage). As the tendency, it is desirable that the number of types of both the variation pattern and the production content is “second stage> first stage> third stage”.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the stay stage for determining the content of the effect based on the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c that counts the number of symbol fluctuations during the specific game.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a new electric machine longest release start command has been received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in Step 2102, in other words, when the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is started, in Step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily stores the drawing hold information. The electric component longest open flag in the flag area of the means SM22b is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b, and issues a new electric accessory longest release end command from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not it has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2106, in other words, when the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is completed, in step 2108, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold information temporary storage means. The electric utility longest open flag in the flag area of SM22b is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2106, the process proceeds to step 2110.

  Here, the longest open flag of the electric accessory is the period during which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the release mode in which the time for which the second main game start opening B11d is continuously opened is the longest (longest open). Is used to determine that the hold that occurred when the longest open flag of the electric accessory is on is based on the entry of the game ball that has been opened for the longest time. It is a flag. In the present embodiment, the longest open flag of the electric accessory is turned on only in the non-time-saving game.

  Next, in step 2110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and receives a new hold occurrence command (first main game symbol or second main game) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information related to the symbol has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, “1” is added (incremented) to the maximum number of second main games. Next, in step 2114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, and holds information (in particular, a random value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, Random lottery random numbers / design lottery random numbers / variation mode random numbers) are temporarily stored in the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b.

  Next, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the electric-worker object longest open flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2116, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the newly temporarily held hold is a hold on the second main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 adds information indicating that the hold has occurred at the time of the longest release of the electric accessory to the newly temporarily stored hold information. 2122. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2116 or step 2118, the process proceeds to step 2122 without executing the process in step 2120.

  Next, in step 2122, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 pre-determines the success / failure result of each hold based on the hold information (especially the lottery random number) that is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. To do. Next, in step 2124, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a hold that is a winning (big hit) among the holds that are consumed before the new hold based on the result of the prior determination. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2124, in step 2150, a prefetch effect execution determination process described later is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2142. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124, the process proceeds to step 2142 without executing the process in step 2150. Next, in step 2142, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 makes full use of the sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS) on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display portion SG12, the second hold display). In part SG13), the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2200).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, whether the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2130. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2130, in step 2132, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2134, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the hold information related to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information.

  Next, in step 2136, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the digested hold is a hold generated when the electric utility object is fully opened. In the case of Yes in step 2136, in step 2138, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the longest open time hold permission permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. 2140. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2136, the process proceeds to step 2140 without executing the process in step 2138. It should be noted that the longest opening effect is generated only (or generated) when the symbol changes to the pitch when entering the second main game start opening electric component B11d when the electric component is longest opened. For example, a change in the hold display mode, a change in the selected content of the effect (a change in the background or notice content), and the like.

  Next, in step 2140, the sub game control means (sub main control part) SM turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2142. . In the case of No in step 2130, the process of steps 2132 to 2140 is not executed, the process proceeds to step 2142, the hold display process is performed, and then the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). To do.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the newly generated hold is a hold on the second main game side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the stay stage currently set (temporary storage) is “long effect stage”. It is determined whether or not.

  In the case of Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k is based on the hold information (particularly, the variation mode determination random number, etc.) temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Pre-determine new hold variation time. Next, in step 2160, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the new hold variation time is determined to be equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Here, when the change time is preliminarily determined, for example, when the change mode random number value of the new hold is 900 to 1023, the change time is 10 seconds or more regardless of the hold number at the time of the new hold. Can be determined (see FIG. 13).

  In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit (for example, determination based on the winning lottery random number). . In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a pre-reading effect lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, in step 2166, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5, but it may be lower than the winning probability in step 2164). A pre-reading effect lottery to be won is executed, and the flow shifts to step 2176.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2156, in step 2168, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the stay stage currently set (temporary storage) is “fixed effect”. It is determined whether or not it is a “stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit (for example, determination based on the winning lottery random number). . In the case of Yes in step 2170, in step 2172, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a pre-reading effect lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, ¼), and the process proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2170, in step 2174, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, 1/6, but may be lower than the winning probability in step 2172). The pre-reading effect lottery to be won is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

  Next, in step 2176, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the pre-reading effect lottery (the lottery of any of step 2164, step 2166, step 2172, or step 2174) has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2176, in step 2178, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the number of holds temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and holds that won the lottery (trigger hold). Deriving the number Ha (0 to 4 times) of fluctuation stoppage of the main game symbol until the game is digested. Next, in step 2180, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and based on the counter value, determines the number of times Hb the variable game has stopped until the current stay stage ends. To derive.

  Here, the fluctuation stop count Hb includes the fluctuation stop count of the symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, as described later, whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined at the time of starting the change. is there.

  Next, in step 2182, the pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determination unit SM26k executes the pre-reading effect (Ha in this example) is the minimum number of pre-reading effects (the minimum number of times for executing an effective pre-reading effect). For example, it is determined whether or not it is two times or more. In the case of Yes in step 2182, in step 2184, the pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM26k satisfies the relationship Ha and Hb derived Ha and Hb (the pre-reading effect ends during the current stay stage). Whether or not). In the case of Yes in step 2184, in step 2186, the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k sets Ha to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2142). Note that if any of Step 2152, Step 2154, Step 2160, Step 2168, Step 2176, Step 2182, and Step 2184 is No, the processing proceeds to the next processing (Step 2142 processing).

  In this way, when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations does not end during the current stay stage, the pre-reading effect is not executed (in particular, step 2184), so that the table switching and the pre-reading effect are executed simultaneously. This is not done, and it is possible to avoid a situation that confuses the player. In the present embodiment, after the pre-reading effect lottery is executed, whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined according to the determination as to whether or not the stay stage is crossed. The order may be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be configured to execute a pre-reading effect lottery after it is determined to straddle the stay stage {that is, when it is planned to straddle the stay stage, In the first place, a configuration in which the pre-reading effect lottery itself is not executed, or a configuration in which the pre-read lottery is executed only for the hold scheduled to be consumed in the current stay stage (in other words, the hold scheduled to be used in the next stay stage) It also includes a configuration that does not read ahead as a trigger).

  Note that the pre-reading effect in this example may include a change related to the trigger hold in the effect that occurs even with the change related to the trigger hold, that is, the plurality of changes in the pre-read effect over a plurality of changes. For example, an effect in which an effect of the same mode or an effect of the same system is generated from a change before the change related to the trigger hold to a change related to the trigger hold.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, even when the end of the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations is after the end of the current stay stage (or switching), the pre-reading effect can be executed, When the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations straddles the end (or switching) of the stay stage, the expectation that becomes a big hit in any of the fluctuations related to the pre-reading effect does not straddle the end (or switching) of the stay stage. You may comprise so that it may be relatively higher than the case where production is performed. In such a configuration, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention on whether or not the pre-reading effect occurs across the end (or switching) of the stay stage (and effect), and the interest of the game It will be possible to improve the nature.

  In addition, when the pre-reading effect can be executed even when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, the pre-reading effect is until the final change at which the current stay stage ends. It may be configured to end (suspend) at. In addition, when the pre-reading effect is interrupted, a pre-reading effect different from the interrupted pre-reading effect (for example, a pre-reading effect or other effects corresponding to the effect at the stay stage after switching) can be executed instead. May be.

  In addition, in a certain stay stage, a high expectation effect or a pre-reading effect informing that a variation mode having a long variation time is selected in the subsequent variation, and the high expectation effect or If the variation mode with a long variation time is not selected, the high expectation effect or the variation mode with a long variation time may be selected at the next stay stage. In addition, in such a configuration, the look-ahead effect at the next stay stage is made in accordance with the next stay stage, and when all the current main game holding balls are digested, the next stay is ensured. It is desirable that the prefetch effect is executed only when the stage is reached.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b (symbol information ( Referring to the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol Is determined to be a flat pattern such as “7.7.7” or a lost symbol such as “1.3.5”} and a variation mode, and the display display related information temporary storage means SM21b ( And temporary notice related information temporary storage means SM24b and reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b).

  Next, in step 2250, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) execute an effect content determination process described later. Next, in step 2208, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2300 processing). Transition. Note that, also in the case of No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, at step 2252, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the specific game running flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the longest release hold effect permission flag is off. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly the normal time table (longest open time hold effect permission flag off) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol}. }, The contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2254, in step 2258, the reach effect display control means SM25 turns off the longest release time hold permission permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2260, the reach effect display control means SM25 turns on the effect release flag for holding at the longest release time in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2262, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly, the normal time table (longest open time hold permission permission flag on}) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. Then, the contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, FIG. 24 is an example of the effect content determination table SM25ta. In particular, the normal performance content determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the performance in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and based on the variation mode of the main game symbol as shown in the figure. , One effect content is determined from a plurality of effect content candidates. In addition, when the longest open-time hold production permission flag is on, an effect similar to the production during the stay in the “long production stage” is determined (the longest open-time hold production permission flag is set). If it is “off”, the player can easily recognize that the effect during the stay in the “long stage” does not occur during the non-time-reduced game, and that the change is related to the hold that occurred at the time of the longest release. it can). In addition, this example is only an example, and the content of the production, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, etc. are not limited to this. You may comprise so that the content may be determined (It may comprise so that a different production can be performed when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the main game side is the same).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, on the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, that is, in the case where the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, in step 2264, the reach effect display control means SM 25 Referring to the execution counter SM26c, it is determined whether or not the counter value is greater than 0 (a situation in which a prefetch effect is executed). In the case of Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the pending prefetch effect execution control means SM26 decrements (decrements) the value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. Next, in step 2268, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the currently set stay stage is the “long effect stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the hold prefetching effect execution control means SM26 reads a prefetching effect dedicated to the “long effect stage” (for example, “after XX times ...!” And the prefetching effect execution counter SM26c. The command for displaying the effect of counting down the value of () is set, and the process proceeds to Step 2274.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2268, in other words, when the prefetching effect is executed in the “fixed effect stage”, in step 2272, the holding prefetch effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the “fixed effect stage” is changed. The stage content is determined as a pre-read stage stage effect (for example, a stage display color changing stage based on the big hit expectation level), and the process proceeds to step 2274. In the case of No in step 2264, the process proceeds to step 2274.

  Next, at step 2274, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta (particularly, the table for the specific game) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol and the currently set stay stage. Then, the contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, the specific game time effect content determination table in FIG. 24 is a table that is referred to when determining the effect in the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state (80 STs in this example). As shown, the content of the effect is switched according to the set stay stage (the number of times of variation during the ST) (the content of the effect is also switched in response to the change of the variation mode / variation time of the main game symbol). Configured). An example of the content of the production will be described. The fixed time production, which is the production selected as the “fixed production stage”, starts with the variation of the decorative design, as shown in the image diagram at the bottom of the figure. When the image related to the change is displayed for 1 second, the effect at the success / failure stage is displayed for 1 second. Here, the effect at the success / failure stage is an image that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB if the pre-reading effect is not executed, and after the effect is displayed, there is an operation of the sub input button SB or for another 1 second. When the time elapses, the display shifts to the effect display in the success / failure notification stage. On the other hand, if the pre-reading effect is being executed, the effect at the success / failure stage is the effect that the display color of the background image changes determined in the process of step 2268 (ie, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB does not occur). ), And when one second elapses after the effect display, the display shifts to the effect display in the success / failure notification stage. Next, in the success / failure notification stage, an effect is provided to notify the player whether the variation is a win or a loss. When the pre-reading effect continues, the execution state of the pre-reading effect (in this example, the background display color) may be inherited until the end of the pre-reading effect. When the fixed time has passed), an image for notifying the result of the change is displayed. In addition, this example is only an example, and the content of the production, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, etc. are not limited to this. You may comprise so that the content may be determined (It may comprise so that a different production can be performed when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the main game side is the same). Although not specifically shown in the present example, a dedicated effect (for example, a super battle reach, a special battle reach, etc.) is executed at any stay stage during the specific game even when the first main game side holds out. You may comprise so that it may obtain. In addition, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB may be configured not to be executed in a situation where the effect execution scale is difficult to secure (for example, when staying in the “short effect stage” in this example). Is preferred.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the design content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2310. In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2311, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decorative symbol change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). Then, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2312, in step 2316, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2316, in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing in step 2900). The process proceeds to step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2316, in step 2320, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2900). At step 2330, and the process proceeds to step 2330. Note that if the result in Step 2320 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board from the main control board M side). It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed has been received). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2331, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the decorative symbol stop display command (determined display command) (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). To do). Next, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2400). To do. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2310 or Step 2330, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit is not the initial hit (the big hit in the non-probability variation / non-time shortened gaming state). It is determined whether or not. If YES in step 2406, the process proceeds to step 2410. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2406 (if it is the first hit), in step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the effect for holding at the longest open time It is determined whether or not the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2408, in step 2409, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the longest open effect execution flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and goes to step 2410. Transition.

  Next, in step 2410, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 (increment) to the value of the extended game count counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 2412. In the case of No in step 2408, the process proceeds to step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412 and step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and makes a big hit on the effect display device SG. Start display is performed (display is appropriately performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 2416. In the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2416.

  Next, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the winning number on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpot It may be executed as needed based on the type). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2, and determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the big hit being executed is the maximum round big hit (for example, 16R big hit, 7A -It is determined whether it is a big hit (7B symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls earned during consecutive games, and a plurality of types of identification). A command related to the display of special game or production during specific game, which is displayed only when a condition of one or a plurality of combinations such as generation of all effects is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 2426. On the other hand, if the answer is No in either step 2418 or step 2420, in step 2424, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the big hit in-progress display, and proceeds to step 2426.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the jackpot execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive hits of the jackpot (the initial hit is not counted), and the second main game start opening In the case where a big hit is caused by the holding caused by the entry of the electric accessory B11d during the longest opening, even if the big hit is the first hit, the second main game start opening electric combination is counted as the number of consecutive games. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of a change related to the hold that occurs during the longest release of the object B11d. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as conditions for generating an ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit with a specific effect) , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

  Next, in step 2426, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the background effect display control means SM23 performs jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs display appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2430, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). . Note that if the answer is No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Function)
Next, the effect | action in this embodiment is demonstrated, referring FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a prefetch effect during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a specific game is completed without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, in the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, after the number of holding balls on the first main game side is digested and the number of holding balls on the second main game side becomes four, at the timing of 1 in the figure The second main game symbol will start to change. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, when the main game symbol fluctuates 30 times after the special game, the short effect stage ends and the long effect stage is entered.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long production stage is 40 (Ha ≦ Hb). Will be. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first second main game symbol has started to change after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the change.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol related to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The change related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the change related to the trigger hold in the long performance stage is a change time of 10 seconds or more, and thus the change time is 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the pre-reading effect ends when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is three, and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long production stage is one (Ha> Hb). Will not be. Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 70 times after the special game, the long effect stage is ended and the process proceeds to the fixed effect stage.

  Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 2 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the fixed stage is finished is 10 (Ha ≦ Hb). Will be. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, since the first change of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the prefetch effect is executed from the change. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the pre-reading effect is ended when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends. Note that since the prefetching effect is a prefetching effect in the fixed effect stage, the fluctuation time related to the trigger suspension is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 80 times after the special game, the fixed effect stage ends and the specific game also ends.

  Next, the operation in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an action diagram showing a variation mode of a main game symbol during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a long production stage is complete | finished without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, under the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that becomes the first variation in the specific game is started. As shown in the lower part of the figure, at the time of losing, the limited frequency table 1 on the first main game side and the limited frequency table 1 on the second main game side have the same table contents and do not depend on the number of holds. . In this case (the contents of the table surrounded by a dotted line in the limited frequency table 1) is X. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from two to one due to the change.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the first main game symbol change that becomes the second change in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of change of the first main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the first main game side, and at the start of change of the first main game symbol related to timing 1 in the figure, the hold on the first main game side is Although there is one, the table contents to be referred to are X regardless of the number of holds.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the third variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the fifth variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from three to two due to the change. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to this timing, there are three holds on the second main game side, and at the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to the timing 3 in the figure, the hold on the second main game side is Although there is one, the table contents to be referred to are X regardless of the number of holds.

  In this way, in this example, during the short stage, regardless of whether the change is on the first main game side or the second main game side, and regardless of the number of holds, the change mode is determined. The contents of the referenced table are the same.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, since the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th change in the specific game, is finished, the short effect stage is ended and the long effect stage is switched. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 31st variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to when the timing is changed is Z. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 32nd variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to when the timing is changed are Y. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the second main game side, and at the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to the timing 6 in the figure, the hold on the second main game side is Since there are two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of holds (Y and Z).

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that becomes the 33rd variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to when the timing is changed is Z. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the change of the first main game symbol that is the 34th change in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to when the timing is changed are Y. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of the change of the first main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the first main game side, and at the beginning of the change of the first main game symbol related to the timing 8 in the figure, the hold on the first main game side is Since there are two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of holds (Y and Z).

  In this way, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode are the same regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side during the long performance stage. However, when the number of holdings is different, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode can be different.

  The contents of the table when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol during a specific game are not limited to this, and an example of the operation will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an action diagram showing a variation mode of a main game symbol during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a long production stage is complete | finished without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the second variation in the specific game is started. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the variation mode of the second main game symbol has different table contents depending on whether or not there is a hold on the first main game side at the time of losing. A case where there is a hold on the first main game side is defined as X '. The case where there is no hold on the first main game side is set as Y ′. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X ′ because there is a hold on the first main game side. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the fourth variation in the specific game, is started. Due to the change, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, the second main game symbol that is the fifth variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are Y 'because there is no hold on the first main game side. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change.

  Thus, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode on the second main game side during the short performance stage are configured to differ depending on whether or not there is a hold on the first main game side.

  Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, since the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th change in the specific game, is ended, the short effect stage is ended and the long effect stage is switched. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the 32nd variation in the specific game is started, and at the timing of 6 in the diagram, the second main game that becomes the 35th variation in the specific game. The design changes. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol at the timing of 5 in the figure, the number of the first main game side is one hold, whereas the change of the second main game symbol at the timing of 6 in the figure At the time, the number of holds on the first main game side is zero, but the table contents referred to when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol are the same, and the variation time is 10 seconds. ing.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of times of change of the main game symbol is predetermined in the game in the probability variation game state (and the time shortening game state) with the number of times limited. In response to the number of times, the candidates for the variation mode (variation time) to be selected are different (switched). In addition, by changing the contents of the effect according to the change of the change mode, the mode of the effect is changed in accordance with the progress of the game in the specific game {probability change game state with limited number of times (and time-reduced game state)}. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect straddles the end of the stay stage, the pre-reading effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect is appropriately executed. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect that further enhances the interest of the game. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 20 in the first modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2190 (Modification 1) and Steps 2192 (Modification 1) to Step 2196 (Modification 1), the purpose of which differs between the prefetching effect related to the big hit and the prefetching effect related to the loss. It is to execute processing. That is, in step 2190 (change 1), the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit. In the case of Yes in Step 2190 (Modification 1), the process proceeds to Step 2186. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2190 (Modification 1), in Step 2192 (Modification 1), the holding prefetch effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not Ha ≦ Hb, in other words, the prefetch effect is in the current performance stage. It is determined whether or not to end. In the case of Yes in Step 2192 (Modification 1), in Step 2194 (Modification 1), the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 sets Ha to the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of Step 2144). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2192 (Modified 1), in Step 2196 (Modified 1), the holding pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 sets Hb in the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c, and the next process (the process of Step 2144). Migrate to

  By changing as described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the prefetch effect related to the big hit is executed, the prefetch effect is not straddled even when it is scheduled to be executed over the next effect stage. On the other hand, when a pre-reading effect related to losing (so-called “gase effect”) is executed, if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stage, the current effect The pre-reading effect is configured to end at the final change in the stage, and various pre-reading effects are executed, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  Further, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect related to the loss is executed, if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next effect stage, the final change in the current effect stage is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect may be executed across the next effect stage even when the prefetch effect related to the loss is executed. .

  Further, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed, the pre-reading effect is also executed as it is when it is scheduled to be executed over the next effect stage. At the time of execution of the pre-reading effect, if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stage, the final stage of the stage is ended by the end of the pre-reading effect at the final change in the current stage. When the pre-reading effect is executed by the fluctuation, when the pre-reading effect is continuously executed by the next change, it becomes definite that the pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect related to the big hit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the change of the change of the production stage, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In this embodiment, after executing the pre-reading effect lottery, the pre-reading effect execution possibility determination (and determination of whether or not to interrupt) is performed according to the determination of whether or not to cross the stay stage. However, the order of processing related to the pre-reading effects may be changed as appropriate. For example, the pre-reading effect lottery may be executed after it is determined that the stay stage is crossed.

  In the first modification from the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is executed over the next effect stage, it becomes definite that it will be a big hit, and when it ends without straddling the next effect stage. Is configured to be definitive to be lost, but is not limited to this, conversely, it is configured to be a big hit when it ends without straddling the next stage of production Or, even if the pre-reading effect straddles the next effect stage or not straddling, it can be configured to win both big hits and loses, and the degree of expectation that will be a big hit may be different . Also, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed, if the pre-reading effect ends with the final change in the current stage, the big hit is deterministic due to the change related to the holding of the big hit (trigger hold). It may be configured to execute the following effects (for example, generation of a notification sound for determining the big hit, dropping of an object for determining the big hit, etc.).

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, each stay stage is always switched in the same pattern during a specific game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By providing a plurality of effect switching patterns during a specific game, It is possible to further improve the property. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 31 is an effect content determination table in the second modification from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is that two effect content determination tables (a reference table when selecting a battle mode and a reference table when selecting an escape mode) are provided in the long effect stage. As shown in the figure, the battle mode and the escape mode are configured such that the content of the effect corresponding to the variation mode of the main game symbol is different. In this example, two effect content determination tables are provided only for the long effect stage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of effect content determination tables may be three or more, and the same applies to other effect stages. A plurality of effect content determination tables may be provided.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 of FIG. 18 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are about Step 2425 (Modification 2) and Step 2500 (Modification 2), and the purpose is to execute the effect mode determination process. That is, in step 2425 (odd 2), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the running big hit is the first hit (the big win won in the normal game). In the case of Yes in Step 2425 (Modification 2), in Step 2500 (Modification 2), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an effect mode determination process described later, and proceeds to Step 1426. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2425 (Modification 2), the process proceeds to Step 2426.

  In this example, the effect mode determination process of step 2500 (change 2) is executed only in the case of the first hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be executed in all the big hits. Good.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the effect mode determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2500 (Modification 2) in FIG. 32 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. First, at step 2502, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the special game round being executed is the effect mode selection round (in this example, the third R). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to image display that prompts the effect mode selection (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). To do). Next, in Step 2506 (Modification 2), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the sub input button input detection device SBs and determines whether or not the sub input button SB is newly pressed. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 switches the effect mode that has been set (for example, battle mode → escape mode, escape mode → battle mode), and proceeds to step 2510. Note that if the answer is No in step 2502 or step 2506, the process proceeds to step 2510.

  Here, in this example, “battle mode” is set at the start of the production mode selection round, and when power interruption occurs after the production mode is determined, the “battle” which is the default production mode after the power interruption is restored "Mode" is configured to be reset.

  Next, at step 2510, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether the round of the special game being executed is the effect mode determination round (in this example, the fourth R) or not. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the effect mode set at the end of the effect mode selection round (in the display command transmission control process in step 2900, the sub-sub Is transmitted to the control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2426). Even in the case of No in step 2510, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2426).

  By changing as described above, in Modification 2 from the present embodiment, a plurality of effect content determination tables are provided in a certain stay stage, and the effect mode is determined with reference to which effect content table during the special game. The game can be arbitrarily selected by the player, so that the variation of the production during the specific game is increased, and the production can be performed according to the player's taste. The nature will increase.

(Modification 3 from this embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game and the number of changes in the probability-variable gaming state are always set to the same number of changes, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to create a new gameability by making the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game different from the number of changes in the probability-changing gaming state. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a third modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 34 shows a first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display) according to the subroutine of Step 1400 (1) {Step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 9 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. It is a flowchart of a process. The changes from this embodiment are for Step 1411-1 (Modified 3), Step 1450 (Modified 3) and Step 1700 (Modified 3), and the purpose is to play in the specific game after the jackpot is over by the jackpot symbol. The variation mode of the main game symbol is different. That is, if the limited frequency counter value is 0 in step 1411, in step 1411-1 (variant 3), the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 specifies the specific game in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. The type flag (high profit specific game flag, low profit similar specific game flag, low profit specific game flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1412. On the other hand, if the limited frequency counter value is not 0 in step 1411, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 executes a limited frequency fluctuation mode determining process described later in step 1450 (transition 3), and proceeds to step 1413.

If the stop symbol is a big hit symbol in step 1430, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 executes a limited frequency type determining process described later in step 1700 (variant 3), and proceeds to step 1440.
It becomes.

  Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1700 (Modification 3) in FIG. 34 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 sets a predetermined number A (for example, 80 times) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1706, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 turns on the long specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1440). .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in other words, if the big hit symbol is a big hit (initial hit) in the normal gaming state, in step 1708, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 makes a big hit in the stopped state. It is determined whether the symbol is a long specific game symbol (in this example, 7A, 7B, 5B, 4B). If YES in step 1708, the process proceeds to step 1704.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1708, in step 1710, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is a similar short specific game symbol (5A in this example). . In the case of Yes in step 1710, in step 1712, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 sets a predetermined number A (for example, 80 times) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1714, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 turns on the similar short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1440). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1710, in other words, when the big hit symbol being stopped is the short specific symbol (4A in this example), in step 1716, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines the limited frequency counter MN52c. Is set to a predetermined number of times B (for example, the number of times is 30, but is not limited to this. It is preferable that the number is less than the predetermined number of times A). Next, in step 1718, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 turns on the short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1440). .

  In this example, the long-specific game symbol and the similar short-specific game symbol are symbols that have a relatively large number of changes in the time-saving game state after the execution of the special game related to the symbol. The symbol is a symbol that allows the player to recognize that the number of times the player enters the time-saving gaming state at the start of the specific game related to the symbol is large, and the similar short specific game symbol is the player at the start of the specific game related to the symbol However, it is difficult to recognize that the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state is large (the same effect as when the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state is small). Further, the short specific game symbol is a symbol that has a relatively small number of fluctuations in a time-saving game state after the execution of the special game related to the symbol.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1450 (Modification 3) in FIG. 34 in Modification Example 3 from the present embodiment. First, in step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and determines whether or not the long specific game flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and whether the counter value G is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, A variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1454, in step 1458, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1458, in step 1460, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, the second Based on the number of reserved balls on the main game side, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1458, in step 1462, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and uses the main game side random number and the result lottery result. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). In addition, the process of the said step 1452-step 1462 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect which concerns on a long specific game.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1464, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and determines whether or not the short specific game flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1464, in step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 4 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, A variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). In addition, the process of the said step 1464 and step 1466 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect which concerns on a short specific game.

  In the case of No in step 1464, in other words, when the similar short specific game flag is on, in step 1468, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is It is determined whether or not the value is within one range (80 ≧ G> 50). In the case of Yes in step 1468, in step 1470, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 4 in the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (the table similar to that in the short specific game), and Based on the game side random number and the result of lottery determination, a variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in a short specific game (time-reduced game state in which the number of times of variation that results in a time-reduced game is less than the number of times of variation that results in a probability-variable game state) Are provided with a plurality of patterns (for example, 30 times in this example, but 20 times, 30 times, 40 times, 50 times, etc.) and a predetermined number in similar short specific games. During the variation period of the number of times (for example, 50 times that is the maximum number of times of time-reduced games in the short specific game, etc.), the same or substantially the same variation pattern (and effect) as in the short specific game is selected. By configuring, it is possible to create a period during which it is difficult for the player to determine how many fluctuations the time-saving game will continue.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1468, in step 1472, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1472, in step 1474, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, the second Based on the number of reserved balls on the main game side, a variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1472, in step 1476, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 3 in the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and uses the main game side random number and the result lottery result. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). In addition, the process of the said step 1468-step 1476 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect which concerns on a similar short specific game.

  Here, the limited frequency table reference table in the lower part of the figure is a table in which the limited frequency tables to be referred to are collected for each limited frequency counter value in each specific game. As shown in the figure, when the long specific game flag is on, the limited frequency table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3, and the similar short specific game flag is set. When it is on, the limited frequency table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 4 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3, and when the short specific game flag is on, the limited frequency table to be referenced is limited. Only the frequency table 4 is provided. Further, since the limited frequency table to be referred to is the same when the similar short specific game flag is on and when the short specific game flag is on, which specific game is the player (specific game) It will be difficult to determine how long will it last. This example is just an example, and in this example, the limited frequency table to be referred to first is the same when the similar short specific game flag is on and when the short specific game flag is on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the table to be referenced is different, if the variation pattern (variation time) candidates to be selected and the selection rate are substantially the same, and the effect mode is also substantially the same. It is possible to configure so as to produce substantially the same effect as this example.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the third modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is that a limited frequency table 4 is provided, and the purpose thereof is during the short specific game and during the predetermined period of the similar short specific game (in this example, the 1-30th variation). By referring to the frequency table 4, it is difficult for the player to determine which specific gaming state is the short specific game or the similar short specific game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (Modification 3) in FIG. 16 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are Step 1655 (Modification 3) and Step 1657 (Modification 3), and the purpose is to make the number of times shorter depending on the main game symbol that triggers the special game. That is, after turning on the main game probability change flag in step 1654, in step 1655 (change 3), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the short specific game flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1655 (Variation 3), the process proceeds to Step 1656, and the specific game control means MP50 sets the predetermined number A (80 times in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. On the other hand, in the case of No (in the case of a short specific game), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times B (30 times in this example) to the hour / short number counter MP52c in Step 1657 (Variation 3). , Step 1658 follows.

  Next, FIG. 39 is an example of an effect content determination table in the third modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is that a “short specific game / similar short specific game effect content determination table” in the lower right part of FIG. That is, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol that becomes a short specific game or a similar short specific game is a big hit, the “short stage stage” (ST 1-30th variation) is produced. When deciding, the “short specific game / similar short specific game effect content determination table” that is not referred to during the long specific game is referred to. Thereafter, in the case of a short specific game, the time shortening game ends with 30 fluctuations, and thereafter the content of the effect is determined with reference to the normal effect content determination table. On the other hand, in the case of a similar short specific game, the time-reduced game continues up to 80 fluctuations after the big hit, so the same table as the long specific game is referred from the 31st fluctuation after the big hit.

  In this way, by constructing a common effect between the short specific game and the similar short specific game, the player's expectation is raised in terms of whether or not the time shortening game ends with 30 variations. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the game. Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to this, such as the number of changes, the contents of the effects, the change mode, the table configuration, etc. For example, in the case of a short specific game, the time shortening game has ended (probability change / non- After entering the time-saving game state, the content of the effect may be determined with reference to an effect content determination table that is different between the normal time and the time-saving game. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's expectation by configuring so as to refer to a common effect content determination table (for example, a short specific game / similar short specific game effect content determination table in the figure) immediately after the end of all the big hits. It is possible to talk.

  By changing as described above, according to the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, the time period (the number of fluctuations) in the time-reduced gaming state after the special game is made different depending on the big hit symbol, and the time-reducing gaming state. When the period is short and when the period is short, the same variation mode determination table can be referred to. (Playing) is executed, and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize how long the running time-saving gaming state will last, and the entertainment of the game will be enhanced by executing the production that depresses the player's expectation. Become.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, in the case of a similar short specific game, the variation mode and / or the variation mode not selected in the case of a short specific game are the same. May also be configured to have different production contents. In such a configuration, when the symbol variation (or effect) is executed in the variation mode selected only in the similar short specific game, the game is that the period of time-saving gaming state is relatively long. The person can be recognized (conversely, it may have a variation mode / effect content selected only in the short specific game).

(Modification 4 from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, all the special games are made up of special games with balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute a new production that enhances the fun of the game. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a fourth modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, in the fourth modification from the present embodiment, the game progression means MP is a unit game that makes the big prize opening an advantageous state for the player for a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of balls are made. There is a small hit game control means MP40 for controlling the small hit that is executed only in the round. The small hit game control means MP40 further includes a small hit game timer MP41t for managing the time during the small hit game.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is Step 1750 (Variation 4), and its purpose is to perform processing related to execution of small hits. That is, after executing the special game control process in Step 1600, the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later in Step 1750 (Modification 4), and proceeds to Step 1910.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 9 in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 1441 (Modification 4) and Step 1442 (Modification 4), the purpose of which is to execute the process related to the small hit symbol. That is, when the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol in Step 1430, in Step 1441 (Variation 4), the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and It is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in Step 1441 (Modification 4), in Step 1442 (Modification 4), the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB, and proceeds to Step 1500. To do. On the other hand, also in the case of No in Step 1441 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram relating to the main game in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are that a small hit is provided and a 2R big hit is provided. In the modified example 4 from the present embodiment, the opening mode of the big prize opening relating to the small hit is substantially the same as the opening mode of the big winning opening relating to the 2R big hit, and the player can open the big winning opening. It is configured so that the small hit and 2R big hit cannot be discriminated by visually recognizing (in this example, although not particularly shown, the same effect can be executed for the small hit and 2R big hit. Preferred).

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (Modification 4) of FIG. 40 in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. First, at step 1752, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1754, the process proceeds to step 1762. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1754, in step 1756, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the release pattern (0.2 second release → 1.0 second closure → 0.2 second release →) to the small hit game timer MP41t → The opening time of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) based on the closing) is set. Next, at step 1758, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the big prize opening and starts the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1760, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB. Next, in step 1761, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the small hit start display instruction command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (sub control command transmission processing in step 1930 performs sub And the process proceeds to Step 1762.

  Next, in step 1762, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls. If Yes in step 1762, the process proceeds to step 1766. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1762, in step 1764, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game timer MP41t to determine whether or not a predetermined time for opening the big prize opening has elapsed. If Yes in step 1764, the process proceeds to step 1766. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1764, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1910).

  Next, at step 1766, the small hit game control means MP40 drives the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20. Is closed and the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20 is closed. Next, at step 1768, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, at step 1770, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB. Next, in step “1772, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB. Next, in step 1774, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the small hit end display instruction command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (by the control command transmission processing in step 1930). Is transmitted to the main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910). Even in the case of No in step 1752, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1910).

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 of FIG. 18 in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are Step 2440 (Modification 4) to Step 2476 (Modification 4), and the purpose is to execute the probability variation reset failure production and the probability variation reset success production. That is, in Step 2440 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and refers to whether or not the specific game running flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 2440 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2404. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2440 (odd 4), in step 2442 (odd 4), the background effect display control means SM23 indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a short open big hit symbol (in this example, 3A, 3B). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in Step 2442 (Modification 4), in Step 2444 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the stopped main game symbol is not a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in Step 2444 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2404. On the other hand, if No in Step 2444 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2446 (Modification 4).

  Next, in Step 2446 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the probability change reset failure effect execution flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in Step 2446 (Modification 4), in Step 2448 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a small hitting start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in Step 2448 (Variable 4), in Step 2450 (Variable 4), the background effect display control means SM23 is in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the probability change re-set failure effect executing flag. Turn on. Next, in Step 2452 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying a probability change re-set failure effect (effect that notifies that the number of probability changes remains as it is) (display in Step 2900). In the command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to Step 2454 (Modification 4). In addition, also when No is obtained in Step 2446 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2454 (Modification 4).

  Next, in Step 2454 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a small hit end display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in Step 2454 (Variation 4), in Step 2456 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the small hit end display (sub-sub control in the display command transmission control processing of Step 2900). Part SS). Next, in step 2458 (odd 4), the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the probability change reset failure effect executing flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and performs the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 2900. It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900) also in the case of No in Step 2448 (Modification 4) or Step 2454 (Modification 4).

  As described above, the processing from Step 2446 (Modification 4) to Step 2458 (Modification 4) is the processing at the time of execution of the probability variation re-set failure effect at the time of the small hit symbol stop, and in the modified example 4 from the present embodiment, When a small win is won during a specific game, a probability change re-set failure effect is executed.

  Further, if No in Step 2442 (Modified 4), in Step 2460 (Modified 4), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and executes the certain change re-set success effect. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 2460 (Modification 4), in Step 2462 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2462 (variant 4), in step 2464 (variant 4), the background effect display control means SM23 is in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the probability change re-set successful effect executing flag. Turn on. Next, in Step 2466 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the current effect stage is the short effect stage. In the case of Yes in Step 2466 (Variation 4), in Step 2468 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 is a probability change re-set success effect A (effect that only informs that the remaining probability change count is reset). Is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2472 (transition 4). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2466 (Modification 4), in other words, if the current effect stage is a long effect stage or a fixed effect stage, in Step 2470 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 is surely changed. A command for displaying the set success effect B (an effect congratulating that the remaining probability variation number is reset) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900), and step The procedure shifts to 2472 (Variation 4). In addition, also when No is determined in Step 2460 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2472 (Modification 4).

  In addition, in the modified example 4 from the present embodiment, in the short performance stage, the remaining number of probable changes (the number of changes in which the main game symbol is guaranteed to fluctuate in the probability variation game state) remains large. Even if the number of probability changes is reset, the player's profit is not so much (for example, the remaining number of times of probability change is 75 → 80 and only increases 5 times), so that only the notification that the number of remaining probability changes will be reset Will be executed. In the long performance stage and the fixed performance stage, the remaining probability variation number (the variation number in which the main game symbol is guaranteed to vary in the probability variation game state) is reduced, and the probability variation number is reset. If this is done, it will be highly profitable for the player (for example, the remaining probability variation number will increase from 5 to 80 times and increase by 75 times), so that an effect congratulating that the remaining probability variation number will be reset will be executed. .

  Next, in Step 2472 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in Step 2472 (Modification 4), in Step 2474 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the jackpot end display (in the display command transmission control processing of Step 2900, the sub-sub control section Sent to the SS side). Next, in Step 2476 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the probability change resetting success effect executing flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and performs the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 2900. It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 2462 (Modification 4) or Step 2472 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900).

  As described above, the processing from Step 2460 (Modification 4) to Step 2476 (Modification 4) is the processing at the time of execution of the probabilistic re-setting success when the short open big hit symbol is stopped. When the short stage is won for the short opening big hit, the probability change reset success production A is executed, and when the long stage or the fixed stage is won for the short opening big hit, the probability change reset success production B is executed. It is configured to be.

  Here, the upper part of the figure is an image of the probability variation re-set effect. As shown in the figure, in the fourth modification from the present embodiment, when a small win is won during a specific game, a probabilistic re-set failure effect is executed, and a short opening big win is won in the short stage Probability re-set success production A is executed, and when the long production stage or the fixed production stage is won with a short open big hit, the probability variation reset success production B is executed. An effect according to the player's profit mode is executed.

  By changing as described above, in the fourth modification from the present embodiment, a small hit that does not switch the gaming state related to the winning probability of the main game and / or the auxiliary game, and the winning of the main game and / or the auxiliary game By providing a short opening big hit (2R big hit in this example) that can switch the gaming state related to the probability, and making the opening form of the big winning opening substantially the same (the production contents are also substantially the same), the player can Since it is not possible to discriminate between a small hit and a short open big hit from the opening pattern, it is possible to execute an effective performance that suggests whether or not the gaming state has changed (whether it was a big hit or a big hit). Will attract interest and increase the fun of the game.

(Modification 5 from this embodiment)
Further, in the present embodiment, when a certain stay stage (for example, “short effect stage”) is completed, it is configured to move to the next stay stage (for example, “long effect stage”). For a player who first plays a gaming machine that executes an effect, the effect mode is suddenly changed, which may be mistaken for a change in the game state or a prefetch effect. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem is a fifth modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 10 in Modification 5 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are about Step 1453 (Modification 5), Step 1455 (Modification 5), Step 1457 (Modification 5) and Step 1459 (Modification 5), and the purpose thereof is the final change ( In the first stage and the final stage 2), a dedicated limited frequency table is referred to. That is, if the limited frequency counter value G is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c in step 1453 (variable 5), It is determined whether or not the counter value G is not the first stage final variation value (G = 51). In the case of Yes in Step 1453 (Variation 5), the process proceeds to Step 1454. On the other hand, if No in Step 1453 (Variable 5), in Step 1455 (Variable 5), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the stage switching table 1 and the main game side Based on the random number and the winning / losing lottery result, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413).

  If the limited frequency counter value G is within the second stage range (80 ≧ G> 50), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c in step 1457 (variable 5), It is determined whether or not the counter value G is not the second stage final variation value (G = 11). In the case of Yes in Step 1457 (Variant 5), the process proceeds to Step 1458. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1457 (Variable 5), in Step 1459 (Variable 5), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the stage switching table 2 and the main game side Based on the random number and the winning / losing lottery result, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a table configuration diagram related to the limited frequency in the fifth modification from the present embodiment. A change from the present embodiment is that a stage switching table 1 and a stage switching table 2 are provided. With this configuration, the stage change table is referred to in the final variation of the production stage 1 and the final variation of the production stage 2, so that a dedicated variation mode is selected at the time of loss. . In addition, the content of the table is the same as the limited frequency table when hitting.

  Next, FIG. 47 is an effect content determination table in Modification 5 from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is that the stage transition effect is executed in the variation related to the loss referred to by the stage switching table. It should be noted that at the time of hitting, the same contents of effects are provided for the fluctuations referenced to the stage switching table and the fluctuations not referenced.

  By changing as described above, in the fifth modification from the present embodiment, when switching from the staying stage to the next stage, in the final variation of the staying stage, the stage A special effect (an effect that suggests that the stage is switched) can be executed at the time of switching, and a dedicated table (a stage switching table, that is, a change mode for only one change is determined at the time of change to execute the effect. By referring to the limited frequency table to be referred to), the variation time for executing the effect is secured. In addition, in the final variation of the production stage, a dedicated variation mode is selected only at the time of a loss, and a normal winning production in the stay stage is executed at the time of winning. As a result, it is easy for a player who sees the production for the first time to understand the change of the production, and for a player who is familiar with the production, the result of the final change at which the production stage is switched can be predicted. Will be more interesting. This example is merely an example. For example, by using the fact that the final variation of the production stage becomes a dedicated variation pattern, even when the final variation of the production stage is a big hit, the production is almost the same as the stage switching production. May be configured such that an effect that is a big hit can be executed after (or during) the effect.

(Modification 6 from this embodiment)
Further, in the present embodiment, after the special game is finished, it is configured to make a transition to the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good. In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that improves the fun of the game by concealing whether or not the game has shifted to the probability variation game state after the special game is over. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a sixth modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 10 in Modification 6 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 1480 (variant 6), step 1482 (variant 6), and step 1484 (variant 6), the purpose of which is configured to change the limited frequency table to be referenced based on the threshold value. It is to be. That is, in step 1480 (variant 6), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the threshold value S (for example, 7A · 7B: threshold value S = 50, 4A · 4B · 5A · 5B: Threshold value S = 60) is confirmed. Here, the threshold value S is a value representing the number of times the specific game is switched from the first stage to the second stage.

  Next, at step 1482 (variant 6), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and whether or not the counter value is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> threshold S). Determine. If YES in step 1482 (transformation 6), the flow advances to step 1454. On the other hand, if No in Step 1482 (Variable 6), in Step 1484 (Variable 6), the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value is within the second stage range (threshold S). It is determined whether ≧ G> 10). In the case of Yes in step 1484 (transformation 6), the process proceeds to step 1458, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1460.

  Here, the image on the same figure is an image for determining the variation mode. As shown in the figure, since the initial value of the limited frequency counter is 80, when the threshold S is 50, the first stage is 30 fluctuations, and when the threshold S is 60, the first stage is 20 fluctuations. It is configured to terminate.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 in FIG. 16 in Modification 6 from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are Step 1670 (Modification 6) to Step 1676 (Modification 6), and the purpose is to set different thresholds depending on the stop symbol of the executed special game. That is, in Step 1670 (Variation 6), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the executed special game stop symbol is the probability change notification jackpot symbol (7A, 7B). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in Step 1670 (Variation 6), in Step 1672 (Variation 6), the specific game control means MP50 recognizes that the probability change notification value (probability variation game state by the change timing of the step) as the step change threshold. This is a value for setting the timing. For example, 50) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1652. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1670 (Modified 6), in Step 1674 (Modified 6), the specific game control means MP50 is a probability variation threshold value as a step switching threshold value (whether or not it is a probability variation gaming state depending on the step switching timing). Is a value for setting a timing at which it is difficult to discriminate. For example, 60) is set. Next, in Step 1676 (Variation 6), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether the special game stop symbol that was executed was the non-probability variable big hit symbol (4A / 4B) Determine whether or not. If Yes in Step 1676 (Variation 6), the process proceeds to Step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1676 (transformation 6), in other words, if the stop symbol of the executed special game is the probability variation non-notification jackpot symbol (5A / 5B), the process proceeds to step 1652.

  By changing as described above, in the modified example 6 from the present embodiment, whether to shift to the probability variation gaming state (in this example, the so-called ST with variation frequency limitation) after the special game, depending on the jackpot symbol And determining whether or not the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the probability variation gaming state have different durations of the “short effect stage” (in the case of probability variation, a mode in which the duration is long can be selected) Depending on the period during which the “short performance stage” continues, the degree of expectation in the probability variation gaming state is high. As a result, in the non-stochastic variation gaming state, the period of staying in the “short production stage” ends with 20 variations, so the player has a sense of expectation that the “short production stage” will continue. It is possible to improve the fun of the game. Further, in combination with the configuration of the fifth modification from the present embodiment (stage switching effect), a dedicated scoring effect may be executed at the 20th variation of the “short effect stage”. In addition, in this example, even in the probability variation game state, a big hit (the number of special games round and production is the same as the non-probable change big hit and difficult to discriminate) that the “short stage” ends with 20 fluctuations. Even if the “short stage stage” ends with 20 fluctuations, it is possible to play with a sense of expectation until the end of the specific game.

  In addition, this example is only an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in combination with the configuration of the modified example 3 (the number of times shortened varies depending on the jackpot symbol), the non-stochastic variation gaming state or the probability variation gaming state / time reduction number -It is also possible to provide a gaming machine having a variety of profit expectation variations of a large number of players by combining the number of special game rounds and the like. In such a configuration, since there are a plurality of contents and periods of a specific game, an effect that suggests the contents and period improves the interest of the game more effectively (for example, if the number of times is different) By doing so, it is possible to produce an effect as if there are a plurality of ST times).

  Further, in Modification 6 from this embodiment, two limited frequency table reference patterns are provided, one of which is selected only in the probability variation gaming state, and the other is in the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more reference frequency table reference patterns may be provided. In addition, a plurality of limited frequency table reference patterns that are selected in both the probability variation gaming state and the non-stochastic variation gaming state are provided, and the proportion of probability variation gaming states (the jackpot symbol that shifts to the probability variation gaming state occupies You may comprise so that a selection rate may differ.

(Modification 7 from this embodiment)
In addition, although not specifically shown in the present example, if there is a big win (especially the hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, by executing a special effect, It is possible to produce the jackpot related to in a novel way. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a modified example 7 from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1600 in FIG. 5 in Modification 7 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 1636 (Modified 7) to Step 1800 (Modified 7), the purpose of which is to execute an end demo. That is, when the final round of the special game is ended, in Step 1636 (Variation 7), the special game control means MP30 turns on the end demonstration execution permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Then, the process proceeds to Step 1638 (Variation 7). Next, in Step 1638 (Variation 7), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the end demonstration execution permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes in Step 1638 (Variation 7), in step 1800 (Variation 7), the special game control means MP30 executes an end demo time control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1910). It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910) also in the case of No in step 1638 (change 7).

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of an end demo time control process according to the subroutine of Step 1800 (Modification 7) in FIG. 50 in Modification 7 from the present embodiment. First, in step 1802, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the end demo execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1802, in Step 1804, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the stop symbol is the long demo time big hit symbol (7A, 7B). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in Step 1804, in Step 1806, the special game control means MP30 starts by setting a long time (for example, 10 seconds) in the end demo time timer, and proceeds to Step 1810. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1804, in other words, if the stop symbol is a short demo time big hit symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B), in step 1808, the special game control means MP30 shortens to the end demo time timer. Start by setting a time (for example, 3 seconds), and proceed to Step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the special game control means MP30 sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub side and a command related to the determined end demo time information (by the control command transmission process of step 1930, the sub main control unit SM). Sent to the side). Next, in step 1812, the special game control means MP30 turns on the end demonstration execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1814. In the case of No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1814.

  Next, in step 1814, the special game control means MP30 refers to the end demonstration time timer and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in Step 1814, in Step 1816, the special game control means MP30 turns off the end demonstration execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1818, the special game control means MP30 turns off the end demonstration execution permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1820, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1650, the special game control means MP30 executes the above-described game state determination process after the end of the special game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910).

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 18 in Modification 7 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2480 (Modification 7) to Step 2600 (Modification 7), and the purpose is to execute the end demonstration effect and the end demonstration extension effect. That is, after turning off the special game, in Step 2480 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the end demonstration time is long (10 Second). In the case of Yes in Step 2480 (Variation 7), in Step 2482 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n starts with a long time (10 seconds) set in the demonstration time display timer, and starts in Step 2486 (Variation 7). Move to 7). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2480 (Variation 7), in Step 2484 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n starts by setting a short time (3 seconds) in the demonstration time display timer, and Step 2486 Move to (Variation 7).

  Next, in Step 2486 (Variant 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n sets a command for displaying an end demo image (for example, an image for informing the number of game balls acquired, the number of consecutive games, etc.) (Step 2900). Are transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side). Next, in Step 2488 (Modification 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n turns on the end demonstration display flag, and proceeds to Step 2490 (Modification 7). Note that if the answer is No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to step 2490 (change 7).

  Next, in Step 2490 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the end demonstration display flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 2490 (variant 7), in step 2492 (variant 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the demo time display timer and determines whether or not the demo time display timer value is 0. To do. If Yes in Step 2492 (Variation 7), in Step 2600 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n executes an end demonstration extended effect execution process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900). Transition. Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900) also in the case of No in Step 2490 (Modified 7) or Step 2492 (Modified 7).

  Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of an end demo extension effect execution process according to the subroutine of Step 2600 (Modification 7) in FIG. 52 in Modification Example 7 from the present embodiment. First, in step 2602, the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the end demonstration extension flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 pre-determines the hold result and change time of each hold based on hold information (win / lot lottery random number / variation mode determination random number). Next, in step 2606, the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is a big hit hold in the main game hold.

  In the case of Yes in step 2606, in step 2608, the background effect display content determination means SM23n determines the total value Ta (the earliest jackpot as the earliest jackpot) of the hold until the hold which becomes the earliest jackpot of the hold determined in advance. The sum of the fluctuation time of the hold and the change time of the hold that is digested before the first big hit is set in the demonstration time extension display timer. Next, in step 2610, the background effect display content determination means SM23n starts the demonstration time extension display timer by subtracting the display time (1 second) of the jackpot notification image from the demonstration time extension display timer value Ta (demo time). Subtracted to provide time to display the jackpot notification image at the end of the extended performance). Next, in step 2612, the background effect display content determination means SM23n turns on the jackpot notification flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2618.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in step 2614, the background effect display content determination means SM23n sets the total value Tb of the variation time related to the hold determined in advance in the demonstration time extension display timer. Next, in step 2616, the background effect display content determination means SM23n starts a demonstration time extension display timer, and proceeds to step 2618.

  Next, in step 2618, the background effect display content determination means SM23n sets a command for displaying the same image as the end demo image on the front layer (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub-sub control unit SS side). To be sent). With this processing, the player thinks as if the end demo is continuously displayed.

  Here, the image on the right side of the figure is a display control image. As shown in the figure, other effects such as symbol variation are executed in the rear layer, and the front layer is provided so as to overlap the front side (viewed by the player) of the rear layer. Since the end demo image is displayed in the front layer, other effects such as symbol variation are not displayed. Although not particularly shown in the present example, it is desirable that the audio be configured in accordance with the image (moving image) displayed on the front layer.

  Next, in step 2620, the background effect display content determination unit SM23n turns on the end demonstration extension flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage unit SM23b, and proceeds to step 2622. Note that if the result is No in Step 2602, the process proceeds to Step 2622.

  Next, in step 2622, the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the demonstration time extension display timer and determines whether or not the demonstration time extension timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2622, in step 2624, the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the big hit notification flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2624, in step 2626, the background effect display content determination means SM23n sets a command for displaying the jackpot notification image on the front layer for a predetermined time (the display time of the jackpot notification image subtracted from the timer value in step 2610). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2628. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2624, the process proceeds to step 2628.

  Next, in step 2628, the background effect display content determination means SM23n turns off the big hit notification flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2630, the background effect display content determination unit SM23n turns off the end demonstration extended flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage unit SM23b. Next, in step 2632, the background effect display content determination unit SM23n turns off the end demonstration display flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage unit SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). Transition. Even in the case of No in step 2622, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900).

  By changing as described above, in Modification Example 7 from the present embodiment, at the end of the special game, the end demo effect that notifies the result of the special game or the like can be executed, and after the demonstration effect ends. (After the special game ends), the specified period after the start of the change of the main game (special game) (if there is a jackpot hold, until the end of the jackpot change, if there is no jackpot hold, it relates to the hold that currently exists By displaying the same effect as the demonstration effect (e.g., continuously displaying an image notifying the result of the special game even during the main game symbol change) When there is a big hit hold in the hold, it is configured so that an image substantially the same as the demonstration effect is displayed until immediately before the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit hold. After the end of the special game, it becomes a novel effect that suddenly becomes the next big hit without recognizing the fluctuation during the specific game, and the special game is re-started, improving the fun of the game It becomes possible. In addition, by making the execution time of the end demonstration effect different depending on the main game symbol won in the big hit, the player can make the end demonstration effect and the effect during the change of the main game symbol performing the same effect as the end demonstration effect. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish and the interest of the game will increase.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, after the special game is over, the game is always shifted to the probability variation gaming state with the number of times limited, and the effect of the game is enhanced by gradually changing the production of the period in the probability variation gaming state. Configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the player's expectation cannot be expressed in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state depending on the jackpot symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem is a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter in the second grand prize opening C20. The game progression means MP further includes a distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing a distribution game for opening the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22.

  First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is step 1408 (second) and step 1412-2 (second), and the purpose is to change the variation mode in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. This is different from that shown in the present embodiment. That is, after determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol at step 1410-2, at step 1408 (second), the game content determination means MN refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b to determine the main game. It is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1412, and the variation mode determination means MN50 determines the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-. B) The main game table 3-1 is referred to, and the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the main game side random number / win / no-win lottery result. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1411, and the game content determination means MN refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1411, that is, in the case of a non-probability variation / time-reduced gaming state, in step 1412-2 (second), the variation mode determination means MN50 determines the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-. Referring to the limited frequency table A in A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the main game side random number / win / lottery lottery result. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, the same processing as in this embodiment is executed in the processing of steps 1450 and 1413.

  FIG. 55 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the combination of main game symbols that are big hits is different, and a table that is referred to in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is provided. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols for which a special game that makes it easy for a game ball to enter a specific area are “7A, 3B, 5B, and 7B”. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter is executed is “2A / 4A”.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (second) and step 1850 (second), and the purpose thereof is a distribution game (unit game that opens the second big prize opening C20 having a specific area). ) Can be executed. That is, in step 1611 (second), the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the currently executed round is a distributed game execution round (second R, 4R in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the allocated game execution control means MP36 executes an allocated game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1611 (second), the process proceeds to step 1612 and the same processing as in this embodiment is executed.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 56 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1852, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852, in step 1854, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the main game symbol that is stopped is the long open symbol (3B / 5B 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in Step 1854, in Step 1856, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses a long release pattern (for example, a 15-second release pattern) as the release pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. Then, an opening pattern designed so as to definitely enter the specific area C22 is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in step 1858, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses the short open pattern (for example, 0. 0) as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. An opening pattern designed so that non-entering into the specific area C22 is determined for 1 second is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1860.

  Next, at step 1860, the allocated game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1862, the distributed game execution control means MP36 turns on the distributed game continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1864, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set release pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

  Next, at step 1866, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. To do. If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1866, in step 1868, the allocation game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (the set opening pattern) of the second big winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, at step 1870, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, at step 1872, the assigned game execution control means MP36 turns off the assigned game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1874, the allocated game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the allocated game execution round. In the case of Yes in Step 1874, in Step 1876, the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to Step 1878. . Also in the case of No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, at step 1878, the assigned game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the assigned game execution round), and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1634). Even in the case of No in step 1868, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 56 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is about step 1680 (second), step 1682 (second), step 1684 (second), and step 1686 (second), and the object is the second embodiment. In the sorting game executed at, whether or not the player enters the specific area C22 is different from the possibility of transition to the probability varying gaming state and the upper limit of the number of times of variation in the time-saving gaming state. That is, at the time of execution of this subroutine, in step 1680 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (second), in step 1682 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. . Next, in step 1652 and step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 80 times) in the probability variation number counter MP51c and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 sets the predetermined number A (80 times in this example) to the time-count counter MP52c and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter in steps 1658 and 1660. The same processing as in this embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the specific game control means MP50 has a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times) in the time-count counter MP52c. It is not limited, and a value equal to or less than the predetermined number A is suitable), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

  Here, in the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during a special game, the number of times of change that results in a time-reduced game state after the special game is the probability-variable game state. The predetermined number of times A (80 in this example) is the same as the number of fluctuations, and if there is no game ball entering the specific area during the special game, the number of fluctuations that will result in a time-reduced game state after the special game is predetermined. The number of times A is configured to be a predetermined number B (50 times in this example), which is a number that is different (small). In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol during the time-reduced gaming state is such that a three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used when the time-reduced gaming state is a predetermined number of times A. The limited frequency table A is referred to in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times B, and the contents of the effect are also referred to. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of time-saving games may be determined based on the symbol at the time of big hit (for example, during special games) If the player has not entered the specific area C22, the upper limit number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is determined by the big hit symbol, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 59 is an example of an effect content determination table in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that it has an effect content determination table that is referenced in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state shown in the lower right part of the same figure. In the second embodiment, if a game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during a special game, the game state after the special game is not a probability variation game state, but a non-probability variation / time shortening game state (50 variations). ) In such a case, the contents of the effect are determined with reference to the table. Note that this example is merely an example, and the number of changes, the contents of effects, the change mode, the configuration of the table, and the like are not limited thereto.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game is determined depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game (specific area) In the case of a game machine (so-called tamagyo type game machine) that does not enter the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball and does not transition to the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball, By changing the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state from the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation game state, an appropriate production according to the player's profit mode is executed. It can be done. Although not specifically shown in the present example, when executing the distribution game, a dedicated effect (the effect of inquiring whether or not the second big prize opening C20 is long open, the entry to the specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not a ball is made, an effect of notifying that a specific area C22 has been entered, etc. {the execution mode is not particularly limited, In the case of the effect of notifying that the entry into the specific area C22 has been made, at the timing (desirably immediately after) that the entry has been made, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a production device (for example, a so-called production movable body accessory or a light guide plate) provided on the front surface (for example, on the production display device SG). Display an image labeled “V” or The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

  In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening is in an open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or less than one launch interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after the first time is released. A second unit game that can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time after a time closure. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time with low expectation for transition to the probability variation is finished, the probability There is a possibility that the opening operation of the second time with high expectation to the change transition is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. The second time is preferably equal to or longer than one game ball launch interval in order to ensure that a player enters a specific area, and is (half the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game It is more preferable that it is equal to or greater than or equal to or greater than (one launch interval of balls), and it is particularly preferable to be equal to or greater than (the upper limit winning number of the round) × (one launch interval of game balls).

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the above embodiment, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is configured to switch the variation mode and the effect during the specific game every predetermined number of times. There may be an effect that avoids a situation where a trap can occur and does not distrust the player. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 60 is a front view of a gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is that the 2-2 main game start opening B30 (and the 2-2 main game start) in which a game ball can enter during a normal game (non-time shortening / non-stochastic game state) Entry ball detection device C31s), a distribution start port unit C50 for alternately distributing the entered game balls to the first main game start port A10 and the 2-2 main game start port C30, and a common hold display unit SG14. In addition, a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter is provided inside the second grand prize opening C20, and the special area being executed by entering the specific area C22 during execution of the special game is provided. It becomes deterministic to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the game is over (the same applies to the second embodiment).

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, one start winning opening corresponding to the first main game is provided, and two starting winning openings corresponding to the second main game are provided. Here, the start winning opening corresponding to the second main game is configured so that a common winning / losing lottery, symbol lottery, etc. are executed no matter which game ball enters, as will be described later. It will be supplemented that the content of the game is not different no matter which game ball enters in any way. In addition, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, it is configured to include two start winning openings corresponding to the second main game, but may be one, in which case -You may comprise so that 2nd main game start opening electric accessory B11d may be provided in the position which guides a game ball to 2 main game start opening B30.

  Further, the common hold display section SG14 is a display section for displaying both the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. In the first modification from the second embodiment, during normal times (non-time reduction / probability variation gaming state), the first main game side holds and the second main game side holds by the distribution start port unit C50 described later. It is configured so that holding can occur alternately. In this example, since the maximum number of each hold is four, it is possible to display a maximum of eight holdes on the first main game side and two hold on the second main game side in normal times. Has been.

  In this example, the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side are displayed on the same display unit (display area), but this is only an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side may be displayed at positions separated from each other, or the game state (for example, the time-reduced game state or the probability variation) may be displayed. You may comprise so that the display mode of a holding | maintenance may change with game states. Although not particularly shown in the present example, the player may distinguish between the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side (for example, the hold display color is red). Differentiated by blue, distinguished by position / shape of hold display, etc.). In addition, when executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that is executed over a predetermined period immediately after shifting to a time-reduced gaming state or a probability-variable gaming state, as described later), a configuration in which a hold is not displayed. May be.

  Next, FIG. 61 is an overall view and an operation view of the sorting start unit C50. First, the distribution start unit C50 is provided with a common entrance C51 into which game balls flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game ball provided below the common entrance C51 and flowing down from the common entrance C51. A distribution member C50y that regularly distributes the left and right direction (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left-right direction around the support shaft) and the first main game provided below the distribution member C50y The start port A10 (and the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s) and the 2-2 main game start port B30 (and the 2-2 main game start port input provided below the sorting member C50y) The ball detecting device B31s) and the game balls in the sorting start port unit C50 provided below the sorting member C50y enter the first main game start port A10 and the 2-2 main game start port B30. Without sorting start port Comprising a discharge opening capable of discharging to Tsu preparative C50 outside the. The distribution start port unit C50 configured in this way, as shown by a dotted line in the figure, causes the game ball that has flowed into the common entrance C51 to be moved by the tilting operation of the distribution member C50y in the left-right direction. The main game start port A10 and the 2-2 main game start port B30 are configured to be guided to either one. For example, a case where the sorting member C50y is tilting in the left direction is referred to as “first position”, and a case where the sorting member C50y is tilting in the right direction is referred to as “second position”. In this case, in a situation where the distribution member C50y is in the “second position”, the game ball that has flowed into the common entrance C51 is guided to the first main game start opening A10 side, and the distribution member C50y is “ While being displaced to the “first position”, the game ball that has flowed into the common entrance C51 is guided to the 2-2 main game start opening B30 while the distribution member C50y is in the “first position”. At the same time, the sorting member C50y is displaced to the “second position”. In the present example, the tilting motion of the sorting member C50y in the left-right direction is configured to be performed by the weight of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the common entrance C51 is A game ball is alternately distributed to either one of the 1 main game start port A10 and the 2-2 main game start port B30 (after distributing one game ball to either one, 1 toward the other It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to Step 1300 in FIG. 5 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1307 (second modification 1), step 1309 (second modification 1), step 1313 (second modification 1), step 1317 (second modification 1), step 1319. (Second Variation 1), and the purpose is to enter the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 (and the 2-2 main game start port B30). It is to add information related to the order of entering the hold information generated by entering the ball. That is, after acquiring the first main game content determination random number in step 1306, in step 1307 (second variation 1), the symbol holding means MJ32, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and the second main game reservation information With reference to the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side in the game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, the current total hold number is acquired, and “total hold number + 1” is newly set. Derived as winning order of winning. Next, in step 1309 (second variation 1), the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A uses the acquired first main game content determination random number and the derived winning order as the hold information as the first main game symbol. The information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the process proceeds to Step 1310.

  If No in step 1312 (when no entry to the second main game start opening B10 is detected), in step 1313 (second variation 1), the second main game start opening entry determining means MJ11- B determines based on the information from the 2-2 main game start opening entrance detection device B31s whether or not a winning (entering) to the 2-2 main game start opening B30 has been newly made. In the case of Yes in step 1313 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to the process of step 1314, and substantially the same process as that in the case where a winning to the second main game start opening B10 is made is executed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1313 (second variation 1), the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1400).

  In addition, after acquiring the second main game content determination random number in step 1316, in step 1317 (second variation 1), the symbol holding means MJ32 determines that the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and the second main game holding information MJ32b-A. With reference to the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side in the game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, the current total hold number is acquired, and “total hold number + 1” is newly set. Derived as winning order of winning. Next, in step 1319 (second variation 1), the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B uses the acquired second main game content determination random number and the derived winning order as the hold information as the second main game symbol. The information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the process proceeds to Step 1320.

  As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the distribution start unit C50 is provided, and during the normal game (non-time shortening / non-probability variation game state), the first main game side holds (maximum 4). ) And the second main game side hold (up to 4) can occur alternately, so that a maximum of 8 hold can be accumulated.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to Step 1400 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is about step 1402 (second modification 1), and the purpose is to realize the winning order digestion of the main game hold (the second embodiment and the above-described implementation). In the form, the second main game suspension priority digestion). That is, when executing the processing of the subroutine, in step 1402 (second variation 1), the hold digest control means MJ31, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means With reference to the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side in the MJ32b-B, it is determined whether or not the earliest winning order hold is on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 1402 (second variation 1), in step 1400 (1), processing related to the variation of the first main game symbol is executed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1402 (second variation 1), in step 1400 (2), processing related to the variation of the second main game symbol is executed.

  As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the reservation is executed according to the winning order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second main game symbol (first main game symbol). Of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) regardless of the presence of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol). The first one may be configured to prioritize the reservation of the second main game symbol (first main game symbol), or a parallel lottery that draws both main game symbols simultaneously in parallel. It may be configured to execute.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a subroutine of the first (second) main game symbol display process related to steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 63 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is about step 1404 (second variation 1), and the purpose is to appropriately update the winning order of the remaining holds every time the main game hold is digested. is there. That is, in the case of Yes in step 1403 (when the variation start condition is satisfied), in step 1404 (second variation 1), the hold control means MJ30 is in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. The first main game side (second main game holding information on the second main gaming symbol temporary storage means MJ32b-B) is read and deleted from the holding information, and the remaining holding information is shifted, respectively. 1 is subtracted from the winning winning order (hereinafter, processing relating to main game variation is executed).

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to Step 1450 in FIG. 64 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are for step 1490 (second modification 1), step 1491 (second modification 1), step 1492 (second modification 1), and step 1493 (second modification 1). The purpose is to synchronize the switching timing of the variation mode during the specific game with the timing when the maximum number of hold information (8 in this example) that can remain immediately after the transition to the specific game is over. That is, when the processing of this subroutine is executed, in step 1490 (second variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is within the range of the first stage (80 ≧ It is determined whether G> 72). In the case of Yes in step 1490 (second variation 1), that is, in the case of the variation related to the first to eighth variation after the start of the specific game, the process proceeds to step 1454 and the main game symbol of the main game symbol is based on the limited frequency table 1. The variation mode is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1413).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1490 (second variation 1), in step 1491 (second variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is notified of the probable transition. It is determined whether or not the timing value (G = 72). In the case of Yes in step 1491 (second variation 1), that is, in the case of variation related to the ninth variation after the start of the specific game, in step 1492 (second variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 notifies the probability variation transition. Referring to the table, the variation mode for the probability variation transition notification is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 66 is an example of the limited frequency table in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is that a specific game that shifts immediately after the first hit (a big hit in a non-time-reduced / non-probability fluctuation game state) when the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1. Then, a variation mode different from that at the time of a specific game that shifts after the big hit after the first hit is selected (for example, some or all of the variation mode candidates that can be selected are different, but the variation mode candidates that can be selected are the same. (The selection rate of each variation mode candidate is different, the switching timing of the variation mode determination table is different, etc.) (when the left box in the first row of FIG. The right side of the game is after the first hit), a new probability change notification table is provided (second row in the same figure), and especially when the first main game side is a big hit at the first hit and 2nd main game side In such a case, the variation mode of “30 seconds” is uniformly selected (details of the effect executed based on this variation mode will be described later in the description of the sub-side processing according to FIG. 71). It is a point that has been.

  Here, with respect to the table to be referred to at the time of the first hit (the table referred to at the first game to the eighth game), the first main game side big hit fluctuation, the second main game side big hit fluctuation, the first main game side lose Fluctuation, loss variation on the second main game side, and only one pattern variation mode are provided, and at the time of loss, the variation time is short (in this example, both the first main game side and the second main game side are 1 Second). For this reason, all of the first main game side remaining at the start of the specific game and low profit for the player can be consumed at high speed. In this example, the variation mode that can be selected is different between immediately after the first hit and after the big hit after the first hit. However, this is merely an example, and is not limited thereto. In addition, after the big hit after the first hit, it may be configured such that the fluctuation mode can always be determined with reference to the same variation mode determination table (for example, the limited frequency table 1 for the first hit in this example). In addition, the variation modes to be selected are the same, and it may be configured such that only the effects on the sub-side are different, or may be configured such that a plurality of variation mode candidates exist even at the big hit.

  Further, in this example, regarding the loss variation on the second main game side, the variation mode {eg, “S1-b0 (1 second)”} that is easily selected in the table referred to at the start of the specific game immediately after the first hit is: The variation mode is easier to select in the long stage (limited frequency table 2) {eg, “S2-b2 (10 seconds)”, “S2-b1 (3 seconds)”}. Regarding the big hit fluctuation on the game side, the variation mode {eg, “S1-B0 (30 seconds)”} that is easily selected in the table to be referred to at the start of the specific game immediately after the first win is the long effect stage (limited frequency table 2 ) Is configured so that the variation time is shorter than the variation mode {for example, “S2-B2 (60 seconds)”}, but is not limited to this. For example, reference is made at the start of a specific game immediately after the first hit. To lose the table In a motion, a variation mode with a short variation time is more easily selected than a variation mode that is easy to be selected in the long production stage, and a variation time is longer than a variation mode that is easy to be selected in the long production stage in a big hit variation. You may comprise so that a fluctuation | variation aspect may be selected easily (mainly it is a supplement in the fluctuation | variation by the 2nd main game side). Further, the variation time that is most easily selected in the initial hit limited frequency table 1 and the variation time that is most easily selected in the limited frequency table 2 may be configured to be the same time. In this case, from the period in which the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1 for the first hit (with the effect of shifting to the probability variation gaming state), the variation mode is referenced with reference to the limited frequency table 2 It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a sudden change in the variation time when the period is determined.

  Further, in this example, in the case of loss variation, the average value of the variation time selected in the initial hit limited frequency table 1 (the average value of the variation time selected on the first main game side and the second main game side) Is different from the average value of the variation time selected in the limited frequency table 2 (the average value of the variation time selected on the first main game side and the second main game side) (for example, the limited frequency table for the first hit time) 1 is shorter than the average value of the variation times selected in the limited frequency table 2). In addition, in the big hit fluctuation, the average value of the fluctuation time selected in the initial hit limited frequency table 1 is different from the average value of the fluctuation time selected in the limited frequency table 2 (for example, the initial hit limited only). The average value of the variation times selected in the frequency table 1 is shorter than the average value of the variation times selected in the limited frequency table 2). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the above-described configuration may be configured such that the average value of the selected variation times is the same, and the selection rates of the respective variation modes (variation times) are different.

  In addition, regarding the probability change transition notification table (the table referred to at the time of the 9th change of the specific game), in the case of a big hit, the same variation mode as the table referred to at the time of the first hit is selected, but in the case of a loss Is configured to select a variation mode (“SK-a0” or “SK-b0”) for notifying the player that the player is in the probability variation gaming state. Note that the variation mode is a time for securing an effect execution scale for notifying the player that the player is in the probability variation gaming state (in this example, 10 seconds but 120 seconds). It may be a time value). By configuring in this way, it is estimated that there is no remaining on-hold (highly likely to end the probability variation gaming state) on the first main game side which is relatively disadvantageous for the player Below, it will be possible to notify that the game will shift to the probability variation gaming state. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit at the 9th change of the specific game (a change referring to the probability change transition notification table), An effect similar to the effect (in this example, an effect for notifying the transition to the probability variation gaming state) is executed, and as a second stage of the effect, an effect for notifying that it is a big hit (ie, a reverse effect) (For example, at the time when “RUSH mode start!” Is displayed at the time of losing, an effect displayed as “big hit!” Is executed).

  Further, in each table, when the first main game side holds a big hit, a variation mode similar to the variation mode selected in the table referred to immediately after the first win (in this example, “SX-A0”) ) Is selected. During the specific game, since the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right side of the game area D30 (so-called right-handed), it is difficult for the first main game side to be held, but an unexpected situation (for example, If a game ball accidentally enters the first main game start opening A10 due to a malfunction of the launching device, etc., an unexpected performance will be performed because a different performance will be executed. As a result, it becomes easy to recognize that the player has made a mistake, and it is possible to call attention to the player. It is possible to recognize that an event can occur).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart (FIG. 65), on the other hand, in the case of No in step 1491 (second variation 1), in step 1493 (second variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 sets the limited frequency counter MN52c. With reference to this, it is determined whether or not the counter value G is within the range of the second stage (72> G> 10). In the case of Yes in step 1493 (second variation 1), that is, in the case of the variation relating to the 10th to 70th variation after the start of the specific game, the process proceeds to step 1458, and based on the limited frequency table 2, the main game symbol of The variation mode is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1413). On the other hand, if No in Step 1493 (second variation 1), that is, if the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is 10 or less (10 ≧ G), the process proceeds to Step 1460 and the limited frequency table 3 Based on this, the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to step 2050 in FIG. 18 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 2090 (second modification 1), step 2091 (second modification 1), step 2092 (second modification 1), step 2093 (second modification 1), and step 2094. About (second variation 1), the purpose is to align the timing of switching the production contents with the timing of switching the limited frequency table on the main side. That is, during the specific game, in step 2090 (second variation 1), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and the counter value is within a first range (for example, 1 to 1). 8) It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in Step 2090 (second modification 1), in Step 2074, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “short effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2090 (second variation 1), in step 2091 (second variation 1), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and the counter value is the probability variation transition notification value. (For example, 9) or not (whether or not it is a change immediately after the maximum number of pending totals on the first main game side and the second main game side has been consumed). In the case of Yes in step 2091 (second variation 1), in step 2092 (second variation 1), the background effect display control means SM23 sets “probability change notification stage” as the stay stage (background effect related information temporary storage means) Temporarily store in the SM 23b) and proceed to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2091 (second variation 1), in step 2093 (second variation 1), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and the counter value is within the second range. It is determined whether the value is within the range (for example, 10 to 70). In the case of Yes in step 2077 (second modification 1), in step 2078, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “long effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), Control goes to step 2094 (second variation 1).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2093 (second variation 1), in Step 2080, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 71). 80). In the case of Yes in Step 2080, in Step 2082, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “fixed effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and Step 2094 (second variable) Move to 1). If No in step 2080 (for example, if the game is not in a specific game), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100).

  Next, in step 2094 (second variation 1), the background effect display control means SM23 counts the remaining probability variation count (for example, the counter value of the 80-stay stage management counter SM23c and the remaining variation start count in the probability variation gaming state). A command for displaying the (number of times) is set, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2100). By configuring in this way, there is a possibility that there is a hold that remains at the start of a specific game regardless of whether or not there is a hold (especially a hold on the first main game side that is disadvantageous for the player). In a situation that is disadvantageous to the player despite the transition to the probability variation gaming state, it is possible to notify the remaining variation number of the probability variation gaming state from the variation immediately after the variation that can digest all of the above. It becomes possible to digest the disadvantageous situation for the player without noticing something. When the specific gaming state is ended by reaching the big hit or the upper limit number, the display of the remaining variation number of the probability variation gaming state is erased. Further, when configured as in this example, from the 10th variation after the start of the specific game, the remaining variation start count in the probability variation gaming state (the remaining variation count after the variation, and “0” in the final variation) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is the remaining variation end count in the probability variation gaming state (the remaining variation count including the variation, and the final variation is “ It may be configured so that it can be notified of “one time”. In such a configuration, since the number of remaining fluctuation ends is “71” at the 10th change after the start of the specific game, the number becomes unnatural. In order to avoid such a situation, it is desirable to set the upper limit number of times of variation (ST number) in the probability variation gaming state in accordance with the notification method of the remaining number of variations in the probability variation gaming state (in this example, When notifying the remaining variation end count in the probability variation gaming state, the ST count is set to 79 times or 89 times, so that a good value such as “70 times” or “80 times” can be obtained at the start of the notification of the remaining probability variation number. Can be notified). In this example, when notification of the remaining ST fluctuation count is started, the notification is started from a good value (for example, “70 times”). Is a variation in the probability variation gaming state, the ST upper limit count may be set so that it can be reported as a value obtained by subtracting one variation of the variation from a good value (eg, “79 times”) ( In this example, when notifying the remaining variation start count in the probability variation gaming state, the ST count is set to 78 times or 88 times, so that “69 times”, “79 times”, etc. at the start of notification of the probable change remaining number times. A value obtained by subtracting 1 from a clear value can be notified).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of Step 2100 in FIG. 18 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. Here, in the modification 1 from 2nd Embodiment, it is comprised so that the electrically-driven member longest open | release described in said embodiment may not be performed. First, the changes from the second embodiment are about step 2125 (second modification 1), step 2700 (second modification 1), step 2750 (second modification 1), and step 2143 (second modification 1). The purpose is to configure so that the processing for changing the display mode of the drawing hold can be executed during normal gaming (non-time reduction / non-probability variation gaming state). That is, when a main game hold occurs, if there is no jackpot hold to be consumed before the new hold, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 temporarily stores the background effect related information in step 2125 (second variation 1). With reference to the flag area of the means SM23b, it is determined whether or not the specific game execution flag is ON. If YES in step 2125 (second modification 1), the flow advances to step 2150. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2125 (second variation 1), in step 2700 (second variation 1), the hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 executes a normal-time battle hold lottery process to be described later, and step 2750 (second change). 2) Change to 1).

  Next, in step 2750 (second variation 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a hold display mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2143 (second variation 1). Next, in step 2143 (second variation 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 lights up the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value based on the display mode of each drawing hold (drawing). The hold display is executed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the normal-time battle hold lottery process according to the subroutine of Step 2700 (second modification 1) in FIG. 68 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the “previous battle hold” or “rear battle hold” in the hold (details will be described later, “ “Previous Battle Hold” is a hold that can be used as an opportunity to change the hold display mode between the hold and the previous hold, and “After Battle Hold” is a hold that is one turn after the previous hold order. It is configured to determine whether or not there is a plurality of effects related to “previous battle hold” and “rear battle hold” at the same time. ing). In the case of Yes in step 2072, in step 2704, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit based on the hold information of the new hold. It is determined whether or not it is a hold. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a pre-reading effect lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5), and proceeds to step 2710. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2704, in step 2708, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20 but may be lower than the winning probability in step 2706). A pre-reading effect lottery to win is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2710.

  Next, in step 2710, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the prefetch effect lottery executed in step 2706 or step 2708 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether the battle hold type lottery (“previous battle hold” or “post battle hold” is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). "Lottery for" ".

  Next, at step 2714, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the battle hold type lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2714, in step 2716, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds “previous battle” to the hold information of the new hold (= trigger hold) in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information indicating “hold” is added. Next, in step 2718, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k turns on the previous battle hold flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2750). Transition.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2714, in step 2720, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds “ The information indicating that “post-battle hold” is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2750). Note that if the result is No in step 2702 or step 2710, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2750).

  By configuring in this way, the pre-reading effect lottery is executed at the time of the hold in the normal game, and the hold (= trigger hold) won in the pre-read effect lottery becomes “previous battle hold” or “rear battle hold” is there. In this example, when “Previous Battle Hold” or “After Battle Hold” exists in the hold, the prefetch effect lottery is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. “Previous battle hold” and “After battle hold” may exist simultaneously in the hold. In addition to the battle hold, there is a high possibility that there will be a big hit hold in the hold by displaying the decorative symbols of the same color in the left, middle and right columns in the case of losing. Production that suggests that there is a high probability that there will be a big hit in the hold because the content of the background, BGM, etc. will be different from the normal time. ) Etc. may be executed (or not executed during the execution of the battle holding effect), and in such a case, (1) during execution of a certain pre-reading effect, The same kind of pre-reading effects as the pre-reading effects are not executed. (2) Different types of different pre-reading effects (for example, a battle hold effect and a chance eye notice effect) can be executed simultaneously (in this case, multiple types of pre-reading effects are simultaneously progressing). You (3) The execution start timing of each prefetch effect may vary depending on the type. (4) Each prefetch effect suggests the degree of expectation that there will be a big hit in the hold. During execution of the pre-reading effect, by changing the execution mode (for example, display color) of the effect, the jackpot expectation suggested by the effect may be increased (or decreased), In such a case, the timing of the jackpot expectation suggested by the production is increased (or decreased), the suggestion mode of the jackpot expectation (for example, the suggestion of three stages and the suggestion of seven stages, the suggestion by display color and the number of characters appearing, Etc.) and the degree of increase (or decrease) in the expectation of jackpot (for example, whether the expectation level only increases one level at a time, or the expectation level may increase up to three levels). By type Te keep supplement that may be configured differently.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the hold display mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second modification 1) in FIG. 68 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 determines the new hold display mode to be “normal display mode” (for example, white).

  Next, in step 2754, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the previous battle hold flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the hold number is 3 or more. In the case of Yes in step 2756, in step 2758, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 holds the last hold (previous battle hold) and the digest order in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Is changed to “previous battle”, and the process proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2756, the process proceeds to step 2760. Next, in step 2760, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 turns off the previous battle hold flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2143). To do.

  Here, with reference to the battle hold display image diagram on the right side of the drawing, an effect relating to “previous battle hold” will be described. In this example, the hold on the first main game side which is disadvantageous for the player is displayed as a black face character, and the hold on the second main game side which is advantageous for the player is changed to a white face character. First, when the “previous battle hold” occurs, the “previous battle hold” and the hold display of the previous hold in the digestion order change to characters. Thereafter, an effect in which the characters battle each other is displayed. Then, as a result of the battle, an effect is displayed in which the character (in this example, the white face character) in which the hold that is the trigger hold (in this example, the “front battle hold” on the back side) has changed wins. It becomes. In order to prevent the hold changed to the character from being digested before the display of the result of the battle, the battle ends within one change (and the character hold may be consumed by the next change). It is desirable that the hold display mode is not changed when there is a characteristic) or that the hold after digestion (during change) can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2754, in step 2762, the hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the hold immediately before the last is “rear battle hold”. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the number of holds is 3 or more. In the case of Yes in step 2764, in step 2766, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 holds the last hold and the digest order one previous in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (post battle hold). Is changed to “post-battle”, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2143). Note that if the result is No in step 2762 or step 2764, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2143).

  Here, with reference to the battle hold display image diagram on the right side of the drawing, an effect relating to “rear battle hold” will be described. First, when “post-battle hold” occurs, the hold display does not change at that time. When the next hold of “After Battle Hold” occurs, the new hold and the hold display of “After Battle Hold”, which is the previous hold in the digestion order, are changed to characters. Thereafter, an effect in which the characters battle each other is displayed. Then, as a result of the battle, an effect is displayed in which the character (in this example, a black-faced character) in which the hold that is the trigger hold (in this example, the “rear battle hold” on the front side) has changed wins. Become.

  By configuring in this way, the effects related to the front battle and the effects related to the back battle are substantially the same in appearance (the hold display changes when the hold occurs), so the player has an advantage. Can not recognize until the battle result is displayed, whether or not a long hold (= white face character whose hold on the second main game side has changed) is a trigger hold, it can be expected, game This will improve the interest of the people. In such a configuration, the profit expectation obtained by the player is different between the jackpot on the first main game side and the jackpot on the second main game side. The probability of transition to the probability-variable gaming state differs depending on whether the big hit on the first main game side or the big hit on the second main game side (the transition probability to the probability-variable gaming state is different on the second main game side) Therefore, the big hit on the second main game side has a particularly high profit expectation level.

  Here, the above-described effect (an effect of encouraging the player's expectation) is whether the trigger hold (battle hold) is the hold on the first main game side at the start of execution of the effect related to the battle hold. In the present example, when an effect relating to a battle hold is executed, (1) the first main game hold is “previous”. In the case of “battle hold” and (2) the case where the second main game hold becomes “following battle hold”, the same effect (among the two holds whose display modes change, the previous hold is the second main game) A white-faced character that is on the side of the game, and a black-faced character that is changed to a black-faced character that is on the side of the first main game), and (3) the first main game is “4.” When the second main game hold becomes “Previous Battle Hold”. , The same effect (a black face character whose previous hold is a hold on the first main game side, and a white face whose subsequent hold is a hold on the second main game side, (The effect that changes to the character) can be executed, and the execution timing of the effect is always configured to be at the time when the subsequent hold occurs, so that the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side It is supplemented that the player cannot recognize which of the triggers is on hold (holding with a high expectation level for a big hit).

  Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of characters (or battle contents) displayed by changing the hold display are provided, and the character type (or battle) in which the hold has changed. )), It may be possible to suggest the expectation level that is a trigger hold, the expectation level that is a big hit, the contents of the special game and the specific game, and the like. In this example, the two hold display modes are changed from the last when the trigger hold occurs, but the change of the hold display mode may be executed at any time. You may be configured to change the second and third hold from the front when the hold of the eye occurs (in this case, the third if the previous battle hold, the second if the rear battle hold If it exists, the execution feasibility determination may be performed). In addition, in this example, the display mode of a plurality of holds displayed adjacent to each other is configured to change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the pending | holding whose display mode of a pending | holding may exist between other pending | holdings may exist. Moreover, you may comprise so that a battle may continue over multiple fluctuation | variations, and every holding | holding digestion (start of fluctuation | variation) before a battle hold | maintenance is expectation of which hold of several hold concerning a battle hold is a trigger hold. Performs a series of effects that suggest which hold is a trigger hold during the period until the effect of suggesting the degree (or an effect that increases the accuracy of the effect that suggests the degree of expectation) and the battle hold. You may comprise so that it may obtain. For example, characters may battle each other to reduce each other's hit points, and finally the trigger-hold character may win (in that case, from the start of the battle to the end of the battle) In addition, the appearance of the character may be changed, the appearance of the character may change, another character may appear, or an item such as a weapon may be acquired). Moreover, you may comprise so that a 3 or more hold display aspect may change, in that case, a 1 to 2 battle etc. generate | occur | produce and an advantageous hold is a trigger hold by the number of characters, the kind of appearance character, etc. You may comprise so that an expectation degree, a jackpot expectation degree, the content of a special game, a specific game, etc. can be suggested. Moreover, in order to continue expectation until the fluctuation | variation at the time of holding | maintenance digestion, you may comprise so that the result of a battle can become a draw (it does not alert | report which hold is a trigger hold). Further, the content of the battle effect may be related to the content of the effect at the time of change related to the trigger hold related to the battle effect (that is, the content of the battle effect relates to the trigger hold). You may comprise so that the production | presentation content at the time of a change may be suggested, for example, the display mode of a trigger hold changes to the character A, the battle effect which wins the enemy character B is performed, and the character A An effect of winning over character B can be executed, etc.).

  Further, in this example, after “after battle hold” occurs, when the next hold is a big hit hold, (1) “after battle hold” is a big hit hold, (2) A situation may occur in which “post-battle hold” is lost hold.

  In the situation of (1), after the effect of winning the “back battle hold” is executed, the change related to the “back battle hold” makes a big hit, and the special game related to the “back battle hold” is executed. As a result of the change immediately after, the next hold of the “after battle hold” will be a big hit. In such a situation, since any of a plurality of (two in this example) holdings that change the display mode of the holding is a big hit, in the effect that the characters whose holdings are changed battle each other, By making the result of the battle a draw, it is also possible to configure so that a sense of incongruity of production does not occur.

  Next, in the situation of (2), an effect of winning “after battle hold” is executed, but the “after battle hold” is lost, and the next hold of the “after battle hold” (battle effect) In this case, the defeat effect is put on hold), and a big hit will be generated. Therefore, when the situation (2) is reached, the contents of the effect in which the characters whose holding changes have changed are changed {for example, the holding of the effect is the next holding (holding which is a big hit) after the “after battle holding”. It may be configured to be able to change to a winning effect (so-called reverse effect).

  Also, in this example, the trigger hold becomes a big hit by configuring so that the hold that becomes a big hit is likely to be a trigger hold ("previous battle hold" or "after battle hold") compared to a hold that is lost. Although it is configured so that the degree of expectation is high, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the longer the fluctuation time of holding (the higher the degree of expectation that is a big hit and the longer the performance is performed), the easier it is to hold the trigger. It may be configured. Moreover, it is not necessary to configure a hold with a high expectation level for big hits (or a long fluctuation time) as a trigger hold. For example, a lottery for determining whether or not a trigger hold is made with a predetermined probability that is not influenced by the big hit expectation level. Between the trigger hold that was executed and won the lottery and the next hold of the trigger hold (or any of the existing main game holds) (for example, Expectation to be a big hit, distinction between the first and second main games, expected winnings when a big hit, time-reduced gaming state and probability variation gaming state after execution of a special game after a big hit Transition ratio, average stay period, etc.), change the display mode of each holding that has been compared to a character, and execute an effect in which each holding character that has changed the display mode battles With As a result of such comparison may be configured such that the character of the advantageous higher degree pending for the player may perform an effect to win. Also, a hold advantageous for the player {a hold with a high profit expectation at the time of a big hit, for example, a hold on the second main game side or a hold on the first main game side (for example, a hold with a high profit) 16R probability variable big hit)} may be configured to be more likely to be a trigger hold than a disadvantageous hold for the player (only an advantageous hold may be a trigger hold). In addition, when the predetermined variation mode is selected without executing the lottery to determine whether or not the trigger is put on hold, or after the last big hit (or after the start of a specific game), the number of variations reaches the predetermined number. In the main game hold, such as when the player operates the member that can be operated by the player (for example, pressing the sub input button) connected to the sub main control unit SM side. The hold may be set as a trigger hold, and the above-described effects (for example, effects in which characters corresponding to each hold perform a battle) may be executed.

  Next, FIG. 71 is an example of an effect content determination table that is referred to when determining the effect content in the first modification from the second embodiment. With the change of the table configuration on the main side, the configuration of the production contents is changed. First, during the stay of the “short stage stage” (in the first game to the eighth game), in the case of the specific game related to the first game, a table different from the second embodiment is referred to. In the case of a big game on the first main game side at the time of the specific game immediately after the first win, the variation mode selected on the main side is “SX-A0”. If the symbol is a short-open symbol (a symbol that makes it difficult to enter the probability-changing gaming state by opening the second big prize opening C20 and the specific area C22 for a short time), an effect of displaying a defeat effect after displaying a crisis effect The content is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a long open symbol (a symbol in which the second big prize opening C20 and the specific area C22 are opened for a long time and are likely to become a probability variation gaming state), after the crisis effect is displayed, the effect of displaying the crisis avoidance effect is displayed. The content is configured to be selected. That is, in the first half, after performing a common performance (only one system of performance), an effect according to the type of jackpot is executed, so whether or not it becomes a long open jackpot (in this example, the probability variation gaming state Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest and improve the fun of the game. In addition, when the second main game side is a big hit, all the big hits have long open symbols, so that the production contents for displaying the crisis production → the crisis avoidance production are selected.

  In addition, during the stay in the “probability change notification stage” (at the 9th change of the specific game), if it is a big hit, the same content as the above-mentioned table is selected, but if it is lost, a predetermined change mode ( In this example, “SK-a0” or “SK-b0”, a change of 10 seconds) is selected, and an effect of notifying that the state shifts to the probability change gaming state is executed. Note that the remaining number of specific game fluctuations is displayed from the next fluctuation “long performance stage”.

  Further, in the case of a big hit on the first main game side in the “short stage” (particularly in the case of a specific game related to the big hit after the first hit), the “long stage”, and the “fixed stage”, The variation mode “SX-A0” is selected, and the production (crisis production) according to the variation mode is executed. With this configuration, if a game ball accidentally enters the first main game start opening A10 during a specific game due to an unexpected situation (for example, a malfunction of the launching device), what is normal? Because different performances are executed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an unexpected situation has occurred, and it is possible to prevent the player's unexpected disadvantage (to alert the player). There may be a configuration in which an effect different from the variation on the second main game side can be executed even in the case of a variation in loss. In this example, the above-described variation mode “SX-A0” is selected while staying in the “short stage stage” during the specific game related to the big hit after the first hit. There is no limitation, and in the “short stage stage” in the specific game related to the big hit after the first hit, it is rare that the hold on the first main game side remains, so the big hit on the first main game side Also in this case, the above-described variation mode “SX-A0” may not be selected, and different effects may be executed.

  By changing as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the big hit on the second main game side is more profitable than the big hit on the first main game side (this example) Then, as a prime example, a so-called tamasho type configuration is taken as an example), and the main game suspension is digested in the winning order (in this example, the winning start digestion is a basic configuration, and has a distribution start unit. In the gaming machine (for example, the configuration), in order to quickly digest the hold on the first main game side remaining at the start of a specific game (especially, probability variation / time-reduced gaming state) immediately after the first hit, it remains Between 8 fluctuations for digesting the maximum number of holds, the loss fluctuation is configured to be a short time (1 second in this example). And, when a big hit is made during the high-speed digestion, even if the fluctuation is on either the first main game side or the second main game side, at least the first half will execute substantially the same production, so it is highly profitable. It is possible to execute an effect that dictates whether or not it will be a big hit. In addition, since the high-speed digestion is configured to notify the transition to the probability-variable gaming state after the high-speed digestion is completed (or confirmed to be terminated without a big hit), at the time of the high-speed digestion, the probability By not being notified that the game is in the variable game state, the shock received by the player can be reduced even during the high-speed digestion, even if the game is a big hit that does not shift to the probability game state. Similarly, the remaining fluctuation count is displayed after the high-speed digestion is finished).

  Further, since the gaming machine according to the present example has the distribution start port unit C50, the hold display mode is changed by utilizing the fact that the first main game hold and the second main game hold can be generated alternately. When the trigger hold to be generated is generated by lottery, the first main game hold and the second main hold are changed by changing the display mode of the hold before the trigger hold or the hold after the trigger hold. It will be possible to execute an effect that dictates which hold is a game hold (= whether it is a hold that tends to be a high profit big hit), and creates a new effect that improves the fun of the game It becomes possible to do.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of variation modes at the time of big hit may be provided even during eight variations after the start of a specific game at the time of first hit. In that case, at least the first half of the performance is shared by the high profit jackpot and the low profit jackpot, so that it is possible to execute an effective performance that enhances the player's expectation. Further, when the maximum profit big hit (for example, 16R long open big hit) is made during a specific game, a dedicated effect may be executed instead of executing the above-mentioned roaring effect.

  Also, in this example, after the start of a specific game (especially the probability variation / time-reduced game state), the nineth variation (the maximum total number of reserves on the first main game side and the second main game side has been completed) Although it is configured to notify the player that the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state in the next variation) effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and 8 (first main game) Side and the second main game side) The total number of suspensions until the first change is notified to the player that the current gaming state is a probability-fluctuating gaming state. You may comprise so that it may obtain. Further, in this example, in the variation in which the effect of informing the transition to the probability variation gaming state is performed, the variation mode (variation time) is referred to with reference to a dedicated limited frequency table (for example, “probability variation transition notification table”). ) Is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, referring to the limited frequency table 1, the final variation that determines the variation mode (the maximum pending total between the first main game side and the second main game side) is determined. The first fluctuation (the first main game side and the second main game side hold the maximum number of pending digestion) In the next variation), it may be configured such that an effect of notifying that the state is shifted to the probability variation gaming state can be executed.

  Further, in this example, the configuration is such that the longest opening of the electric combination is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the longest opening of the electric combination may be executed. When configured in such a manner, it may be configured not to execute the pre-reading effect lottery with respect to the suspension that occurs during the longest opening of the electric accessory.

  In this example, when the user stays at the “short stage stage” (eight fluctuations after the start of the specific game), the prefetch stage is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the pre-reading effect can be executed during the stay. Further, in such a configuration, it is preferable that the pre-reading effect is not executed when the pre-reading effect is scheduled to straddle the end of the “short effect stage” as in the above embodiment. is there.

  Further, in this example, the distribution member C50y is displaced by the weight of the game ball, and the game balls that have entered the distribution start port unit C50 are moved to the first main game start port A10 and the 2-2 main game start port B30. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a mechanism for driving the sorting member C50y (for example, a solenoid that is electrically driven) may be provided. In that case, in order to prevent the second main game start opening B10 advantageous to the player from being aimed, the sorting member C50y is irregularly displaced (or frequently displaced to the extent that it cannot be aimed). It is desirable to configure. Further, the period in which the game balls are distributed to the first main game start opening A10 side and the period in which the game balls are distributed to the 2-2 main game start opening B30 side may not be 1: 1 ( For example, the period allocated to the first main game side is 70%, the period allocated to the second main game side is 30%, etc.). In addition, when the sorting member C50y is configured to be able to be displaced without triggering a ball, the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold occur in any order, so that the player Can be paid attention to the effect related to the hold, and the fun of the game is improved.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the first main game hold and the second main game hold are used by utilizing the fact that the first main game hold and the second main game hold can occur alternately. Although it was configured to perform an effect that indicates which hold is a trigger hold, the hold display mode utilizing the fact that the first main game hold and the second main game hold can occur alternately Such effects are not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment, and only differences from the first modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 72 is a front view of a gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The difference from the first modification from the second embodiment is that, instead of having the common holding display part SG14, four holdings can be displayed in the horizontal direction (as viewed from the player) in the lower part of the display area SG10. This is a point having a direction holding display part SG15 and a vertical direction holding display part SG16 capable of displaying four holdings in the vertical direction (as viewed from the player) in the right part of the display area SG10. Will be described later).

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 5 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. Since this process is the same as that of FIG. 16 in the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted (that is, a supplementary explanatory diagram for clarifying the premise configuration of the modified example 2 from the second embodiment).

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (second variation 2) in FIG. 73 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. Since this process is the same as that of FIG. 17 in the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted (that is, a supplementary explanatory diagram for clearly showing the premise configuration of the modified example 2 from the second embodiment).

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of Step 2100 in FIG. 18 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The difference from the first modification from the second embodiment is that step 2144-1 (second modification 2), step 3100 (second modification 2), step 2144-2 (second modification 2), step 2144-3. (Second modification 2), step 3200 (second modification 2), step 3300 (second modification 2), step 3400 (second modification 2), and steps 2146-1 (second modification 2) to steps 2146-7 ( 2nd change 2), the purpose of which is the holding change effect or the hold display mode change suggestion effect in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time shortened game state) (the contents of execution of these effects will be described in detail) ) Can be executed. That is, in step 2114, the hold information transmitted from the main side is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage area, and then in step 3100 (second modification 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is in a normal time to be described later. Pre-reading effect determination processing is executed. Next, in step 2144-1 (second variation 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the counter value of the drawing hold counter (not shown), and the counter value is changed to the special display order switching value ( In this example, it is 5, and when the new hold occurs, the counter value is incremented by 1 in Step 2112. When it is 5 or more, the display order of the hold is displayed in the special display order. The purpose is to display the on-hold display order in the normal display order in the following cases (note that the special display order and the normal display order will be described later). In the case of Yes in step 2144-1 (second variation 2), in step 2144-2 (second variation 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the holding display order to the special display order, and the drawing hold counter Performs the same number of pending displays as the value. Here, in this example, when the hold display is executed in the special display order, an effect is performed as if the four holds displayed on the vertical hold display unit SG16 are fixed. (Details of the production will be described later).

  Next, in step 3200 (second modification 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a hold change effect execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3300 (second modification 2), the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a prefetch effect execution initial process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3400 (second variation 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a hold display mode change suggestion effect execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2144-1 (second variation 2), in step 2144-3 (second variation 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the holding display order to the normal display order. The same number of hold displays as the hold counter value are displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2200).

  In step 2132, after the counter value of the drawing hold counter is decremented by 1 due to the start of the symbol fluctuation, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is added in step 2146-1 (second variation 2). Deletes the hold information (random value) related to the symbol variation from the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2146-2 (second variation 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the counter value of the drawing hold counter (not shown), and the counter value becomes the normal display order switching value ( In this example, it is 3, and when the symbol variation starts and the counter value is decremented by 1 in step 2132 and is 3 or less, the display order of the hold is displayed in the normal display order, and on the other hand, when 4 or more If there is, it is determined whether or not the hold display order is the special display order).

  In the case of Yes in step 2146-2 (second variable 2), in step 2146-3 (second variable 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold display mode suggestion effect {step 3400 (second variable 2). ) Which is an effect that can be executed in the process of)} is deleted (when the on-hold display mode suggesting effect is executed, the effect is deleted, and when the effect is not executed, this process is not executed) . Next, in step 2146-4 (second modification 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 indicates a suggestion effect execution flag {hold change described later) in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. This is a flag related to the execution of the effect and the pending display mode change suggestion effect, and can be turned on in the process of step 3300 (second modification 2). It is turned off by processing, and this processing is not executed when it is off). Next, in step 2146-5 (second variation 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is triggered on hold (trigger hold on the hold that was won in the pre-read lottery in the process of step 3100 (second change 2)). The information indicating that the hold is a trigger hold is deleted from the information indicating that there is a trigger hold (this is a process executed when a trigger hold exists in the main game hold, and the trigger hold in the main game hold) This process is not executed if there is no such). In this example, the information indicating that the trigger is on hold is deleted in step 2146-5 (second modification 2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information indicating that the trigger is on hold can be deleted. If the hold change effect and the hold display mode change suggestion effect are not executed, and then the hold occurs and the number of holds again becomes the special display order switching value (5 in this example), the deletion is performed. You may comprise so that the pending | holding change effect and pending | holding display mode change suggestion effect which were not related to the trigger hold | maintenance may be performed.

  Here, in the processing from step 2146-2 (second variation 2) to step 2146-5 (second variation 2), the drawing hold counter value is decremented by 1 in the processing of step 2132, and the counter value is changed from 4 to 3. When the hold display mode change suggestion effect or the hold change effect has been executed, the process for ending the effect that has been executed.

  Next, in step 2146-6 (second variation 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes the display of the same number of hold as the drawing hold counter value by changing the holding display order to the normal display order. The process proceeds to (the process of step 2200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2146-2 (second modification 2), in step 2146-7 (second modification 2), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the holding display order to the special display order. The same number of hold displays as the hold counter value are displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 76 is a display image according to the number of holds in the second modification from the second embodiment. In the second modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of display orders for the number of holds: normal display order and special display order. In addition, the number of the pending display shown in the figure is the pending digestion order, and “1” is the reserve of the earliest digestion order (however, these digestion orders are stored in each pending display or the pending display area. Not visible to the player because it is not displayed). Further, as shown in the hold display part image at the top of the figure, the area that can display four holdes in the lower part of the display area SG10 in the horizontal direction is the horizontal hold display part SG15, and the hold in the right part of the display area SG10. A region that can display four in the vertical direction is the vertical direction holding display SG16. In addition, the arrow shown in the figure has shown the digestion order of the holding | maintenance in each holding | maintenance display part (however, these digestion orders are not clearly shown with respect to a player).

  In addition, the normal display order and the special display order are configured so that the display modes are different when the number of holds is four or more. First, from the normal display order, the first to fourth on-hold items are displayed on the horizontal hold display unit SG15, and the fifth to eighth on-hold items are displayed on the vertical hold display unit SG16. It is configured. Next, the special display order will be described. The first to third hold are displayed on the horizontal hold display part SG15 in the same manner as the normal display order, and when there are four hold, the vertical hold display part. All four are displayed on SG16. Further, in the case of 5 to 8 holds, 4 pieces are displayed on the vertical holding display section SG16 and the remaining holdings are displayed on the horizontal holding display section SG15 in the order of the numbers in the figure. Note that since the actual order of holding is not displayed in the actual holding display, the player cannot recognize the actual holding order. Further, when the display order is the special display order, the four hold displays displayed in the vertical hold display section SG16 do not change even if the number of holds increases or decreases (the display mode of the hold is fixed). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the newly generated hold appears as if it is displayed in the horizontal hold display section SG15. Further, in this example, the normal display order 5 to 8 display modes and the special display order 1 to 3 display modes are not used (as is clear from the processing flow of FIG. 75, These cases cannot occur in the control process). In addition, the display mode of the hold is not limited to this. For example, the hold display is executed in a special display order only in a specific situation (for example, in a situation where the time-saving gaming state is determined) In the case of the normal display order, all the hold displays of 1 to 8 are displayed on the horizontal hold display part SG15, and the hold display is in the vertical direction only when the special display order is set. You may comprise so that it can be displayed on hold display part SG16.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of normal prefetch effect determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 3100 in FIG. 75 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment {so-called continuous over a plurality of symbol variations. This is a process for determining whether or not the performance can be executed, and is a process for determining which of the holdings (trigger holding) that is the end of the continuous production when there are a plurality of holdings. }. First, in step 3102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 pre-determines whether the main game hold is a hold result based on the hold information (such as a lottery random number) in the main information temporary storage means SM11b. Next, in step 3104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the pre-determination result in step 3102 and holds a big hit before a new hold (hold related to the command received in the process of step 2112). It is determined whether or not there exists. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 3106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold counter in step 3108, and the counter value is the lowest value for prefetch lottery execution (in this example, 2 and the prefetch lottery is selected). It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than the minimum number of hold operations that can be executed. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the preliminary determination result in step 3102 and determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a pre-read lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2), and proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3110, in step 3114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 wins a prefetch lottery executed when a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20 and the new hold is a big hit) If the probability is lower than the rate, it may be changed as appropriate), and a prefetch lottery to win is executed, and the process proceeds to step 3116. Note that the execution mode of the prefetch lottery may be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be configured so that the prefetch lottery can be executed every time the hold is exhausted, or at a timing during the change related to the main game symbol. You may comprise so that prefetch lottery can be performed.

  Next, in step 3116, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the prefetch lottery executed in step 3112 or step 3114 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3116, in step 3118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 newly gives information indicating that the trigger is on hold to the next hold {step 2144-1 (second change 2) The process proceeds to. Even in the case of No in step 3104, step 3106, or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2144-1 (second modification 2)}.

  Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the hold change effect execution process according to the subroutine of Step 3200 in FIG. 75 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 3202, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, the suggestion effect execution flag {the flag is step 3300 (second variable) described later in detail. It is determined whether or not a flag that can be turned on in the pre-reading effect execution initial process of 2) is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the display change target hold {in this example, the latest digestion order among the holds displayed on the horizontal hold display unit SG15. It is determined whether or not the hold (hold displayed on the rightmost as viewed from the player) is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold change effect (the display mode of hold) in the post-change display mode of the trigger hold temporarily stored in step 3308 or step 3310. This is an effect to be changed, and the display mode after the change will be described later. Next, in step 3208, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold display mode change suggestion effect executed in step 3406 (the display mode after change of the hold change effect executed in the horizontal direction hold display unit SG15). Is displayed on the display area SG10). Next, in step 3210, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns off the suggestion effect execution flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and performs the next process {step 3300 (second The process proceeds to the processing of (2).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3204, in step 2312, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the display change target hold is a hold in the digestion order before the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays a trigger suggestion display mode (a display of a right-pointing arrow indicating that there is a trigger hold in the subsequent digestion order). In the aspect), the hold change effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of Step 3300 (second modification 2)}. In addition, also when it is No at step 3202 or step 3212, it transfers to the next process {process of step 3300 (2nd modification 2)}.

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect execution initial processing according to the subroutine of Step 3300 in FIG. 75 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 3302, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not a trigger hold exists in the main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the suggestion effect execution flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3306, in step 3308, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the trigger hold display mode determination table A, determines the post-change display mode of the trigger hold and temporarily stores it, and step 3312 Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3306, in step 3310, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the trigger hold display mode determination table B, determines the post-change display mode of the trigger hold and temporarily stores it, Control goes to step 3312.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a trigger hold display mode determination table A and a trigger hold display mode determination table B. The trigger hold display mode determination table A is a table referred to when the trigger hold is a big hit, and the trigger hold display mode determination table B is a table referred to when the trigger hold is lost. In this example, there are three types of post-change display modes: a star shape, a heart shape, and a diamond shape, and when the hold change is executed, the expectation that the hold becomes a big hit is the star in descending order of expectation. It is in the order of shape, heart shape, and diamond shape.

  Next, in step 3312, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the post-change display mode of the hold, which is the digest order before the trigger hold, to the trigger suggestion display mode (the display of the arrow pointing to the right and the trigger in the subsequent digest order). The display mode is determined and stored temporarily, which indicates that there is a hold. Next, in step 3314, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the suggestion effect execution flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and performs the next process {step 3400 (second The process proceeds to the processing of (2). Even in the case of No in step 3302 or step 3304, the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing in step 3400 (second modification 2)}.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change suggestion effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 75 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3402, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the suggestion effect execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 changes the change suggestion target hold {in this example, the earliest digestion of the hold displayed in the vertical hold display unit SG 16. It is determined whether or not the on-hold hold (hold displayed at the top when viewed from the player) is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the hold display mode change suggestion effect in the post-change display mode of the trigger hold determined in step 3408 or step 3310 and temporarily stored. To move to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3404, in step 3408, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the change suggestion target hold {in this example, the earliest of the holds displayed on the vertical hold display unit SG16 It is determined whether or not “holding (holding displayed at the top when viewed from the player)” is the holding order before the trigger holding. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the trigger suggestion display mode determined in step 3312 and temporarily stored (the display of the arrow pointing to the right and the trigger hold in the subsequent digestion order). The hold display mode change suggestion effect is executed in the hold display mode that suggests that there is a), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). Note that if the answer is No in step 3402 or step 3408, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 81 is a hold change effect / hold display mode change suggestion effect execution image in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First of all, in this image, it is assumed that all are executed during the change of the same (one time) main game symbol, and the transition of the production accompanying the increase in holding during the change of the same main game symbol is illustrated. Is. The execution image of the production will be explained. First, in the situation where there are two holds in the main game hold and the display order is displayed in the normal display order, the third hold occurs, Information indicating that the third hold is a prefetch lottery and is a trigger hold is added. In the same figure, the trigger hold is displayed in black to indicate which hold display is the trigger hold, but in reality, the same display as the other hold that is not the trigger hold at present. It is an aspect. Next, when two new holds are added and the number of holds is changed from 4 to 5, the display order of the hold is switched from the normal display order to the special display order. Here, when the display order of the hold is the special display order, the effect that the four holds displayed on the vertical hold display unit SG16 are fixed is executed. Although not shown in this example, the four holds displayed on the horizontal hold display section SG15 when the hold display order is switched from the normal display order to the special display order at the normal display order. An effect that the display appears to have moved to the vertical hold display section SG16 (for example, the characters appear at the timing when the number of the hold becomes five, and the four holds displayed on the horizontal hold display section SG15 are displayed. It is desirable to perform an effect of throwing it to the right and moving it to the vertical direction holding display section SG16. By configuring in this way, the player moves from the earliest four suspension orders to the vertical hold display section SG16, and the subsequent hold is displayed on the horizontal hold display section SG15. The hold display mode change suggestion effect can be seen as an effect of prefetching the next hold to occur. In addition, a hold display mode change suggestion effect is also executed at this timing (since the earliest hold in the vertical hold display unit SG16 is a change suggestion hold, the post-change display mode is a right-pointing arrow display. Becomes).

  Next, since one hold is newly added and the change suggestion target hold becomes the trigger hold, the hold display mode change suggestion effect related to the trigger hold is executed (in this image, the post-change display mode of the trigger hold) Is a star-shaped) and, as the hold change effect, the change in the hold display mode change suggestion effect in which the hold which is the slowest digestion order of the horizontal hold display unit SG15 was executed before the hold was added It is displayed in a trigger suggestion display mode (display of a right-pointing arrow) that is a post-display mode (the player recognizes that the newly added hold is the hold that has become the trigger suggestion display mode). Next, one new hold is added, and as a hold change effect related to the trigger hold, the hold that is the slowest digestion order of the horizontal hold display unit SG15 is executed before the hold is added. The change display suggestion effect is displayed in a star shape which is the display form after the change (the player recognizes that the newly added hold is a hold that has become the star shape) and the hold display mode change suggestion effect Ends (is erased).

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, without executing the hold display mode change suggestion effect, the hold change effect and the effect in the vertical direction hold display unit are used. You may comprise so that the effect which concerns on the pending | holding change in the example 2 of a change can be performed.

  By changing as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, it is possible to take the normal display order and the special display order as the display order of the hold depending on the number of holds. When the hold is displayed in the special display order, the four hold displayed in the vertical hold display section are shown to the player as if they are fixed. The player will recognize as if displayed on the direction hold display section. In addition to the execution of the hold display, the hold display mode change suggesting effect related to the hold (hold displayed at the top) that is the earliest digestion order of the vertical hold display section is newly executed, and thereafter When a hold is generated, the same display as the post-change display mode displayed in the hold display mode change suggestion effect is displayed as a hold display on the horizontal hold display section, and the player generates a hold now. Then, by recognizing that the hold display related to the generated hold is the same display as the post-change display mode displayed in the hold display mode change suggestion effect, it is as if the hold has not yet occurred It is possible to execute an effect as if the display mode (or expectation level that is a big hit) is foretold, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, the display mode after change that will be displayed when the hold display mode change suggestion effect related to the hold before the trigger hold is executed (FIG. 79). The display mode determined in step 3308 or step 3310) is only the trigger suggestion display mode (display of the arrow pointing to the right), but is not limited to this, and the player can set the expectation level that is a big hit of the trigger hold. It is good also as a display mode which can be notified to. In addition, the display in the hold display mode change suggestion effect (the display mode after change, for example, “⇒”), and then the display of the hold when the hold change effect is executed (the display mode after change, for example, "⇒") is the same (for example, both are "⇒" display), but is not limited to this, for example, as a hold display mode change suggestion effect, then a hold change effect was executed 81 is a display that does not clearly notify the hold display (for example, “?” Display, and the hold display when the subsequent hold change effect is executed becomes “⇒” shown in FIG. 81. Or display that cannot be recognized as “★”.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, the hold display mode change suggestion effect notifies the post-change display mode of the hold change effect that is executed at the timing when the hold is first generated thereafter. Although it is configured, the presentation mode of the hold display mode change suggestion effect is not limited to this, for example, the position where the hold is displayed when the hold occurs first (the slowest digestion order in the horizontal hold display area) (A position on the right of the hold to be)) (for example, a dotted circle hold display) and an effect mode that suggests how many ball hold will occur, the hold change effect related to the trigger hold will be executed It may be executed simultaneously with the hold display mode change suggestion effect in this example, or may be executed alone.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, the hold change effect is configured to be executed alone as the prefetch effect, but is not limited thereto, and the hold change effect or the hold display mode change is performed. Due to the execution of the suggestion effect, another prefetch effect (for example, a background change effect, a countdown effect, etc.) may be executed.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, the display order of the hold can be the special display order regardless of the gaming state, but actually, in the time-saving gaming state, Since the player proceeds the game by hitting right (launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area), only the hold on the second main game side occurs (or is easy to do), As a result, it becomes difficult for the number of holds to be 5 or more, so that the display order of the hold is always displayed in the normal display order. Since it is configured in this manner, in the time-saving gaming state, it may be configured to always display the display order of the hold in the normal display order, or display only 4 pieces in the horizontal hold display portion and display 5 pieces. You may comprise so that the hold display beyond eyes may not be performed (for example, only the hold on the 2nd main game symbol side is displayed).

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment, when the display order of the hold becomes the special display order, the four holds displayed on the vertical hold display portion are fixed. However, the display mode in the special display order is not limited to this. For example, the display mode is displayed on the vertical hold display unit according to the number of holds displayed on the horizontal hold display unit. It may be configured such that the four on-hold display modes (for example, display colors are different) and the production mode of the production such as the background production can be different. Moreover, the display mode of the hold display of the vertical hold display section does not have to display four hold, for example, one image display (for example, an oval display, and a plurality of holds are gathered together). The display method may be a large hold), and the player does not consume the hold related to the hold display of the vertical hold display portion, but the hold related to the hold display of the horizontal hold display portion is consumed. There is no problem if the display mode is such that it is recognized.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, the condition that the display order of the hold is changed from the normal display order to the special display order is that the number of the hold increases to a predetermined number (from 4 to 5). However, the condition is not limited to this. For example, in the normal-time look-ahead effect determination process, information indicating that the trigger is held is added to a new hold for each change ( Or it is good also as winning a lottery performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/30) for every change when the number of reservations is more than a predetermined number. In addition, there is no problem even if the predetermined number, which is a condition that the display order of the hold in this example is changed from the normal display order to the special display order, is changed.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment, when the display order of the hold becomes the special display order, the four hold displays displayed on the horizontal hold display section are held vertically. Although the effect of moving to the display unit is executed, there is no problem even if the number of the hold display for executing the effect is changed. For example, at the timing when the fifth hold occurs, the display is displayed on the horizontal hold display unit. In addition, it may be configured to execute an effect in which two of the four on-hold displays are moved to the vertical direction hold display unit (after execution of the effect, three on the horizontal direction hold display unit are held on the vertical direction. Two hold will be displayed on the display unit). In such a configuration, the number of holdings to be moved (the display is erased) among the four holding displays displayed on the horizontal holding display unit, and the vertical holding display unit is moved (displayed). It is desirable to have the same number of holds.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, the execution mode of the effect related to the on-hold digestion (the effect that is executed because the number of on-hold displays decreases by one ball with the on-hold digestion) is the horizontal direction. The execution mode of the effect related to the reserved digest displayed on the hold display unit may be different from the execution mode of the effect related to the reserved digest displayed on the vertical direction reserved display unit. For example, the execution mode of the effect related to the hold-up display displayed in the horizontal hold display unit is such that the remaining hold display moves so as to fill the hold display that is erased every time the hold is used (shift The execution mode of the effect related to the on-hold digest displayed on the vertical direction hold display section is such that the on-hold display is fixed even if the on-hold is digested (it does not appear to have moved) ) It may be a production.

≪Change mode according to modification 2 from the second embodiment≫
A gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment may be configured as follows. Moreover, you may combine each structure suitably.
-It is relatively easy for a player to make a ball in the second main game start port rather than the first main game start port.
-The frequency of occurrence of the hold change effect differs between the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side (for example, if a hold change effect occurs in the hold on the second main game side, the special game High expectations for the transition to, etc.).
・ The frequency of occurrence of the reach effect differs between the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side (for example, if a reach effect occurs in the hold on the second main game side, High expectations for migration, etc.)
・ There is a small hit {can be provided on both the first main game side and the second main game side, or may be provided on either one (for example, a small hit is provided only on the first main game side) ), The winning probability may be different between the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, the first main game side has a higher probability of winning a small hit)}.
・ Providing an effect that tells whether the change in the main game symbol is a change related to a small hit or a change related to a big win, and if the effect occurs on the second main game side, The expectation of becoming a big hit is higher than the case where the change is deterministic or occurs on the first main game side.

(Variation example 3 from the second embodiment)
In addition, in 2nd Embodiment, it was comprised so that a player's expectation could be relieved by whether it transfers to a probability change game state with a jackpot symbol. However, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation by devising the configuration of the gaming machine and the performance execution mode. Thus, such a configuration is referred to as a third modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Note that the third modification from the second embodiment has a star lamp counter SM23c3 for measuring the number of star lamps that can be lit on the short stage, which is the stage in the probability varying gaming state. ing. Also, a promotion effect notification mode determination table SM23ta for determining the execution mode of the promotion effect, which is an effect of notifying the player whether or not the second big prize opening C20 executed during the special game is long open. have.

  First, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to Step 1300 of FIG. 5 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are as follows: Step 1307 (second modification 3), step 1309 (second modification 3), step 1317 (second modification 3), and step 1319 (second modification 3). Yes, the purpose is to add information related to the order of entry to the hold information generated by the entry when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. is there. That is, after the first main game content determination random number is acquired in step 1306, in step 1307 (second variation 3), the symbol holding means MJ32 sets the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and the second main game holding information MJ32b-A. With reference to the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side in the game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, the current total hold number is acquired, and “total hold number + 1” is newly added Derived as the winning order of the winning prize Next, in step 1309 (second variation 3), the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A uses the acquired first main game content determination random number and the derived winning order as the hold information as the first main game symbol. The information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the process proceeds to Step 1310.

  After acquiring the second main game content determination random number in step 1316, in step 1317 (second variable 3), the symbol holding means MJ32 determines that the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and the second main game holding information MJ32b-A. With reference to the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side in the game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, the current total hold number is acquired, and “total hold number + 1” is newly added Derived as the winning order of the winning prizes. Next, in step 1319 (second variable 3), the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B uses the acquired second main game content determination random number and the derived winning order as the hold information as the second main game symbol. The information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the process proceeds to Step 1320.

  As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the information on the first main game side hold (up to 4 pieces) and the second main game side hold (up to 4 pieces) are the first main game. Temporarily stored in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A or the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B in the order of winning to the start opening A10 or the second main game start opening B10, a maximum of 8 It is configured so that a number of holds can be accumulated.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to Step 1400 of FIG. 5 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is about step 1402 (second modification 3), and the purpose is to realize the winning order digestion of the main game hold (the second embodiment and the above-described implementation). In the form, it is the second main game reservation priority digestion). That is, at the time of execution of the subroutine, in step 1402 (second variation 3), the hold digest control means MJ31, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means With reference to the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side in MJ32b-B, it is determined whether or not the earliest winning order hold is on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 1402 (second variation 3), the processing related to the variation of the first main game symbol is executed in step 1400 (1), and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1550). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1402 (second variation 3), in step 1400 (2), the process related to the variation of the second main game symbol is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the game is in a state in which the hold on the first main game side is likely to occur (second main game start) because the hold is performed according to the winning order. It is difficult to open the mouth electric accessory B11d, and in this case, the first main game start port A10 is easier to enter than the second main game start port B10), the second main game side Is a state in which the second main game start port B10 is more likely to be opened, and in this case, the second main game start port B10 is more than the first main game start port A10. After the game state transitions to a state where it is easy to enter the ball), even if the hold on the first main game side remains when the hold on the second main game side occurs, the remaining first It becomes possible to digest the hold on the main game side.

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to Steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 83 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are about step 1407 (second modification 3) and step 1450 (second modification 1), and the purpose of each time the main game suspension is digested, the remaining suspension It is to update the winning order appropriately and to change the processing content (subroutine content) of the limited frequency variation mode determination processing. That is, if Yes in step 1403 (when the variation start condition is satisfied), in step 1407 (second variation 3), the hold control means MJ30 is in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. The first main game side (second main game side hold information in the second main game symbol hold information means MJ32b-B) is read and deleted from the hold information, and the remaining hold information is shifted, respectively. 1 is subtracted from the winning winning order (hereinafter, processing relating to main game variation is executed). Further, the limited frequency variation mode determination processing in step 1450 (second variation 3) will be described later in detail.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in the third modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is about the main game table 2, that is, the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). The type of jackpot symbol, the maximum number of rounds of special games executed based on the stopped jackpot symbol, and the number of rounds in which the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) becomes long open are changed. Yes. By configuring the type of jackpot symbol and the execution mode of the special game in such a configuration, a promotion effect described later (whether or not a round in which the second big prize opening C20 is long open in the special game being executed is executed) The effect of notifying the player of this) can be appropriately executed. In the third modification from the second embodiment, all the special games at the time of big hit on the second main game side have a round in which the second big prize opening C20 is long open (that is, Since the game is designed to be in a probability-variable game state after the end of the special game, the big hit on the second main game side is better for the player than the big hit on the first main game side. It is configured to be advantageous. In the third modification from the second embodiment, the limited frequency table is not referred to as the main game symbol variation mode determination table in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state (main gaming table 3 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the limited frequency table may be referred to even in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. As such a configuration example, “(1), after the special game on the first main game side is finished, whether or not there is a big hit symbol that triggered the transition of the special game and a game ball entering the specific area C22 Regardless of whether or not the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to. ”“ (2) After the end of the special game on the second main game side, it becomes an opportunity for the transition of the special game. Regardless of the big hit symbol, when a game ball entering the specific area C22 is detected, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol, and the game ball to the specific area C22 is determined. If no entry is detected, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol. In addition, the same limited frequency table may be referred to in different gaming states (for example, a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state and a non-probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state), or different. The performance mode, performance stage, and the like executed in the gaming state may be the same (or substantially the same, and the variation time during which the performance is executed may be different) (the contents of the table are assigned lottery values) Or random selection with the same selection tendency may be different).

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to Step 1450 (second variation 3) of FIG. 84 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, at step 1475, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and after the first main game special game flag {after the execution of the special game related to the first main game side. It is a flag that is turned on when the probability variation gaming state is entered, and it is determined whether or not “turned on in step 1690 (second modification 3)” of FIG. 90 to be described later is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 1475, in step 1476, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 10) in FIG. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1476, in step 1477, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination. Then, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 1480.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1476, in other words, when the limited frequency counter value G is within the special stage 1 second stage range (10 ≧ G), in step 1478, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 Referring to the limited frequency table 3 in the variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined based on the main game random number and the result of lottery determination, and the process proceeds to Step 1480. Note that if the answer is No in step 1475, the process proceeds to step 1480.

  Next, in step 1480, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and after the second main game special game flag {special game execution related to the second main game side] It is a flag that is turned on when the probability fluctuation gaming state is set later, and it is determined whether or not “turned on in step 1692 (second modification 3)” of FIG. 90 to be described later is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 1480, in step 1482, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50) in FIG. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1482, in step 1484, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination. Then, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1413).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1482, in step 1486, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is within the special stage 2 second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1486, in step 1488, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination. Then, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1413).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1486, in other words, if the limited frequency counter value G is within the third stage range of special figure 2 (10 ≧ G), in step 1490, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 With reference to the limited frequency table 3 in the variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined based on the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result, and the next processing (step 1413) Process). In the case of No in step 1480, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1413).

  As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, when the probability varying gaming state is entered after the special game related to the first main gaming symbol, the variation aspect of the main gaming symbol during the probability varying gaming state. The limited frequency table to be referred to when determining is changed from “Limited frequency table 2 → Limited frequency table 3”, but when the probability variation gaming state is entered after the special game related to the second main game symbol, The limited frequency table that is referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol during the probability variation gaming state changes from “limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3”. That is, depending on whether the special game that triggered the probability-variable gaming state is related to the first main game side or the second main game side (the game state before the execution of the special game is It is configured so that the limited frequency table (and transition) to be referred to can be different (not described below) (note that details will be described later, but the displayed stage stage may be different depending on this difference) Have been).

  Next, FIG. 87 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the limited frequency table 1 in the modified example 3 from the second embodiment is that the first main game side and the second main game side are determined in a variation mode without depending on the number of reserves (first main game side) The first main game side does not depend on the number of the first main game hold and the second main game side does not depend on the number of the second main game hold). There is only one kind of variation mode that can be selected in each table, and the table referred to by the symbol is different. Although the details will be described later, the variation time related to the 1A, 2A and 3A symbols of the limited frequency table 1 is the same as the variation time related to the 1A, 2A and 3A symbols of the limited frequency table 2, A similar effect (door closing jackpot announcement effect described later) is executed. It should be noted that when determining the variation mode on either the first main game side or the second main game side, the variation mode is independent of the total number of the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number. May be determined.

  In addition, the feature configuration of the limited frequency table 2 in the third modification from the second embodiment is dependent on the number of reservations only on the second main game side (depending on the number of second main game reservations), and the variation mode is determined. This means that a long variation time is easily selected compared to other limited frequency tables (particularly on the second main game side). In addition, the characteristic configuration of the limited frequency table 3 in the modified example 3 from the second embodiment is the change in the number of reservations (the number of reservations, the first main game side or the second main game side). Or not depending on the result of the lottery), only a fixed fluctuation time is selected. In addition, when determining the variation mode on the second main game side, the variation mode may be determined depending on the total number of the first main game reservation number and the second main game reservation number.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to Step 1550 of FIG. 5 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 1559 (second variation 3). After clearing the time reduction counter MP52c in step 1558, the specific game control means MP50 is changed to step 1559 (second variation 3). Then, after the first main game special game flag and the second main game special game flag are turned off, the process proceeds to step 1560. Here, the flag after the first main game special game is a flag that can be turned on after the end of the special game on the first main game side, and is turned on in step 1690 (second variation 3) in FIG. 90 described later. . The post-second main game special game flag is a flag that can be turned on after the end of the special game on the second main game side, and is turned on in step 1692 (second variation 3) in FIG. 90 described later.

  Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to Step 1850 of FIG. 56 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1854 (second modification 3) and step 1880 (second modification 3) to step 1884 (second modification 3), the purpose of which depends on the jackpot symbol that has stopped. The second big winning opening C20 is to make the round in which the long opening is different. That is, if the distribution game execution flag is OFF in step 1852, the distribution game execution control means MP36 in step 1854 (second variable 3) determines the currently executed round (distribution game execution round). It is determined whether or not the second big prize opening C20 is a round that is long open. In the first modification from the second embodiment, the distribution game execution rounds are three rounds of 4R, 8R, and 12R (the distribution game execution rounds can be changed without any problem and during the special game) It is desirable to set it together with the timing of the performance to be performed). In the case of Yes in Step 1854 (second modification 3), the process proceeds to Step 1856 to set the long open pattern of the second big prize opening C20, while in the case of No in Step 1854 (second modification 3), The process proceeds to step 1858 to set the short opening pattern of the second big prize opening C20.

  Further, when the distribution game execution flag is turned on in step 1852, or when the second big prize opening C20 is opened in step 1864, distribution is performed in step 1880 (second variable 3). The game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not there is a new entry into the specific area C22 in the special game currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 1880 (second modification 3), in step 1882 (second modification 3), the sorting game execution control means MP36 transmits a command related to the specific area entry effect to the sub-main control unit SM. To the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Next, at step 1884 (second variable 3), the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Transition. Note that if the answer is No in step 1880 (second modification 3), the process proceeds to step 1866.

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is an example of a long release execution round. As shown in the figure, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the allocation execution rounds are 4, 8, and 12R, and the second big prize opening C20 becomes long open during execution of the special game. Even if it is a big win symbol (1A, 3A, 5A, 7A, 5B and 7B in this example), depending on which special game is related to which big hit symbol, the second big winning opening C20 is a round (vibration) The game execution rounds) may be different. In addition, as will be described later, among the rounds in which the second grand prize opening C20 is long open, the player has a round in which the second big prize opening C20 is long open in the round before the earliest round. It is comprised so that it may notify.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to Step 1650 in FIG. 56 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1688 (second variation 3) to step 1692 (second variation 3), and the purpose is to execute when the state shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game. Whether the special game played is a special game related to the first main game side or a special game related to the second main game side is determined using a flag. That is, in step 1656, after setting the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) to the time reduction counter MP52c, in step 1688 (second variation 3), the specific game control means MP50 executes the special game executed. Special game related to the first main game side (in this example, it is a special game related to 1A, 2A, 3A, 5A and 7A, of which 1A, 3A, 5A and 7A are easy hits into the specific area C22 It is determined whether it was a symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1688 (second variable 3), in step 1690 (second variable 3), the specific game control means MP50 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, the first main game special The post-game flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1688 (second modification 3), in other words, the special game executed is a special game related to the second main game side (in this example, a special game related to 5B and 7B, which If the big hit symbol is also a big hit symbol that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22), in step 1692 (second variation 3), the specific game control means MP50 sets the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. The post-second main game post-game flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1658.

  Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to Step 2050 in FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2084 (second modification 3), step 2086 (second modification 3), step 2088 (second modification 3), and step 2090 (second modification 3). Is a stay stage to be shifted between when the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game on the first main game side and when the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the completion of the special game on the second main game side. It is to make it different. That is, after the specific game is started in step 2052, in step 2084 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the started specific game is the first. 2. It is determined whether or not the game is a specific game after a special game related to the main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2084 (second variation 3), in step 2086 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 is in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, the second main game. The side ST effect flag is turned on, and the routine proceeds to step 2054. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2084 (second modification 3), the process proceeds to Step 2054.

  If the specific game is ended in step 2058, the background effect display control means SM23 is in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b in step 2088 (second variation 3). The side ST effect flag is turned off, and the routine proceeds to step 2060. If the counter value of the stay stage management counter SM23c is in the first range (1 to 30 in this example) in step 2072, the background effect display control means SM23 is in step 2090 (second variation 3). Refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the second main game side ST effect flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2090 (second modification 3), in step 2074, “short effect stage” is set as the stay stage, whereas in the case of No in step 2090 (second modification 3), step 2078 is set. Then, set the “long stage” as the stay stage. As described above, in the third modified example from the second embodiment, when the special game is finished after the special game is finished, the stage is “short stage” after the special game on the second main game side is finished. On the other hand, after the special game on the first main game side ends, the production stage is configured to start from the “long production stage” (note that even if it is a big hit on the second main game side, the probability variation determination area If there is no entry to the ball, the process shifts to the “long stage” instead of the “short stage”.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to Step 2100 of FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. A change from the second embodiment is step 2700 (second modification 3). When a new hold occurrence command is received from the main side in step 2110, a background effect is produced in step 2700 (second modification 3). The display control means SM23 executes a short effect stage lamp lighting effect execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2112.

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a short effect stage lamp lighting effect execution process according to Step 2700 (second modification 3) in FIG. 92 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in Step 2702, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the current stay stage is the “short effect stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the star lamp counter SM23c3 and determines whether or not the counter value is smaller than the maximum lighting number (30 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the background effect display control means SM23 is a star lamp (a star lamp that can be lit on the effect display device SG. In this example, the star shape on the right side of FIG. As shown in the lamp lighting effect execution image diagram, 30 lamps are turned on one by one). Here, in this example, a star-shaped lamp is used, but the shape of the lamp may be any shape as long as the player can recognize the number of lights. Although there is no problem by changing the number of lamps, in this example, the value is the same as the maximum number of fluctuations (30 times in this example) that can stay on the “short effect stage”.

  Next, in step 2708, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to the counter value of the star lamp counter SM23c3. Next, in step 2710, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the star lamp counter SM23c3 and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current change is related to the big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the background effect display control means SM23 lights up on the effect display device SG as shown in the heart-shaped lamp (star-shaped lamp lighting continuous execution image diagram on the right of the figure). The lamp is a heart-shaped lamp to be obtained, and a lamp for notifying the player that the game is changing according to the jackpot) is turned on, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step 2112 processing). It should be noted that if the result of step 2702, step 2704, step 2710, or step 2712 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112).

  In the third modification from the second embodiment, the star lamp (the counter value of the star lamp counter SM23c3) is configured to increase every time the main game hold occurs, but the first main game start opening A10 Or you may comprise so that it may increase whenever the entrance to the 2nd main game start opening B10 is detected (namely, also at the entrance to the start opening at the time of holding full). In addition, the heart-shaped lamp is configured to light up when the star-shaped lamps are all lit when the change is related to the jackpot symbol. You may comprise so that a heart-shaped lamp may light. Alternatively, the lighting timing of the heart-shaped lamp may be “timing at which a ball entering the main game starting port is detected after all the star-shaped lamps are lit (or timing when a new main game suspension occurs)”.

  In the third modification from the second embodiment, although it is not shown, the timing when the “short effect stage” ends (shifts to the “long effect stage” depending on the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game, or In the special game, etc., all of the star lamp and the heart lamp are turned off, and the star lamp counter SM23c3 is reset (zero cleared). Further, on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13), a display that does not execute the lighting display of the hold display lamp, or is invisible or difficult for the player. You may comprise so that a process may be performed. Further, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the combination pattern of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols that can be displayed in the “short effect stage” (although not shown) is relative to the “long effect stage”. {Particularly for stop patterns related to loss fluctuations. For example, in the “long production stage”, there are a plurality of “5.8.3”, “2.9.0.”, “1.2.1”, etc. While the stop symbol is selected from the combination pattern of the stop symbol of the decorative design, the combination pattern of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can be displayed is less in the “short effect stage” than the “long effect stage” ( For example, only one pattern such as “3.3.1” may be used)}.

  Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to Step 2250 in FIG. 22 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2276 (second modification 3) to step 2280 (second modification 3), and the purpose of each is specific to the “short effect stage” and the “long effect stage”. Is to perform the production. That is, if the specific game execution flag is ON in step 2252, in step 2276 (second modification 3), the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the current stay stage. Is determined to be a “short stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2276 (second modification 3), in step 2750 (second modification 3), the reach effect display control means SM25 executes the effect determination process during the short effect stage, which will be described later, and the next process (step 2208). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2276 (second modification 3), in step 2278 (second modification 3), the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the current stay stage is It is determined whether or not it is a “long stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2278 (second modification 3), in step 2800 (second modification 3), the reach effect display control means SM25 executes the effect determination process during the long effect stage, which will be described later, and the next process (step 2208). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2278 (second variation 3), in step 2280 (second variation 3), the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the main game variation mode and the current stay stage (in this example, the fixed effect). The content of the effect is determined based on (stage), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during the short effect stage according to Step 2750 (second modification 3) in FIG. 94 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the change is a change related to a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the first main game side jackpot symbol. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the short variation time symbol {"short effect stage" staying, That is, when the limited frequency table 1 is referenced, it is a symbol whose variation time is a short time (5 seconds in this example), and is 1A, 2A and 3A} in this example? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2756, in step 2758, the reach effect display control means SM25 changes the effect content of the change to the door closing jackpot notification effect (the second big prize opening C20 is set as the execution content of the scheduled special game). A determination is made that the player does not notify the player whether or not a round with a long opening is included, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2754, in step 2760, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the maximum profit jackpot symbol (the highest profit for the player). In this example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2760, in step 2762, the reach effect display control means SM25 changes the effect content of the change to the bomb explosion effect after the pseudo continuous change (after the execution of the so-called pseudo continuous change, the change is a change related to the big hit. There is an effect that informs that a round in which the second grand prize opening C20 becomes long open is included during the special game to be executed, and is similar to the bomb non-promotion effect determined in step 2772 described later. The effect is determined to be executed} and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208.) In the case of No in step 2756, in other words, the stop symbol is the long variation time symbol (5A, 7A). Also in the case of this, the process proceeds to step 2762 and the same processing is executed.

  Here, the quasi-continuous variation means that the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is executed once or a plurality of times in one variation of the main game symbol, and the game is shown to the player as if the symbol variation has occurred a plurality of times. Although it is a production method, pseudo-continuous variation is started regardless of the remaining stay period (number of remaining symbol variations) of the “short production stage” at the time when the above-described processing results in variation related to the big hit. At the time when the fluctuation starts, it is configured so that the occurrence of the jackpot becomes deterministic {however, the fluctuation related to the plurality of symbol fluctuations in the pseudo continuous fluctuation → the interval of the fluctuation stop is the pseudo continuous fluctuation. Variations related to multiple symbol variations in the case of not being executed → substantially the same as the interval of variation stop (in this example, the variation time at the time of one loss variation of the main game symbol when staying in the “short effect stage” is 1 Is seconds Leave configured to be, it is desirable that whether pseudo-continuous fluctuation has started should be configured to be difficult determination for the player}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2760, in step 2764, the reach effect display control means SM25 selects the special jackpot effect execution lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) {for the player in the second main game symbol. A lottery to determine whether or not to perform the effect of notifying that the most profitable jackpot symbol (7B in this example) is won is executed. Next, at step 2766, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines whether or not the special big hit effect execution lottery executed at step 2764 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in step 2768, the reach effect display control means SM25 changes the effect content of the change to the maximum profit finalizing effect after pseudo continuous change {after the execution of the pseudo continuous change, the change is a change related to jackpot. There is a round in which the second grand prize opening C20 is long open during the special game to be executed, and the jackpot symbol that is most profitable for the player (7B in this example) is to be stopped. The effect to be notified} is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208). If No in step 2766, a bomb explosion effect after pseudo continuous change is executed in step 2762.

  In the case of No in step 2752, in other words, if the change is a change related to a loss, in step 2770, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines that the change is a final change in the “short effect stage” (in this example, , Whether or not the counter value of the stay stage management counter SM23c is 30). In the case of Yes in step 2770, in step 2772, the reach effect display control means SM25 is an effect that informs that the effect content of the change is a bomb-free effect (the change is a change related to loss, and is determined in step 2762). (The effect in which the same effect as the bomb explosion effect is executed) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2770, in step 2774, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content of the change as a bomb ignition effect (details will be described later), and the next process (process in step 2208). Migrate to In the first modification from the second embodiment, the maximum profit determining effect is configured to be executed only with the big winning symbol (7B) on the second main game side, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that it can be executed even on the game side jackpot symbol {for example, the maximum profit finalizing effect may be executed by the variation relating to the 7A symbol on the first main game side. Even in such a configuration, the big hit that is the maximum profit (in this example, the big hit that the 16R and the second big prize opening C20 is long open) is caused by the second main game fluctuation rather than the first main game side fluctuation. Since it is relatively easy to win, the maximum profit finalizing effect is more likely to occur due to a change related to the second main game side than a change related to the first main game side}.

  Here, FIG. 96 is a bomb effect / maximum profit confirmation effect execution image diagram and a door closing jackpot notification effect execution image diagram. First, the execution image diagram of the bomb production / maximum profit decision production will be described. At the time of fluctuation related to loss in the “short stage stage”, as shown in the figure, a bomb ignition effect that determines whether or not the bomb will eventually explode is executed over all fluctuations except the final fluctuation. (It is desirable to be a series of effects performed across variations). In addition, in the “short effect stage”, when the maximum profit jackpot symbol (7B in this example) is won and the special jackpot effect execution lottery is won, the maximum profit finalizing effect (in this example, The effect of displaying “super big hit” is executed. Also, in the “Short Stage Stage”, when the maximum profit jackpot symbol (7B in this example) is won and the special jackpot effect execution lottery is not won, or the second main game side other than the maximum profit jackpot symbol If you win the jackpot symbol (5B in this example), or if you win the long variation time jackpot symbol (5A, 7A in this example), the bomb explosion effect (in this example) , An effect of displaying “big hit”). In addition, in the final variation of the “short stage stage”, when the winning symbol is won, a bomb non-production effect (in this example, the bomb does not explode and “unfortunate” is displayed) is executed. Thus, in the “short stage stage”, the big win on the second main game side where the transition to the probability variation gaming state becomes definite and the maximum profit big hit symbol (7B in this example) are won. Since the main purpose is to notify the occurrence or non-occurrence of an advantageous event for the player, after the execution of the special game related to the second main game symbol (in other words, if the first main game side has not been held) It is configured to shift to the “short stage stage” only under the presumed circumstances).

  In this example, the quasi-continuous variation is executed for the variation related to the bomb production (the production related to the jackpot where the bomb will eventually explode, and in this example represents the maximum profit determination production and the bomb explosion production). Although it was configured, the purpose of this configuration is to perform the same effect as the bomb ignition effect until the bomb explodes and finally hit a big hit, and the variation in loss is repeated It is to temporarily stop the decorative symbols at the same timing and make it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize whether or not he / she has won a big hit until the “short stage stage” is completed. Specifically, since the fluctuation time of the loss variation is all 1 second, if the big hit is not won in the “short stage stage”, after the high-speed fluctuation related to the loss of 1 second is repeated 29 times, In the final change, a non-bombing effect is executed, and the player is informed that he has not won the big hit. On the other hand, when the 5B symbol is won at the 21st variation of the “short effect stage”, the high-speed variation related to the 1-second loss is repeated 20 times, and then the variation related to the 5B symbol for 10 seconds is executed. Here, during the fluctuation related to the 5B symbol, the same effect as the bomb ignition effect is executed, and the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is executed every second (9 times execution), and then the bomb explosion effect is executed. The substantially similar effects are executed until the end of the “short stage stage” final fluctuation and the big hit fluctuation, and the timings at the end of the “short stage stage” final fluctuation and the big hit fluctuation related to the loss are approximate timings. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not he / she wins the big hit. In this example, the variation time related to the loss in the “short effect stage” is one type. However, the variation time is not limited to this. For example, a limited frequency table in which only the loss variation that is the final variation is different is referred to. Thus, the time for performing the non-bombing production may be secured. Further, in this example, since the variation time related to the loss and the variation time related to the big hit with pseudo continuous variation are each one, for example, the big hit with pseudo continuous variation in the first variation in the “short stage stage” If you win, the player will recognize that it is a big hit variation in the execution time of the bomb flash production. {The execution time of the bomb flash production is 29 seconds when the "short stage stage" ends with only the loss variation. Because the execution time of the bomb ignition effect (including during the quasi-variation of the bomb explosion effect) when winning a big hit with pseudo continuous fluctuation at the first change is 9 seconds}. In order to prevent such a situation, multiple types of fluctuation times related to big hit fluctuations with loss fluctuations and pseudo continuous fluctuations are provided, and the time value from the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous fluctuation to the next temporary stop is set to the big hit with pseudo continuous fluctuations. It may be configured so that it is impossible or difficult to determine whether or not the player has won the big hit until the end of the short performance stage, such as changing according to the timing of winning the variation. Moreover, the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the pseudo continuous variation described above may be only one type. For example, the decorative symbol that is most easily selected related to the loss in the “short effect stage” (for example, “3 in the above example”). (3 · 1 ”etc.) (It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the symbol is a temporary stop related to pseudo-continuous fluctuation or a symbol stop related to loss fluctuation) .

  Next, a door closing big hit notification effect execution image diagram will be described. In the “Short Stage Stage”, when the short variation time big hit symbol (1A, 2A and 3A in this example) is won, the door closing effect is executed, but more specifically, it is currently executed. The bomb flaming production is different from the production system, and the production to respond to irregular situations (by closing the door image on the front of the bomb flaming production, there was no bomb flaming production. A production that can be understood by the player and the player) is executed. This is only after the end of the execution of the special game related to the second main game symbol (in other words, in the situation where it is estimated that there is no hold on the first main game side). Even if it is configured to make a transition, it has occurred due to an unforeseen event (for example, it was caused by left-handed in the probability-variable gaming state in which the game should proceed by right-handed). This is an effect to deal with an irregular situation where a big hit occurs at the 2nd main game side where the transition to the probability variation gaming state becomes definite and the maximum profit big hit symbol (this example Then, it is a kind of insurance effect in the “short effect stage” mainly for notifying the occurrence / non-occurrence of an event advantageous to the player, such as winning in 7B).

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during the long effect stage according to Step 2850 (second modification 3) in FIG. 94 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2802, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the change is a change related to a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the first main game side jackpot symbol. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2804, in step 2806, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the short fluctuation time symbol {"short effect stage" staying, That is, when the limited frequency table 1 is referenced, it is a symbol whose variation time is a short time (5 seconds in this example), and is 1A, 2A and 3A} in this example? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2806, in step 2808, the reach effect display control means SM25 changes the effect content of the change to the door closing jackpot notification effect (the second big prize opening C20 is set as the execution content of the scheduled special game). A determination is made that the player does not notify the player whether or not a round with a long opening is included, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2804, in step 2810, the reach effect display control means SM25 displays the effect content of the change as a battle victory effect {the change is a change related to the big hit and the special game being executed. Is an effect that informs that the second grand prize opening C20 includes a round that is long open, and an effect similar to the battle defeat effect determined in step 2814 is executed (if the battle effect is won) It is an effect that will be lost if it is a big hit and defeated)}, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208). In the case of No in step 2806, in other words, even when the stop symbol is the step length variation time symbol (5A / 7A), the process proceeds to step 2810 and the same processing is executed.

  In the case of No in step 2802, in other words, if the change is a change related to a loss, in step 2812, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation is longer than the time (60 seconds in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2812, in step 2814, the reach effect display control means SM25 displays the effect content of the change as a battle defeat effect {the effect of notifying that the change is a change related to the loss, and step 2810 described above. The same effect as the battle victory effect determined in the step is executed (the effect is a big hit if the battle effect is won and lost if it is defeated)}, and the next process (the process of step 2208) Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2812, in Step 2816, the reach effect display control means SM25 displays the effect contents of the change, the change mode of the main game symbol, the main game reservation number and the current stay stage (in this example, “ Based on the “long production stage”), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to Step 2400 of FIG. 18 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2493 (second modification 3), step 2494 (second modification 3), step 2850 (second modification 3), step 2496 (second modification 3) and step 2498 (second modification 3). The purpose is to execute a promotion effect, which is an effect related to whether or not there is a round in which the second grand prize winning opening C20 is long open at the start or during the special game. (The details will be left to the explanation of the subroutine related to the promotion effect notification mode determination process. However, in this process, first, notification that is a case in which the transition to the probability variation gaming state is definitely notified at the start of the special game) Details the process). That is, after turning on the special game flag in step 2412, in step 2493 (second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and started the special game. Is a special game related to a start probability change notification jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol of a group that definitely notifies the transition to the probability variation gaming state, in this example, 5A, 5B, 7A and 7B). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2493 (second modification 3), in step 2494 (second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 displays a long-open notification effect (at the start of the special game, the second large display) A command related to the execution of an effect that informs that there is a round in which the winning opening C20 is long open exists, and the process proceeds to Step 2850 (second modification 3). In step 2414, after setting the command related to the big hit start display, the process proceeds to step 2850 (second variation 3). Next, in step 2850 (second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes a promotion effect notification mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2416.

  In step 2416, after setting a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes, in step 2496 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, It is determined whether or not a command related to a specific area entry effect (displayed as “V” in this example) is notified to the player that a game ball has entered the specific area C22. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2496 (second modification 3), in step 2498 (second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the specific area entry effect, and proceeds to step 2426. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2496 (second modification 3), the process proceeds to step 2426.

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of a promotion effect notification mode determination process according to Step 2850 (second modification 3) in FIG. 98 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2852, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the special game being executed has no long open notification jackpot symbol (the second big prize opening C20 is long during the special game). It is a jackpot symbol with no open round, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a special game according to 2A). In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the promotion effect notification mode determining table SM23ta related to the long hit big hit symbol (2A in this example), and the special effect currently being executed A command to be executed by determining the contents and presence / absence of execution in the game is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2416).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2852, in step 2856, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the special game being executed is the long open first half notification jackpot symbol { The big win symbol that only the promotion effect A (executed in the 2R in this example) can be executed because the round in which the two major winning openings C20 are long open is the first half of the special game (in this example, the 4R). In this example, it is determined whether or not the game is a special game related to 3A}. In the case of Yes in step 2856, in step 2858, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the promotion effect notification mode determination table SM23ta related to the long open first half notification jackpot symbol (3A in this example), and is currently being executed. A command to be executed by determining the contents and presence / absence of execution in the special game is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2416).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2856, in step 2860, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the special game being executed is the long open second half notification jackpot symbol { The round in which the two major winning openings C20 are long open is all promotion effects (promotion effect A, promotion effect B, and promotion effect C) in the second half of the special game (in this example, 8R and / or 12R) In this example, it is determined whether or not the game is a special game related to 1A}. In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the promotion effect notification mode determination table SM23ta related to the long open second half notification jackpot symbol (1A in this example), and is currently being executed. A command to be executed by determining the contents and presence / absence of execution in the special game is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2416). Even in the case of No in step 2860, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2416).

  Here, the upper part of the figure is an example of a promotion effect notification mode determination table. As shown in this example, there are three types of presentation modes for the long-open notification no big hit symbol (2A), one type of presentation mode for the long open first half notification big hit symbol (3A), and the long open second half notification big hit symbol (1A). ) Has three types of performance modes, and is configured so that the performance mode provided for each jackpot symbol is selected equally (for example, in the case of 2A symbols, 1/3 for each performance mode) Selected with probability). Further, the promotion effects include a promotion effect A that can be executed in the 2R, a promotion effect B that can be executed in the 6R, and a promotion effect C that can be executed in the 10R, and succeed in any promotion effect (promotion) When a successful performance is executed), it becomes definite that there is a round in which the second big prize opening C20 is long open in any of the following rounds (in this example, the second big prize opening is The rounds related to the opening of C20 are 4R, 8R, and 12R).

  The middle part of the figure is an example of a promotion success effect selection rate when a promotion effect occurs. The formula for calculating the promotion effect success selection rate is a formula as shown in the “promotion success effect selection rate calculation formula” in the figure. The selection rate of each jackpot symbol (1A, 2A, 3A) is the probability that the corresponding jackpot symbol is selected from among the jackpot symbols (1A, 2A, 3A) that can be promoted. Further, the promotion effect occurrence rate is a probability that any one of the promotion success effect and the promotion failure effect occurs in the special game related to the corresponding jackpot symbol. In addition, the numerical values used in deriving the promotion success production selection rate in this example are values as shown in “Numerical values in the calculation formula” in the figure. Further, the promotion success production selection rate and a specific calculation formula in this example are shown in “Derivation of promotion success production selection rate” in the figure. Here, the promotion success effect selection rate when the promotion effect occurs is, for example, when the promotion effect A occurs, the promotion effect being executed for the player is the promotion success effect A and the promotion failure effect A. Since it is recognized that either, in the special game execution related to the jackpot symbol (1A, 2A, 3A) where the promotion effect can occur, the selection success rate of the promotion success effect A and the promotion failure effect A, The ratio of the selection rate at which the promotion success effect A occurs is the promotion success effect selection rate at the time of the promotion effect A. As shown in the figure, the promotion success production selection rate at the time of promotion production (success expectation at the time of promotion production) is “promotion production C> promotion production B> promotion production A”. As the round in which the promotion effect is generated is the second half round in the special game, the expectation degree of the production success is increased. Of these jackpot symbols (1A, 2A, 3A), the jackpot symbol with a large number of rounds in which the second winning prize opening C20 is long open (in this example, 3A and the number of rounds = 2) Is configured so that the number of promotion effects that can be executed is reduced (in this example, the promotion success effect A is executed only once), this is an early round. This is because the significance of executing the production will be reduced unless the second grand prize opening C20 is informed that there is a long open round (the second big prize opening C20 is not even once). This is due to the fact that the player can recognize that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is definite at the time when the long round is executed). Further, the promotion effect may be configured to always occur in a specific round (in the present example, the second R, the sixth R, and the tenth R) unless a promotion success effect occurs. Good. In such a configuration, the distribution game execution round that is executed earliest after the promotion promotion effect is executed is a long open execution round (a round in which the second big prize opening C20 is long open). (For example, when the promotion success effect is executed at the 6th R, the long open execution round becomes the 8th R).

  The lower part of the figure is an image of promotion effect execution. This example illustrates a case where the promotion success effect is executed in the promotion effect A executed in the 2R of the special game related to the long open first half notification jackpot symbol (3A). Further, when the second grand prize opening C20 is opened long and the game ball enters the specific area C22 at the 4th R after the execution of the promotion promotion effect, the specific area entry effect is executed.

(Function)
Next, the effect | action in the example 3 of a change from 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated, referring FIG. First, the upper part of the figure illustrates from the winning of the 5A symbol on the first main game side to the probability varying gaming state until the probability varying gaming state is ended by the winning of the 2A symbol.

  First, in a non-stochastic game state, the player is making a left strike (adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30 and launching the game ball). At the timing of 1 in the figure, the special game of 16R is started by stopping the 5A symbol which is a big hit symbol on the first main game side. The special game related to the 5A symbol is a special game in which the second big prize opening C20 is long open. Next, at the timing of 2 in the drawing, in other words, at the 4th R of the special game related to the 5A symbol, the second big prize opening C20 is opened long, and the game ball enters the specific area C22. Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the special game related to the 5A symbol is finished, and the gaming state has entered the specific area C22 at the timing of 2 in the figure. At the same time, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to as the variation mode determination table (because it is the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game on the first main game side).

  After that, under the situation where the player is making a right strike (the game ball is launched by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area D30), the pattern on the second main game side The variation was repeated, and at the timing of 4 in the figure, the player performed a left strike (adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball and launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30) When the 2A symbol on the first main game side starts to fluctuate and the 2A symbol stops at the timing of 5 in the figure, the 16R special game is started and the probability variation gaming state is ended, and the limited frequency table is referred to. (The main game table 3 is referred to). Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the special game related to the 2A design is finished, and there is no game ball entering the specific area C22 during the special game (the second big prize opening C20 is all short-open). Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the special game is a non-probability variation gaming state, and the limited frequency table is not referred to.

  Next, the lower part of the figure illustrates a state in which, from the winning of the 5A symbol on the first main game side, the game moves to the probability variation gaming state and is won multiple times for the big hit on the second main game side.

  First, as in the upper part of the figure, at the timings 7 to 9 in the figure, the game is in a non-stochastic game state, and the player strikes left (the launch intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30). In the situation where the game ball is launched by adjusting the game), the special game is won, and during the special game, the game ball enters the specific area C22 and shifts to the probability variation state and the limited frequency table 2 Is referenced. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, the player is making a right strike (adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball and launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30) The 60-second variation related to the 7B symbol is started, and at the timing of 11 in the diagram, the special game of 16R is started because the 7B symbol is stopped and displayed. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, the special game related to the 7B symbol is finished, and the game ball has entered the specific area C22 during the special game. At the same time, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to (the limited frequency table referred to is the limited frequency table 1 because it is the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit on the second main game side).

  Next, at the timing of 13 in the figure, the 10-second fluctuation related to the 7B symbol is started again, and at the timing of 14 in the figure, the special game of 16R is started because the 7B symbol is stopped and displayed. The Next, at the timing of 15 in the figure, the special game related to the 7B symbol is finished, and the game ball has entered the specific area C22 during the special game. At the same time, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to (the limited frequency table referred to is the limited frequency table 1 because it is the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit on the second main game side). In this way, when a transition is made from a non-stochastic variation gaming state to a probability variation gaming state after a special game related to a big hit symbol on the first main game side (so-called first win), a limited frequency is set after the special game. Reference is made to Table 2 (a limited frequency table having the longest average variation time in the limited frequency table), and thereafter, after the special game related to the second main game side, the limited frequency table 1 after the special game. (A limited frequency table having the shortest average variation time in the limited frequency table) is referred to. By configuring in this way, in the probability variation gaming state after the first hit, if the probability variation gaming state ends without winning a big hit in the probability variation gaming state once, the probability variation gaming state is short. In the subsequent probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game related to the second main game side), the big hits are connected and the game ball is reduced. It is possible to create a new gameability that increases in a short time.

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment, in the game in the probability variation gaming state (and the time shortening gaming state) with a limited number of times, the main game When the number of symbol variations reaches a predetermined number, the variation mode (variation time) candidates to be selected are different (the limited frequency table to be referenced is different), and the production mode (production stage) is also different. It is configured as follows. In addition, the limited frequency table depends on whether the transition to the probability-variable gaming state with a limited number of times (and the time-saving gaming state) is a special game on the first main game side or a special game on the second main game side. By configuring the reference period and / or the type of the limited frequency table to be referred to and the effect mode (effect stage) to be different, it is possible to realize a game that does not get tired for the player.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment may be configured to execute a pre-reading effect. In such a configuration, for example, the probability variation is larger than that in the non-probability variation gaming state. The game state may be configured such that the frequency of occurrence of pre-reading effects is high, the pre-reading effects are likely to occur simultaneously, and there are many types of pre-reading effects that can occur simultaneously.

(Third embodiment)
In the second embodiment, a round in which the second grand prize opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened using a plurality of big prize openings (the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20); By setting a round in which the first grand prize opening C10 that does not have the specific area C22 is opened, a game ball enters the specific area C22 only in a predetermined round (to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game) The game is arranged to execute the allocation game), but the present invention is not limited to this, and even in a gaming machine having only one big winning opening, the allocation game is executed only in a predetermined round. It is possible to configure. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the special game control means MP30 measures a discharge waiting time which is a time for waiting for the game ball to be discharged after the opening of the special winning opening C30 is completed. A discharge waiting timer MP34t2 for counting, and a discharge ball counter MP33c2 for counting discharged balls.

  First, FIG. 101 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, only one grand prize opening C30 is provided, and the special prize opening C30 has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter (special). When a game ball enters the specific area C22 within a predetermined period during the game, it is determined that a transition to the probability variation game state is made after the special game is finished). Further, it is a member related to whether or not a game ball can enter the specific area C22. When the game ball is in the open state, the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22, and in the closed state, the game ball is in the specific area. Shielding member C22c (not shown in the figure, but when the specific area C22 is in the shape of the entrance, the valve member that covers the entrance is difficult to enter C22 (or not enterable) Such a member). As shown in the figure, a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the special winning opening C30, and flows down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area). It is configured that the game ball to be guided is difficult to be guided (however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down both may be easily guided).

  Next, FIG. 102 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1601-1, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the discharge ball abnormality flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1601-1, in other words, if the discharge ball is not abnormal, in step 1601-2, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the discharge standby timer MP34t2, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1601-2, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and executes the special game. Turn on the flag. Next, in step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930), and the process proceeds to step 1950 (third).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1950 (third). In the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission is not granted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910).

  Next, in step 1950 (third), the special game execution means MP33 executes round execution initial processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1613, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winning balls has been placed in the big winning opening C30 in the round. . If Yes in step 1613, the process proceeds to step 1627. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1613, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer), and a predetermined time for opening the big prize opening has elapsed (set release). It is determined whether or not the big prize opening by the pattern has ended). Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1627. In the case of No in step 1626, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1910).

  Next, in step 1627, the special game executing means MP33 stops driving the big prize opening electric combination C31d of the big prize opening C30 and closes the big prize opening C30 (to open and close the big prize opening electric combination C31d). Only during the period in which the solenoid is excited, the special winning opening C30 is configured to be opened). Next, in step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (especially an opening time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1640-1, the special game executing means MP33 sets a predetermined value (in this example, the game ball that has entered the big winning opening C30 is a specific area entrance sensor or an exit ball detection sensor in the discharge waiting timer MP34t2. (2540 ms, which is a sufficient time detected in step 1) is set and the process proceeds to step 1640-2. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1640-2 also in the case of No in step 1601-2.

  Next, in step 1640-2, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the discharge waiting timer MP34t2, and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in Step 1640-2, in Step 1640-3, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the currently executed round is a distribution game execution round (whether or not a game ball can enter the specific area C22, In this example, it is determined whether the second and fourth rounds. In the case of Yes in step 1640-3, in step 1640-4, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the currently executed round. In the case of Yes in Step 1640-4, in Step 1640-5, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and in Step 1642 Transition. Note that if the answer is No in step 1601-1, step 1640-3, or step 1640-4, the process proceeds to step 1642. If No in step 1640-2, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1910).

  Next, in step 1642, the special game execution means MP33 sends a game state command related to the current special game (for example, information related to the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning game balls, etc.) to the sub-main control unit. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930). Next, in step 1644-1, the special game executing means MP33 receives a winning ball counter MP33c (counts the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening) and a discharged ball counter MP33c2 {game discharged from the big winning mouth. The number of balls (for example, the number of game balls detected by the discharge ball detection sensor or the specific area entrance sensor) is referred to} to determine whether or not the number of wins and the number of discharges match. In the case of Yes in step 1644-1, in other words, if the discharge ball abnormality has not occurred, in step 1644-2, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, Turn off the discharge ball abnormality flag. Next, in step 1644-3, the special game executing means MP33 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1644-4, the special game executing means MP33 closes the shielding member C22c to end the opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1634.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1644-1, in other words, if a discharge ball abnormality has occurred, in step 1644-5, the special game execution means MP33 is in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. A certain discharge ball abnormality flag is turned on. Next, in step 1644-6, the special game execution means MP33 sends a command for sending a discharge ball abnormality command (a command related to information indicating that a discharge ball abnormality has occurred) to the sub-main control unit side. The trust buffer MT10 is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930), and the process proceeds to step 1634.

  Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1930). Then, in step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1910). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1910).

  Here, in the game state determination process after the end of the special game in step 1650, the game state after the end of the special game is determined according to the ON / OFF state of the main game probability change transition reservation flag. In this example, when the main game probability change reservation flag is on, a table that is referred to when determining the change mode by changing to the probability change game state (80 change) and the time shortening game state (80 change). However, it is decided to switch in the order of “limited frequency table 1 (30 fluctuations)” → “limited frequency table 2 (40 fluctuations)” → “limited frequency table 3 (10 fluctuations)” → “main game table 3”. On the other hand, when the main game probability change transition reservation flag is OFF, the table to be referred to when determining the change mode is changed to the non-probability change game state and the time shortening game state (50 change). It is decided to switch in the order of “A (50 fluctuations)” → “main game table 3”.

  Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the round execution initial process according to the subroutine of step 1950 of FIG. 102 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1952, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1952, that is, immediately before the start of each round, in step 1954, the special game execution means MP33 is executing the distribution game execution round (in this example, the second R · 4R). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the currently stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (3B, 5B, 7A, 7B in this example). . In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the special game execution means MP33 sets the distribution length release pattern (52ms open → 2600ms closed → 28800ms open → closed) as the open pattern of the big prize opening C30, and in step 1960 Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1956, in step 1962, the special game execution means MP33 sets the short distribution pattern (52 ms open → close) as the open pattern of the big winning opening C30, and proceeds to step 1960.

  Next, in Step 1960, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern A (52ms open → 2600ms closed → 31340ms open → 2000ms closed → 52ms open → closed) as the opening pattern of the shielding member C22c, and the process proceeds to Step 1970. To do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1954, in other words, in the case of a round (ordinary round) that is not a distribution game execution round, in step 1966, the special game execution means MP33 uses a normal release pattern ( 28800 ms open → closed) is set. Next, in step 1968, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern B (normally closed) as the opening pattern of the shielding member C22c, and the process proceeds to step 1970.

  In this way, in the distribution game execution round, when the big prize opening C30 is opened in the distribution length release pattern (that is, in the round assuming entry into the specific area C22), The total opening time of the big prize opening C30 in the distribution game execution round (in this example, 52 ms + 28800 ms = 28852 ms) is longer than the total opening time (28800 ms) of the big winning opening C30 in the normal round. It is comprised so that it may become. Further, in the distribution game execution round in which the winning prize opening C30 is opened with the distribution length releasing pattern, the total opening time of the winning prize opening C30 (28852 ms in this example) is the total closing time of the winning prize opening C30 ( In this example, the time is longer than 2600 ms. Further, in the round, the maximum value of the one-time opening time of the big prize opening C30 (28800 ms in this example) is longer than the maximum value of the closing time of the big prize opening C30 (in this example, 2600 ms). It is comprised so that it may become. With such a configuration, in the distribution game execution round, when the big prize opening C30 is opened with the distribution length release pattern (that is, in the round assuming entry into the specific area C22), the big prize opening This makes it easier to enter a game ball into C30. In addition, this example is only an example, and is not limited to this, such as the opening mode of the grand prize opening C30. For example, after performing a short opening operation of 52 ms during a certain distribution game execution round, You may comprise so that long opening (for example, 5000 ms opening) with easy entering may be performed several times.

  Next, in step 1970, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1972, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1974, the special game executing means MP33 drives the special prize opening electric accessory C31d of the special prize opening C30 to open the special prize opening C30, and a special game timer MP34t (especially an opening time timer) is set. Start and move to the next process (process of step 1613).

  Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 in FIG. 102 in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 1688 (third) and step 1690 (third), the purpose of which may be different in the number of times to be given to the player depending on the gaming state in the case of a big hit. It is configured as follows. In other words, if the main game probability change reservation flag is OFF in step 1680, in step 1688 (third), the special game control means MP50 executes the special game (special game immediately after the completion) is a time-reduced game. It is determined whether or not it is a special game related to the jackpot established in the state. In the case of Yes in step 1688 (third), in step 1690 (third), the specific game control means MP50 sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times) in the time reduction number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1688 (third), in step 1686, the specific game control means MP50 sets the predetermined number of times B (50 times) in the time reduction number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, and after the special game, the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are entered. If the main gaming symbol that triggered the transition of the special game is a time-reduced gaming state when the main gaming symbol is stopped (at the time of the big hit), the main gaming symbol that triggered the transition of the special game Compared to the case where the gaming state at the time of stoppage (at the time of big hit) is a non-time-reduced gaming state, a greater number of times are saved. In this example, if a big hit is made during the time-saving gaming state, even if the probability varying gaming state is not reached after the special game related to the big jacking is finished, if the big winning is achieved, the probability varying game after the special game ends. As a remedy for not transitioning to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game related to the jackpot in the gaming state that is supposed to transition to the state, the case of entering the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game Although it is configured to set the upper limit number of times of variation in the time-reduced gaming state of the same number (80 times in this example), it is not limited to this, and the special game related to the big hit in the non-time-reduced / non-stochastic variation gaming state More than the upper limit number of times of change in the time-reduced gaming state (50 in this example) in the case where the transition to the probability-variable gaming state is not made after completion, the transition to the probability-changing gaming state The number of times of change (for example, 70 times) less than the upper limit number of times in the time-reduced gaming state (80 in this example) can be set as the upper limit number of times of change in the time-reduced gaming state as a remedy measure. May be.

  Next, FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is about step 2050 (third), and its purpose is to execute error notification. That is, in step 2050 (third), the effect display control means SM20 is an error notification (for example, notification by voice, screen, illumination lamp, etc.) when an abnormal discharge ball command is received from the main side. The process proceeds to step 2100.

  Next, FIG. 106 is an operation diagram related to the special game (particularly, a timing chart relating to the opening of the special winning opening in the normal round) in the third embodiment. In this example, the operation from the start of the third round (ordinary round) to the start of the fourth round (distribution round) during the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7A” will be described.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, with the start of the third round of the special game, the big winning opening C30 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (28800 ms opening → closing), and the big winning opening C30 The winning validity period (and the discharged ball detection period) is started (valid). Further, since the third round is not a sorting round, the shielding member C22c is not opened, and the specific area C22 is not effective.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the opening of the special winning opening C30 has ended (for example, the completion of a predetermined opening pattern or the completion of a predetermined number of 10 balls in the special winning opening). Thus, the special winning opening C30 is closed. In addition, in order to wait for the detection (and discharge) of the game ball remaining in the special winning opening C30 for a predetermined period after the closing of the special winning opening C30 (and the closing period which is a period until the special winning opening is completely closed). In addition, the winning validity period (and the discharge ball detection period) to the big winning opening C30 continues.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, a sufficient period (1700 ms in this example) has passed after the winning prize opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period) in which the winning of the game ball in the winning prize opening C30 is detected. As a result, the winning validity period for the special winning opening C30 ends (becomes invalid).

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, a sufficient period (1700 + 700 ms in this example) elapses after the winning prize opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period) in which the discharge of game balls in the big winning opening C30 is detected. As a result, the presence or absence of abnormal discharge balls (whether the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls are different) is determined. Here, in this example, since the discharge ball abnormality is not detected, the discharge ball detection period ends. When an abnormal discharge ball is detected, the discharge ball detection period is extended until recovery from the abnormal discharge ball (for example, the number of winning balls = the number of discharged balls or when the power is turned on again).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the preparation period for starting the next round (fourth round) has elapsed since the discharge ball detection period has ended (the discharge ball abnormality has not been detected). The fourth round will be started as an opportunity. The preparation period for the start of the next round is “preparation period when no discharge ball abnormality is detected” ≧ “preparation period when discharge ball abnormality is detected” {eg, when no abnormality is detected: 60 ms, when abnormality is detected : 4 ms (time for one interrupt)} (because when a discharge ball abnormality is detected, processing related to preparation for the next round can be executed during the extended discharge ball detection period).

  Next, FIG. 107 is an action diagram related to special games (particularly, a timing chart related to “long opening” of the big winning opening in the distribution round) in the third embodiment. In this example, the operation from the start of the second round (distribution round) to the start of the third round (normal round) during the special game related to the big hit symbol “7A” will be described.

  First, the upper part of the figure is a timing chart when the discharge ball abnormality is not detected. In the timing of 1 in the figure, with the start of the second round of the special game, the big prize opening C30 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms opening → 2600 ms closing → 28800 ms opening → closing) The winning validity period (and the discharge ball detection period) to the winning opening C30 is started (valid). In addition, since the second round is a sorting round, the shielding member C22c is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms opening → 2600 ms closing → 31340 ms opening → 2000 ms closing → 52 ms opening → closing) and to the specific area C22. The entry valid period of is started.

  Next, until the timings 2 to 3 in the figure, the special winning opening C30 and the shielding member C22c are temporarily closed according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening C30 and the shielding member C22c. In addition, during the said temporary closing period, it comprised so that the winning effective period to the big winning opening C30 and the winning effective period to the specific area | region C22 may continue (it becomes effective), but it is an example to the last and it is limited to this. For example, during the temporary closing of the big winning opening C30 (and the shielding member C22c) {or the passage of a predetermined period (for example, 1700 ms for waiting for winning or 1700 + 700 ms for waiting for discharging) since the start of the temporary closing “After” means that the winning in the big winning opening C30 and the entering into the specific area C22 are invalid (they do not give the right to transition to the winning ball or the probability variation gaming state, and are counted as the number of winnings and the number of winnings. ).

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the opening of the special winning opening C30 is ended (for example, the completion of a predetermined opening pattern or the completion of a predetermined number of 10 balls in the special winning opening). Thus, the special winning opening C30 is closed. In addition, in order to wait for the detection (and discharge) of the game ball remaining in the special winning opening C30 for a predetermined period after the closing of the special winning opening C30 (and the closing period which is a period until the special winning opening is completely closed). In addition, the winning effective period (and the discharged ball detecting period, the winning effective period to the specific area C22) to the big winning opening C30 continues.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, a sufficient period (in this example, 1700 ms) for detecting the winning of the game ball in the big prize opening C30 has elapsed after the big prize opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period). As a result, the winning validity period for the special winning opening C30 ends (becomes invalid).

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, after the prize winning opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period), the discharge of the game balls in the prize winning opening C30 (and the entry into the specific area C22) is sufficiently detected. When the period (1700 + 700 ms in this example) has passed (or according to a predetermined opening pattern), the shielding member C22c is closed (and the subsequent opening pattern is stopped), and the entry into the specific area C22 is effective. At the end of the period, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal discharge ball (whether the number of winning balls is different from the number of discharged balls).

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the preparation period for starting the next round (third round) has elapsed since the discharge ball detection period has ended (the discharge ball abnormality has not been detected). As a trigger, the third round will be started.

  Next, the lower part of the figure is a timing chart when the discharge ball abnormality is detected. Here, the operation from the lower stage 1 to 5 in the figure is the same as the operation from 1 to 5 in the upper stage in the figure, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, at the timing of a in the figure, after the big winning opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period), the discharge of the gaming balls in the big winning opening C30 (and the entering into the specific area C22) is sufficiently detected. When the period (in this example, 1700 + 700 ms) has elapsed (or according to a predetermined opening pattern), the shielding member C22c is closed, and the ball entry valid period to the specific area C22 ends, and the discharge ball abnormality The presence / absence (whether the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls is different) is determined. Here, since an abnormal discharge ball is detected, the discharge ball detection period is extended.

  Next, at a timing from b to c in the figure, the shielding member C22c is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern. Note that the opening of the shielding member C22c is intended to eliminate the clogging of the balls, and it is supplemented that the ball entering the specific area C22 is invalid.

  Next, in this example, the case where the discharge ball abnormality is recovered at the timing d in the figure is illustrated, and the discharge ball abnormality is recovered (return from the discharge ball abnormality) at the same timing. The detection period ends. In addition, during the discharge ball abnormality of a to d in the figure, as soon as the discharge ball abnormality is recovered, the shielding member C22c is closed (predetermined opening pattern is stopped) and the discharge ball detection period is ended, and a preparation period (for example, 4 ms) will be started.

  Next, at the timing e in the figure, after the discharge ball detection period ends (the discharge ball abnormality is not detected), a preparation period for starting the next round (third round) (in this example, Since the discharge ball abnormality is detected, the third round is started when 4 ms) elapses.

  Next, FIG. 108 is an action diagram (particularly, a timing chart relating to “short opening” of the big winning opening in the distribution round) according to the third embodiment in the third embodiment. In this example, the operation from the start of the second round (distribution round) to the start of the third round (normal round) during the special game related to the big hit symbol “4A” will be described.

  First, the upper part of the figure is a timing chart when the discharge ball abnormality is not detected. At the timing of 1 in the figure, triggered by the start of the second round of the special game, the big prize opening C30 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms open → closed), and the big prize opening C30 is won. An effective period (and a discharge ball detection period) starts (becomes valid). In addition, since the second round is a sorting round, the shielding member C22c is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms opening → 2600 ms closing → 31340 ms opening → 2000 ms closing → 52 ms opening → closing) and to the specific area C22. The entry valid period of is started.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the opening of the special winning opening C30 has ended (for example, the completion of a predetermined opening pattern or the completion of a predetermined number of 10 balls in the special winning opening). Thus, the special winning opening C30 is closed. In addition, in order to wait for the detection (and discharge) of the game ball remaining in the special winning opening C30 for a predetermined period after the closing of the special winning opening C30 (and the closing period which is a period until the special winning opening is completely closed). In addition, the winning effective period (and the discharged ball detecting period, the winning effective period to the specific area C22) to the big winning opening C30 continues.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, a sufficient period (1700 ms in this example) has passed after the winning prize opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period) in which the winning of the game ball in the winning prize opening C30 is detected. As a result, the winning validity period for the special winning opening C30 ends (becomes invalid).

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, after the big winning opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period), the discharge of the gaming balls in the big winning opening C30 (and the entering into the specific area C22) is sufficiently detected. When the period (in this example, 1700 + 700 ms) has elapsed, the shielding member C22c is stopped from the subsequent opening pattern, the entry valid period to the specific area C22 ends, and whether there is an abnormal discharge ball (winning ball) Whether or not the number of the discharged balls is different from the number of discharged balls).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the preparation period for starting the next round (third round) has elapsed since the discharge ball detection period has ended (the discharge ball abnormality has not been detected). As a trigger, the third round will be started.

  Next, the lower part of the figure is a timing chart when the discharge ball abnormality is detected. Here, the operation from the lower stage 1 to 3 in the figure is the same as the operation from 1 to 3 in the upper part of the figure, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, at the timing of a in the figure, after the big winning opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period), the discharge of the gaming balls in the big winning opening C30 (and the entering into the specific area C22) is sufficiently detected. When the period (1700 + 700 ms in this example) has passed, the valid entry period for the specific area C22 ends, and whether or not there is an abnormal discharge ball (whether the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls is different) Here, since the discharge ball abnormality is detected, the discharge ball detection period is extended, and the opening based on the opening pattern of the shielding member C22c is also continued.

  Next, at a timing from b to c in the figure, the shielding member C22c is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern. Note that the opening of the shielding member C22c is intended to eliminate the clogging of the balls, and it is supplemented that the ball entering the specific area C22 is invalid.

  Next, in this example, the case where the discharge ball abnormality is recovered at the timing d in the figure is illustrated, and the discharge ball abnormality is recovered (return from the discharge ball abnormality) at the same timing. The detection period ends. In addition, during the discharge ball abnormality of a to d in the figure, as soon as the discharge ball abnormality is recovered, the shielding member C22c is closed (predetermined opening pattern is stopped) and the discharge ball detection period is ended, and a preparation period (for example, 4 ms) will be started.

  Next, at the timing e in the figure, after the discharge ball detection period ends (the discharge ball abnormality is not detected), a preparation period for starting the next round (third round) (in this example, Since the discharge ball abnormality is detected, the third round is started when 4 ms) elapses.

  With the configuration as described above, even in a gaming machine according to the third embodiment that has only one big prize opening, it is possible to go to a specific area provided in the big prize opening by a big hit symbol (and a round to be executed). A special game for each jackpot symbol by configuring the driving pattern of the shielding member that restricts the entry of the game (for example, the drive pattern that allows a game ball to enter a specific area and the closed pattern when it cannot be entered). It is possible to set whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end. In addition, by reducing the number of special winning openings, the number of members is reduced, and the production cost of the gaming machine is also reduced. In addition, regardless of the jackpot symbol, in the predetermined round (in this example, the second round and the fourth round), it is configured to drive the shielding member in a predetermined opening pattern, so that the configuration of the game can be secured. It becomes.

  In this example, in the sorting game execution round, the shielding member C22c performs an opening operation in a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms opening → 2600 ms closing → 28800 ms opening → closing) regardless of the big hit symbol, and the winning prize opening is opened. When a predetermined time elapses from the end, execution of the predetermined opening pattern is stopped and the shielding member C22c is closed, so that it is easy to enter the specific area C22 when the big winning opening is short open and long open. It is configured to have different characteristics (difficult to enter when short open, easy to enter when long open), but is not limited to this. (1) Depending on the big hit symbol, the opening pattern of the shielding member C22c is changed to “long opening: 31340 ms opening → “Chain” and “Short Open: 52 ms open → Closed (the opening of the big prize opening and the opening of the shielding member are simultaneous, and the game ball that has entered the big winning opening is 52 ms or more to reach the shielding member) (2) Depending on the big hit symbol, the opening pattern of the shielding member C22c is set to “long open: 31340 ms open → closed”. ”And“ always closed ”, or (3) in accordance with the jackpot symbol, the entry into the specific area C22 is valid, the entry is invalid (the right to transition to the probability variation gaming state is not granted, The number of balls to be discharged may be determined).

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, in the distribution game non-execution round (normal round), it is configured so that the game ball cannot enter the specific area by always closing the shielding member. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The same effect as in the third embodiment can also be obtained by driving the shielding member with an open pattern in which it is difficult to enter the specific area. Accordingly, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the round execution initial process according to the subroutine of Step 1950 in FIG. 102 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are about Step 1966 (Third Modification 1) and Step 1968 (Third Modification 1), and the purpose is to change the shielding member C22c in the non-execution round (ordinary round). The game ball is driven in an opening pattern in which it is difficult to enter the specific area C22. That is, in the case of No in step 1954, in other words, in the case where the round is a non-execution round for distribution games (rounds other than the second R and fourth R), in step 1966 (third variation 1), special game execution means The MP 33 sets a normal opening pattern (52 ms opening → 2600 ms closing → 28800 ms opening → closing) as the opening pattern of the special winning opening C30. Next, in step 1968 (third variation 1), the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern C (52 ms open → closed) as the opening pattern of the shielding member C22c, and the process proceeds to step 1970.

  Next, FIG. 110 is an operation diagram related to special games (particularly, a timing chart related to opening of a big winning opening in a normal round) in the first modification from the third embodiment. In this example, the operation from the start of the third round (ordinary round) to the start of the fourth round (distribution round) during the special game related to the jackpot symbol “7A” will be described.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, with the start of the third round of the special game, the special winning opening C30 is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms opening → 2600 ms closing → 28800 ms opening → closing). The winning validity period (and the discharge ball detection period) to the special winning opening C30 is started (valid). In addition, although the third round is not a sorting round, the shielding member C22c is opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms opening → closing), and a ball entering effective period into the specific area C22 is started.

  Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening C30, the special winning opening C30 is temporarily closed until the timing 3 in the figure. Further, the shielding member C22c is closed according to the opening pattern of the shielding member C22c.

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the opening of the special winning opening C30 is ended (for example, the completion of a predetermined opening pattern or the completion of a predetermined number of 10 balls in the special winning opening). Thus, the special winning opening C30 is closed. In addition, in order to wait for the detection (and discharge) of the game ball remaining in the special winning opening C30 for a predetermined period after the closing of the special winning opening C30 (and the closing period which is a period until the special winning opening is completely closed). In addition, the winning effective period (and the discharged ball detecting period, the winning effective period to the specific area C22) to the big winning opening C30 continues.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, a sufficient period (in this example, 1700 ms) for detecting the winning of the game ball in the big prize opening C30 has elapsed after the big prize opening C30 is closed (and during the closing period). As a result, the winning validity period for the special winning opening C30 ends (becomes invalid).

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, when a sufficient period (1700 + 700 ms in this example) for detecting the discharge of game balls in the big prize opening C30 has elapsed after the big prize opening C30 is closed, Whether or not there is an abnormal discharge ball (whether or not the number of winning balls and the number of discharged balls is different) is determined, and the effective period of entering the specific area C22 ends. Here, in this example, since the discharge ball abnormality is not detected, the discharge ball detection period ends. When an abnormal discharge ball is detected, the discharge ball detection period is extended until recovery from the abnormal discharge ball (for example, the number of winning balls = the number of discharged balls or when the power is turned on again). Further, in this example, it is configured that the entry into the specific area C22 is valid until a predetermined period after the end of the opening of the grand prize opening C30 (and the closing period), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined period (for example, 1700 + 700 ms, which is a sufficient period for detecting a ball entering the specific region C22) has elapsed from the end of opening (and closing period) of the shielding member C22c, You may comprise so that the subsequent entrance into specific area C22 may be made invalid.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the preparation period for starting the next round (fourth round) has elapsed since the discharge ball detection period has ended (the discharge ball abnormality has not been detected). The fourth round will be started as an opportunity.

  By changing as described above, in the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment, the game ball can easily enter the specific area as the opening pattern of the shielding member provided in the big winning opening. It has an opening pattern (opening pattern A) and a short opening pattern (opening pattern C) in which a game ball is difficult to enter in a specific area. Since the opening pattern and the short opening pattern are the same operation, even when the shielding member is driven with the short opening pattern, the big winning opening and the shielding member are driven with the long opening pattern (expectation of profits for the player). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and improve the fun of the game. In this example, the winning opening C30 is configured to be opened according to a predetermined opening pattern (52 ms opening → 2600 ms closing → 28800 ms opening → closing), but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that the opening | mouth C30 can be opened according to the opening pattern (28800ms opening-> closing) which opens only once. In this case, since the entrance of the special winning opening C30 is not assumed to enter the specific area C22, even if a game ball enters during the release period, the game ball does not enter the specific area C22. The opening mode of the shielding member C22c and the internal structure of the big prize opening (for example, a game ball that has entered the big prize opening C30 takes 52 ms or more before reaching the shielding member C22c that shields the entry into the specific area C22. It is preferable to adopt a configuration having a required flow path.

  The above embodiment and modification examples are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the big hit symbol (or the big hit on the first main game side or the big hit on the second main game side) You may comprise so that the round (distribution round) which performs a split game may be determined. For example, in the case of a big hit on the first main game side, the distribution game may be executed in the sixth round, and in the case of a big hit on the second main game side, the distribution game may be executed in the fourth round. In the case of a big hit on the first main game side, the minimum execution round number in the special game is 6 rounds, and in the case of a big hit on the second main game side, the minimum execution round number in the special game is 4 rounds (that is, rounds). (The distribution game is executed in rounds equal to or less than the minimum number of rounds displayed on the number indicator lamp), and the distribution game can be executed in any big hit.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and a special game execution round may be provided in which the special winning opening (and the specific area C22) is opened only for a very short time (for example, 52 ms). (In this case, since it is not assumed that the ball enters the specific area C22 in the round, the shielding member C22c prevents the game ball from entering the specific area C22 even if the game ball enters during the opening period. It is preferable to have an open mode and a configuration inside the special winning opening). In addition, in such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to obtain a ball in the opening for a very short time, so on the effect display device SG, “From the actual number of special game rounds, “The number of rounds that will be opened for a very short period of time” can be notified that a round that makes it easy to win a ball will be executed {for example, winning a ball scheduled to be executed during the special game The image of balls for the number of easy rounds is displayed, and each time the easy round acquisition easy round starts (or ends), the display mode changes (or the display disappears). May be. Moreover, it is not limited to this, You may comprise so that the round which was already performed during the special game and can acquire the game easily can be displayed on the production display device SG. By configuring in this way, the player can visually recognize how many rounds in which a game can be obtained have been executed. In addition, during the special game, it is not necessary to perform the round notification that makes it easy to acquire the scheduled ball or the round that facilitates the execution of the executed ball in every special game. It may be configured to be executed only during a special game at the time of (a jackpot won in a non-stochastic game state and a time-reduced game state), or according to a special game related to the first main game side and a second main game side Whether or not the special game is executed may be different.

  In addition, in the third embodiment and the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the mode in which only one big prize opening is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a specific area | region (and shielding member) may be provided also in a (or several) special winning opening. In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the execution mode of the special game by changing the ease of entering the respective winning holes, the number of winning balls, and the like.

  In addition, in the third embodiment and the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the so-called tamasei type gaming machine has been described. However, in these examples, the big winning opening and the opening mode of the shielding member (and the specific area) are described. The concept is related to certain benefits (especially points other than the prize ball, such as the right to transition to special games, the right to perform a subsequent round, time reduction, etc.) by entering a specific area in the special winning opening The right to transition to the gaming state and / or the probability variation gaming state (or the number of continuous upper limit fluctuations in the short time / probability variation state), and other predetermined gaming states (for example, variation modes and / or effects of the main gaming symbol and the auxiliary gaming symbol) , Etc.) (for example, conventional two types of gaming machines and one type of one type small per game development type). Also suitable for It can keep supplement that it is.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the present embodiment, in the game in the probability variation game state (and time-reduced game state) with a limited number of times, the variation mode that is selected when the number of variations of the main game symbol has reached a predetermined number (Variation time) candidates are configured to be different (switched), but such a configuration is also applied to a gaming machine having a configuration different from the present embodiment (such as a configuration of a big prize opening). Is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. In the present embodiment, the first prize winning opening C10 and the second second winning prize opening C20 are two in the present embodiment. However, in the fourth embodiment, the normal winning prize opening C10 and the distribution winning prize opening. Two with C20.

  First, FIG. 111 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) The game ball flowing down is configured to be difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10 (but not limited to this, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) It may be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Next, in the fourth embodiment, the distribution winning prize opening C20 and the normal winning prize are located at the lower right side of the gaming area D30 (based on the center of the gaming area) and at the upper right position of the second main game starting opening B10. A mouth C10 is provided. In the fourth embodiment, the distribution big prize opening C20 and the normal big prize opening C10 are provided close to each other in the vertical direction (as viewed from the player), and the distribution big prize opening C20 is the normal big prize opening. Located above C10 (viewed by the player). Hereinafter, the distribution big prize opening C20 and the normal big prize opening C10 will be described in detail.

  First, with reference to FIG. 112, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game ball launched during the special game enters the big prize opening (the distribution big prize opening C20 or the normal big prize opening C10). Will be explained.

  FIG. 4A shows a state where a game ball enters the distribution prize winning opening C20, and FIG. 5B shows a state where a game ball enters the normal prize winning opening C10. As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, when a player launches a game ball toward the right side of the game board (viewed by the player) during execution of a special game, the game that has been launched The ball enters the game ball guide rail D50, which is wider than one game ball and narrower than two game balls, through the entrance of the game ball guide rail D50. Thereafter, the game balls released from the exit of the game ball guide rail D50 flow down toward the big prize opening (the distribution big prize opening C20 or the normal big prize opening C10). As a result, as shown in (a) of the figure, when the allocation big prize opening C20 is open, the player enters the allocation big prize opening C20, and as shown in (b) of the figure. In addition, when the normal big prize opening C10 is open, the normal big prize opening C10 is entered.

  Here, when the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is continuously fired (when the firing handle is continuously twisted), it is also referred to as a predetermined firing interval (“launch speed”. In this example, 100 per minute. The game ball is fired at the departure. Under such a configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, following the opening of the distribution winning prize opening C20, the opening of the normal winning opening C10 (or following the opening of the normal winning opening C10). In the case where the distribution big prize opening C20 is opened), the closing time of both big prize openings (the time until one big prize opening is closed and the other big prize opening is opened) is the predetermined value. It is set shorter than the firing interval. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a useless ball that does not win any of the big winning ports due to the closing time of both big winning ports.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the structure of the distribution big prize opening C20 and the normal big prize opening C10 will be described in detail. First, the distribution prize winning opening C20 is generally provided with a distribution winning detection device C21s, a specific area C22, a shielding member C22a, a specific area entrance detection device C22s, and a discharge ball detection device C33. In general, the normal winning opening C10 is provided with a normal winning detection device C11s. Hereinafter, the structure of these special winning openings will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 113, the distribution winning prize opening C20 is in an open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape and is located above the normal winning opening C10 (as viewed from the player). As a specific configuration, the distribution prize winning opening C20 includes a distribution winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a distribution electric accessory C21d, a specific area C22, and a specific area C22. A shielding member C22a that shields the entrance of the game ball, a specific area entrance detection device C22s for detecting the entrance of the game ball to the specific area, an exit ball detection apparatus C33 for detecting the exit ball, Is provided. Here, the distribution winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects a game ball entering the distribution large winning opening C20, and generates the distribution large winning opening entering information indicating the entering at the time of entering the ball. . The distribution electric accessory C21d changes the distribution large prize opening C20 to the distribution large prize opening C20 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. The specific area C22 becomes a determinant of the gaming state after the end of the special game depending on whether or not a game ball has entered. When the shielding member C22a is in the open state (retracted state), the game area has entered the specific area C22. It becomes possible (or easy), and when the shielding member C22a is in the closed state (advanced state), it is configured such that it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the specific area C22. The specific area entry detection device C22s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the specific area C22, and generates specific area entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. In addition, since the game ball that has entered the distribution winning prize opening C20 is configured to pass either the specific area entrance detection device C22s or the discharge ball detection apparatus C33, The ball detection device C22s also serves as a sensor that detects the discharged ball (when the ball enters the ball, the generated ball ball information is also generated). The discharged ball detection device C33 is a sensor that detects a game ball that has been discharged without entering the specific area C22 after entering the large allocation prize opening C20. Is generated. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and an open state where the game ball is easy to win (an inclined type attacker). However, it is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the normal prize winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located below the major winning opening C20 (as viewed from the player). As a specific configuration, the normal prize opening C10 includes a normal winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a normal electric accessory C11d. Here, the normal winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the normal big winning opening C10, and generates normal big winning opening entry information indicating the winning at the time of winning. The normal electric accessory C11d changes the normal big prize opening C10 to a normal state where the game ball cannot win or difficult to win in the normal big prize opening C10 and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win, and an open state where the game ball is easy to win (an inclined type attacker). However, it is not limited to this. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  The section of the distribution winning detection device C21s, the distribution flow path C32, the specific area entrance detection device C22s, the discharge ball detection device C33, the normal winning detection device C11s, and the normal flow path C31 perpendicular to the direction of the game ball flow. As for the cross-sectional area, it is desirable that one game ball can pass smoothly but two game balls cannot pass (or difficult). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce a situation in which a plurality of game balls are clogged in the flow paths (the distribution flow path C32 and the normal flow path C31) and cannot flow down.

  In addition, since the two big winning entrances are close to each other, even in a situation where either the distribution big winning opening C20 or the normal big winning opening C10 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, Since it is sufficient to aim, a game can be performed without changing the launch strength of the game ball. In this case, since the player can easily see which big winning opening is easy to enter, it is possible to execute a game with less discomfort and burden on the player.

  Further, as will be described later, by placing the allocation big prize opening C20, which is largely related to the profit of the player, whether or not to enter the ball above the normal big prize opening C10, a game ball is caught in the normal big prize opening C10, etc. Even when the accident is not closed (usually when the flow of the game ball below the big prize opening C10 is blocked), the game ball can be entered if the distribution big prize opening C20 is opened. In this example, since the specific area C22 and the specific area entrance detection device C22s (discharged ball detection device C33) are provided below the distribution winning detection device C21s, the distribution big winning opening C20 is set to the normal prize winning. The space provided on the mouth C10 saves space.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the flow-down mode of the game balls that have entered the big prize opening (the distribution big prize opening C20 and the normal big prize opening C10) according to the fourth embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, the game ball that has entered the distribution prize winning opening C20 passes through the distribution prize detection device C21s, flows down the distribution channel C32, and the specific region entrance detection device C22s provided in the specific region C22. Either one of the discharged ball detection devices C33 is passed. When the shielding member C22a is in a closed state (advanced state), the game balls that have flowed down cannot pass through the specific area entrance detection device C22s, and all pass through the discharge ball detection device C33. On the other hand, when the shielding member C22a is in the open state (retracted state), the game ball that has flowed down substantially passes through the specific area entrance detection device C22s due to the shape of the distribution channel C32. When the shielding member C22a is in an open state (retracted state), it is desirable that all the game balls that have flowed down pass through the specific area entrance detection device C22s (in order not to impair the player's profit). Therefore, it is preferable to configure the shape of the distribution channel C32 (particularly, the shape of the right side surface of the distribution channel) so that the game balls that have flowed down can easily pass through the specific area entrance detection device C22s. As will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the sum of the number of game balls that have passed the specific area entrance detection device C22s or the discharge ball detection device C33 and the number of game balls that have passed the allocation prize detection device C21s. Whether or not the ball is abnormal is determined by whether or not is equal.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the normal prize winning opening C10 passes through the normal winning detection device C11s, flows down through the normal flow path C31, and is discharged. Note that a device for detecting the discharge ball is not provided in the normal prize winning opening C10.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117, an operation pattern of each member (distribution large prize opening C20, normal special prize opening C10, and shielding member C22a) during a special game will be described. Here, these figures exemplify a case where a discharge ball abnormality is not detected and a case where a discharge ball abnormality is detected in the fourth round of the special game according to the 7A symbol in the fourth embodiment. In addition, the opening aspect of the distribution big prize opening C20 in the fourth round at the time of the special game related to the 7A symbol is the long opening B, and the opening aspect of the normal big winning opening C10 in the fifth round is the long opening B (opening). Details of the embodiment will be described later).

  First, FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the fourth round of the special game related to the 7A symbol is started, and the sorting prize winning opening C20 and the shielding member C22a are simultaneously opened (52 ms open). At this timing, the game ball has not yet entered the distribution big prize opening C20.

  Next, FIG. 114 (b) shows a state in which a predetermined time A (52 ms in this example) has elapsed from the timing of (a), and the large allocation prize opening C20 and the shielding member C22a are simultaneously closed. The predetermined time A (52 ms in this example) is a very short time as the opening time of the high allocation prize opening C20, so the game ball still enters the high allocation prize opening C20 at this timing. Not.

  Next, in FIG. 115 (c), a predetermined time B (3000 ms in this example) has elapsed from the timing of (b), and after the large allocation prize opening C20 and the shielding member C22a are simultaneously opened again, the game ball is swung. This indicates a state where the player has entered the minute prize winning opening C20 (when the opening of the prize winning opening is not completed due to a predetermined number of balls entering the prize winning opening, the opening time of the distribution prize winning opening C20 is 28000 ms, which is blocked. The opening time of the member C22a is 32552 ms). The game ball that has passed through the distribution winning detection device C21s and has reached the shielding member C22a enters the specific area C22 and is detected by the specific area entrance detection device C22s.

  Next, FIG. 115 (d) shows a state in which the opening period of the allocation big prize opening C20 has ended and the distribution big prize opening C20 is closed. Note that the game ball remains inside the sorting prize winning slot C20. Further, the shielding member C22a remains open.

  Next, FIG. 116 (e) shows that a predetermined time B (in this example, 200 ms) has elapsed from the end of the opening period of the distribution winning prize opening C20, the eighth round is started, and the normal winning opening C10 is opened. Represents the state. Note that the game ball remains inside the sorting prize winning slot C20. Further, the shielding member C22a remains open.

  Next, FIG. 116 (f) shows a state in which the driving of the shielding member C22a is completed because the shielding member C22a is closed and the discharge ball abnormality is not detected at the timing after (e). Normally, the special winning opening C10 remains open.

  Next, in FIG. 117 (g), at the timing after (e), when the shielding member C22a is closed, the game ball remaining inside the sorting prize winning opening C20 is sandwiched between the shielding member C22a. The state which has stopped in the distribution channel C32 is represented. As a result, the discharge ball abnormality is detected. Normally, the special winning opening C10 remains open.

  Next, in FIG. 117 (h), since the discharge ball abnormality is detected at the timing after (g), the driving of the shielding member C22a is continued, and the shielding member C22a is opened again (short opening of 52 ms). Represents a state. When the shielding member C22a is opened, the game ball sandwiched between the shielding members C22a and stopped in the distribution channel C32 is discharged, and the discharged ball abnormality is eliminated. Normally, the special winning opening C10 remains open.

  Next, FIG. 118 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 4002 and resets the power supply unit E (RAM clear). Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed intentionally by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 4002, in step 4004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 4006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 4018. On the other hand, if No in step 4002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 4008 (for example, the checksum recorded during power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 4010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is correctly backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 4010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the processing proceeds to step 4004 (RAM clear processing described above). On the other hand, if NO in step 4010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M transmits various information commands to the sub-main control unit SM side in step 4012 (transmits at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later). Next, in step 4015, the main control board M resets the distribution winning prize counter MP36c and the discharge number counter MP35c, and proceeds to step 4018. In this process, by resetting the distribution winning prize counter value and the discharge number counter value, it is possible to recover from the discharge ball abnormality. Next, in step 4018, the main control board M is triggered by a hardware interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side indicated by step 1000 in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, step 1000 in the figure is executed), and the process proceeds to step 4020. . After shifting to step 4020, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. In other words, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later, in step 1100 when the scheduled interrupt period T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 1.5 ms). Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 2000 (fourth), the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 2100 (fourth), the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 3997, the main control board M causes the prize ball payout control board KH to execute a prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout mechanism, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won, Process for managing the above. Next, in step 3998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.) (game related information, discharge ball abnormality information, fraud detection command, etc.). Send). Next, in step 3999, the main control board M transmits a control command transmission process (the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side, and the sub-main control unit SM side performs an effect according to the command. To return to the process that was being executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (NMI interrupt in this example), in step 4604, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 4606, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 119 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 118 in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart. The difference from this embodiment is step 1411-1 (fourth), step 1450 (fourth), and step 1570 (fourth). That is, in step 1410-2, a stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined. Thereafter, in step 1411-1 (fourth), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and determines the variation mode with reference to the limited frequency flag (the limited frequency table). Is turned on in step 3864 or 3866), it is determined whether or not the flag is on. The limited frequency flag is a limited frequency flag after the first main game and a limited frequency flag after the second main game. In the case of Yes at step 1411-1 (fourth), at step 1450 (fourth), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 executes a limited frequency variation mode determining process described later, and proceeds to step 1413. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411-1 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1412.

  In addition, after the specific game end determination process is executed in step 1500, in step 1570 (fourth), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 executes a limited frequency end determination process, which will be described later, and performs the next process (step 2000). The process proceeds to (1).

  Next, FIG. 120 is a main game table configuration diagram according to the fourth embodiment. The feature that is different from the present embodiment is the type of stop symbol at the time of big hit and the distribution of the number of rounds. When the lottery table for determining the first main game stop symbol is referred to, the distribution game execution round is short. Both the open special game and the distributed game execution round can be executed with the long open special game, whereas when the second main game stop symbol determination lottery table is referred to, the distributed game execution round However, only special games with a long opening can be executed. In the probability variation gaming state, the game will proceed by repeating the symbol variation on the second main game side. However, the probability variation gaming state is determined by the completion of the specified number of symbol variations after the end of the special game. Since the game ends (so-called ST), the game is such that the probability variation gaming state continues as long as the big main game side is a big hit by the specified number of times that the probability variation gaming state ends. ing. In the main game table 3 in the fourth embodiment, during the non-time-reduced game state (in the so-called non-electric support state), the change mode is selected according to the number of suspensions when determining the change mode on the first main game side. The candidates and / or selection probabilities are different, and when the variation mode on the second main game side is determined, the variation mode selection candidates and the selection probabilities are the same regardless of the number of holds, and during the time-reduced gaming state (so-called electric In the support state) and in the non-limited frequency state (when the limited frequency table is not referred to), when determining the variation mode on the first main game side, the variation mode selection candidates and the selection probabilities regardless of the number of holds Are the same, and when the variation mode on the second main game side is determined, the selection candidate and / or selection probability of the variation mode differs depending on the number of holdings, while in the time-reduced gaming state (so-called electric support state) And limited frequency state In this case (when referring to the limited frequency table), when the variation mode on the first main game side and the second main game side is determined, the selection candidate and the selection probability of the variation mode are the same regardless of the number of holds. It is preferable to configure so that

  Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (fourth) in FIG. 119 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 1452, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and after the first main game limited frequency flag (after the end of the big hit on the first main game side of the limited frequency flag) It is determined whether the flag (which can be turned on) is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery, and determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in other words, if the second main game limited frequency flag (a flag that can be turned on after the big hit on the second main game side among the limited frequency flags) is on, in step 1456, The limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value is the first stage value {in this example, the two stages of the first stage and the second stage as the limited frequency state. If there is a difference, the limited frequency table to be referenced may have a difference)). In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the main game random number and the result of lottery determination, and sets the fluctuation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). Note that the table referred to when determining the variation mode may be different between step 1454 and step 1458. For example, the table referred to in step 1454 may be the limited frequency table 2, or the limited frequency Table 3 (a table having contents different from both the limited frequency table 1 and the limited frequency table) may be used.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1456, in other words, if the limited frequency counter value is not the first stage value, in step 1460, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 limits based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery. Referring to the frequency table 2, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). In the fourth embodiment, the initial value set in the limited frequency counter MN52 (the number of times of change to the limited frequency state) is the same as the maximum number of second main game suspensions.

  Next, FIG. 122 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, when the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, if the ended special game is a special game on the first main game side, the “special game end → limited frequency table” On the other hand, it becomes “4 symbol fluctuations with reference to 1”, while “special game end → single symbol fluctuation with reference to limited frequency table 1 → 3 symbol fluctuations with reference to limited frequency table 2”. Depending on whether the special game on the first main game side or the second main game side has ended, the variation tendency of the four symbol fluctuations after the special game ends can be different.

  Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1500 of FIG. 118 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0 with reference to the probability variation counter MP51c. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1510. Note that if the answer is No in step 1502 or step 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

  Next, in step 1510, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0 with reference to the time reduction counter MP52c. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the counter value is 0 with reference to the time reduction counter MP52c. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process {step 1570 (fourth) process}. Transition. Even in the case of No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1570 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of limited frequency end determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1570 (fourth) of FIG. 119 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 1572, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 refers to the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and determines whether or not the limited frequency flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1572, in step 1576, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c by 1. Next, in step 1578, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1578, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2000). In the case of No in step 1578, in step 1580, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. Next, at step 1582, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 resets (zero clears) the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1584, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 is a demonstration effect end command (a command to the sub side, and ends the effect being executed during the limited frequency when the limited frequency ends. Command) is transmitted (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 3999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2000). In addition, in 4th Embodiment, although it is comprised so that it may become a limited frequency state after completion | finish of a special game, when it becomes a limited frequency state, the maximum number of 2nd main game suspension ( In this example, it is configured such that the limited frequency state can continue for the same number of symbol variations as four). Also, the variation time of four variations after the end of the special game relating to the first main game is “4 seconds → 4 seconds → 4 seconds → 4 seconds” because all four variations are referred to in the limited frequency table 1, and the second main game. The variation time of 4 variations after the end of the special game is “4 seconds → 1 second → 1 second → 1 second” because the limited frequency table 1 is referred to 1 variation and the limited frequency table 2 is referred to 3 variations. . Even if the number of rounds and the release mode are the same special game, the limited frequency state may be changed depending on whether the special game related to the first main game is over or the special game related to the second main game is over. Transitions can be different. With this configuration, when a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game related to the first main game side, the gaming state before execution of the special game is likely to be a non-stochastic variation gaming state. Therefore, there is a possibility that the maximum number of second main game holds does not occur during the special game. Therefore, the time for the second main game hold to occur is secured by setting all the symbol fluctuations (4 fluctuations) for the maximum number of second main game hold after the end of the special game to “4 seconds”. In addition, when a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game related to the second main game side, the gaming state before execution of the special game is likely to be the probability variation gaming state, so that There is a high possibility that two or more main game holds have occurred. Therefore, in the symbol variation (four variations) for the maximum number of second main game suspensions after the end of the special game, only the first variation is set to “4 seconds”, and the subsequent three variations are set to “1 second”. The time when the main game hold occurs can be sufficiently secured.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 2000 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 2002, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2002, in step 2004, the special game control means MP30, the special game flag (main game probability change flag, main game short time flag, auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in step 2006, the specific game control means MP50 resets the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c (zero clear). Next, in step 2008, the specific game control means MP50 resets the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c (zero clear), and proceeds to the next process {step 2100 (fourth) process}. Even in the case of No in step 2002, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2100 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 126 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 2100 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 2102, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 3000 (fourth), the special game execution means MP33 executes a special game start control process described later. Next, in step 3100 (fourth), the special game execution means MP33 executes a normal special winning opening control process described later. Next, in step 3400 (fourth), the special game execution means MP33 executes a distribution prize winning control process described later. Next, in step 3800 (fourth), the special game execution means MP33 executes a special game end control process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3997). In the case of No in step 2102, the special game executing means MP33 determines that it is not time to execute the special game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3997).

  Next, FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the special game start control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 (fourth) in FIG. 126. First, in step 3002, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3006, the information transmission control means MT sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In step 3999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 3008, the special game executing means MP33 sets (initializes) 1 to a round number counter (not shown), and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3100 (fourth)}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3002, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3100 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 128 is a flowchart of the normal prize opening control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 3102, the normal special winning opening control means MP 36 refers to a round number counter (not shown), and determines whether or not the counter value is an odd number (transition to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game). Whether or not it is an odd-numbered round for executing a normal round without determining whether or not). In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the normal special prize opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the normal game related information temporary storage means MP36b, and the normal control continuation flag (regarding the release of the normal special prize opening C10) It is determined whether or not the flag (turned on during round execution) is on. If Yes in step 3104, the process proceeds to step 3150 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3104, in step 3106, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns on the normal control continuing flag in the flag area of the normal game related information temporary storage means MP36b. Next, in step 3108, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the opening / closing mode determination table (see FIG. 129), and based on the big hit symbol and the counter value of the round number counter (not shown), the normal large in the round. The opening mode of the winning opening C10 is set.

  Here, FIG. 129 is an example of an opening / closing mode determination table that is referred to when determining the opening mode of the special winning opening. As shown in the figure, the special game in the fourth embodiment is configured such that the allocation big prize opening C20 and the normal big prize opening C10 are alternately opened. More specifically, the normal prize opening C10 is opened in the odd-numbered round, and when the opening of the normal prize-winning slot C10 is finished, it becomes the next round (even number round), and the distribution big prize opening C20 is opened in the even number round. Then, the transition to the next round (odd round) is continued until the final round ends when the distribution prize winning opening C20 is released. In addition, in 4th Embodiment, it is to the specific area | region C22 provided in the inside and the combination of the opening mode (the short opening which can hardly acquire an appearance ball and the long opening A and the long opening B which are easy to acquire an appearance ball) of each round. Entry into the specific area C22 at the time of opening the large allocation prize opening C20 and determining that the specific area C22 is valid (the fourth R in this example) is determined to enter the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game The profit to the player for each jackpot symbol is made different depending on the combination of ease (opening mode of the distribution big prize opening C20 in the fourth round). For example, in the special game related to the jackpot symbol 2A, only the first R to the third R are long open and the fourth R is short open. Does not migrate (or difficult to migrate). On the other hand, in the special game related to the jackpot symbol 7A, since all rounds from the first R to the 12th R are long open, 12 rounds can be obtained, and the fourth R is long open. After the special game is completed, the game state shifts to the probability variation game state (or is easily transferred). Note that the configuration related to the special game is not limited to this. For example, the special game related to the first main game symbol is awarded one special game than the special game related to the second main game symbol. It may be configured so that the expected value is relatively large (the expected value of the number of rounds to be executed is large, the number of rounds that are long open is large, etc.), and in addition to this configuration, a special related to the second main game symbol The game is easier to enter the specific area C22 during the specific area effective period than when the special game related to the first main game symbol is executed (for example, as the special game related to the first main game symbol, the number of rounds is As a special game related to the second main game design, the number of rounds is 4R, while the special game has 12R and the 4R-th is a short game and the round number is 12R and the 4R-th is a special game that is a long game. There is a special game in which the 4R eyes are long open, 4R th und number is 8R may constitute only a) as a special game is long open. In other words, there are many winning game balls in the first hit (big hit relating to the first main game symbol in the non-stochastic game state), but the probability of transitioning to the probability change game state after the first hit is low, and the second main game symbol is changed. In the situation where the game progresses (for example, the probability variation gaming state and the so-called electric support state), the number of game balls acquired at the big hit on the second main game side is small, but the probability of shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit seems to be high It may be configured.

  In addition, by configuring the distribution large winning opening C20 and the regular large winning opening C10 to be alternately opened, the other large amount related to the next round is passed during the elapse of the winning waiting time after the closing of the one large winning opening. It will be possible to start opening the winning opening. As a result, the period during which any big winning opening is closed is shortened, so that the game balls launched by the player do not enter any big winning opening (so-called waste balls) can be reduced. As well as being able to reduce the time required to digest special games. Further, in the fourth embodiment, as an opening mode of the grand prize opening, the longest opening time is the long opening A, which is “28000 ms opening → 1300 ms closing → 52 ms opening → closing”. Run once. Also, in all big wins, the opening mode of the 1R big winning opening is a long opening A, and by configuring in this way, the specification different from the fourth embodiment (distribution of the number of rounds of special games) Even when a gaming machine having the same specifications is developed, a gaming machine having specifications different from the fourth embodiment can be created more easily by adopting an open mode in which the 1R to be executed is opened twice. be able to. In addition, it is not limited to the said structure, You may comprise so that the open mode of the 1st round may also be set to the long open B. FIG.

  In addition, as shown in the opening / closing timing comparison image of FIG. 129, in this example, the open pattern of long opening A: 28000 ms + 1300 ms closing + 52 ms opening, long opening B: 28000 ms opening, short opening: 52 ms opening is usually large. The winning opening C10 and / or the large allocation winning opening C20 can be opened. In addition, since the allocation winning prize C20 is configured such that the specific area C22 is effective only in a specific round (4R in this example), the specific round (4R in this example) is long open B It is configured to determine whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the special game is ended depending on whether the game is short-open or short-open. In addition, this example is an example to the last, and is not limited to this at all, For example, you may provide the aspect of long open or short open which is not illustrated in this example. In this example, before the end of the opening period of the special prize opening (the normal big prize opening C10 or the distribution big prize opening C20) during the special game, the big prize opening (the normal big prize opening C10 or the distribution) When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the grand prize opening C20), the round currently being executed is terminated, and the grand prize opening (usually the big prize opening C10 or the distribution big prize). The mouth C20) is configured to close.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 3110, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 sets the counter value of the normal winning number counter MP36c and sets (zero clear). Next, in step 3112, the normal prize opening control means MP36 starts a normal round timer MP36t, and proceeds to step 3150 (fourth). Steps 3102 to 3112 are the initial processing stage, and initial processing at the time of round execution related to opening and closing of the normal special winning opening C10 in the special game is performed in this processing.

  Next, in step 3150 (fourth), the normal special prize opening control unit MP36 executes a normal special prize opening opening / closing control process described later, and proceeds to step 3200 (fourth). It should be noted that the process moves to step 3200 (fourth) also in the case of No in step 3102. Next, in step 3200 (fourth), the normal special winning opening control means MP36 executes a normal preparation time control process to be described later. Next, in step 3250 (fourth), the normal special winning opening control means MP36 executes a normal winning control process described later. Next, in step 3300 (fourth), the normal special winning opening control means MP36 executes a normal round control end process, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3400 (fourth)}.

  Next, FIG. 130 is a flowchart of the regular prize opening opening / closing control process related to the subroutine of step 3150 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 3152, the normal special prize opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the normal special prize opening release end flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the normal big prize opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the normal big prize opening release control flag is on. Determine. If Yes in step 3154, the process proceeds to step 3160. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3154, in step 3156, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns on the normal special winning opening opening control flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. . Next, in step 3158, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 starts to open and close the normal special winning opening C10 based on the set open mode, and proceeds to step 3160.

  Next, in step 3160, the normal winning opening control means MP36 refers to the normal winning number counter MP36c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been won in the normal winning opening C10 in the current round. It is determined whether or not there was. If Yes in step 3160, the process proceeds to step 3164. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3160, in step 3162, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the normal round timer MP36t, determines whether or not the opening period of the normal special winning opening C10 has ended, and this step If Yes, the process proceeds to step 3164. In the fourth embodiment, the opening time of the regular prize opening C10 is 29352 ms when the open / close mode is long open A, 28000 ms when long open B, and 52 ms when short open. However, there is no problem even if the time value is changed.

  Next, in step 3164, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 closes the normal special winning opening C10. Next, in step 3166, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns off the normal special winning opening opening control flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3168, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns on the normal special winning opening release end flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the next process {step 3200 (first 4)}. Even in the case of No in step 3152 or step 3162, the process proceeds to the next process {process in step 3200 (fourth)}.

  Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of normal preparation time control processing according to the subroutine of step 3200 in FIG. First, in step 3202, the normal special winning opening control unit MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b and determines whether or not the normal winning stand-by flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the normal big prize opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the normal big prize opening release end flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the normal big prize opening control means MP36 turns off the normal big prize opening release end flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3208, the normal prize opening control means MP36 closes the normal prize waiting time (for example, the normal prize opening C10 is closed after the normal prize waiting timer MP36t-2 is closed), and the game balls existing inside. Is set to 1900 ms) and is started. Next, in step 3210, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns on the normal winning standby flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3212, the normal special winning opening control means MP 36 sets the normal round end timer MP 36 t-3 to the round end waiting time (for example, after stopping the excitation of the solenoid that drives the normal special winning opening C 10, This is the total time of the closing time for waiting for closing of the special winning opening C10 and the preparation time for preparing for the start of the next round. In this example, it is set to 140 ms + 60 ms (200 ms). Next, in step 3214, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns on the normal round end waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 3216. Note that if the result of step 3202 is No, the process proceeds to step 3216.

  Next, in step 3216, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the normal round end waiting flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3216, the normal winning prize control means MP36 refers to the normal round end timer MP36t-3 in step 3218, whether or not the timer value is 0, in other words, the round end waiting time has ended. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3218, in step 3220, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the discharge ball abnormality flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3220, in step 3222, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (not shown). In this process, the round number counter value is changed from an odd number to an even number, and a round related to the opening / closing of the large allocation winning opening C20 is executed. Next, in step 3224, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns off the normal round end waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3226, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns on the normal round end waiting completion flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 3228. Note that if the answer is No in step 3216, step 3218, or step 3220, the process proceeds to step 3228.

  Next, in Step 3228, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the normal winning stand-by flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the normal winning stand-by timer MP36t-2 to determine whether or not the timer value is 0, in other words, the normal winning stand-by time ends. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3230, in step 3232, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns off the normal winning stand-by flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3234, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns on the normal winning standby time end flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the next process {step 3250 (fourth) ) Processing}. In addition, also in the case of No in step 3204, step 3228, or step 3230, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3250 (fourth) process}.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the normal winning control process according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 3252, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the normal control continuation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3256, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the normal winning wait time end flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3256, in step 3258, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 determines whether or not the normal winning detection device MP36s (normal special winning opening input sensor) detects the entry of a new game ball. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3258, in step 3260, the normal big opening control means MP36 adds 1 to the counter value of the normal winning number counter MP36c. Next, in Step 3262, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 sets a prize ball command to the prize ball payout control board KH (transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH side by the control command transmission process in Step 3999). Then, the processing shifts to the next processing {step 3300 (fourth) processing}. It should be noted that, also in the case of No in step 2752, step 3256, or step 3258, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3300 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 133 is a flowchart of normal round control end processing according to the subroutine of step 3300 (fourth) in FIG. 128. First, in step 3302, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 determines whether or not the normal round end waiting completion flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b is ON. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the normal winning standby time end flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns off the normal round end waiting completion flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3308, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 turns off the normal winning standby time end flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3310, the normal special winning opening control means MP36 stops and resets the normal round timer MP36t. Next, in step 3312, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the normal control continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the next process {process of step 3400 (fourth) }. In the case of No in steps 3302 and 3304, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3400 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the allocation prize winning control process related to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) in FIG. 126. First, at step 3402, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 refers to a round number counter (not shown) and determines whether or not the counter value is an even number. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the allocation control continuing flag is on. judge. If Yes in step 3404, the process proceeds to step 3450 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3404, in step 3406, the allocation big prize control unit MP35 turns on the distribution control continuing flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b. . Next, at step 3408, the allocation big prize opening control means MP35 refers to the opening / closing mode determination table (see FIG. 129) based on the big hit symbol and the round number counter value, and determines the opening mode of the allocation big prize opening C20. set.

  Next, in step 3410, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 turns on the shielding member driving control flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 3412, the distribution large prize opening control means MP35 resets (zero clears) the counter value of the distribution prize counter MP35c and the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c-2. Next, at step 3414, the allocation big winning opening control means MP35 starts the allocation round timer MP35t, and proceeds to step 3450 (fourth). Steps 3402 to 3414 are the initial processing stage, and initial processing at the time of round execution related to opening and closing of the big prize winning slot C20 in the special game is performed in this processing.

  Next, at step 3450 (fourth), the allocation big prize opening control means MP35 executes a distribution big prize opening opening / closing control process to be described later, and proceeds to step 3500 (fourth). In the case of No in step 3402, the process proceeds to step 3500 (fourth). Next, at step 3500 (fourth), the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 executes a distribution preparation time control process to be described later. Next, in step 3550 (fourth), the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 executes a distribution winning control process described later. Next, at step 3600 (fourth), the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 executes a discharge ball abnormality detection process to be described later. Next, at step 3416, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the round number counter, and the counter value is the shielding member driving value (the shielding member C22a is driven and the entry into the specific area C22 is effective). It is determined whether or not it is a round of 4R in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3416, in step 3650 (fourth), the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 executes a shielding member drive control process described later, and proceeds to step 3700 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3416, in step 3418, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 turns off the shielding member drive control in-progress flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and step 3700 ( Move to 4). Next, in step 3700 (fourth), the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 executes a normal round control end process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process {step 3800 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 135 is a flowchart of the allocation big prize opening / closing control processing according to the subroutine of step 3450 (fourth) in FIG. 134. First, at step 3452, the allocation big prize opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and determines whether or not the allocation big prize opening termination flag is off. . In the case of Yes in step 3452, in step 3454, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and the distribution large winning opening releasing control flag is on. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 3454, the process proceeds to step 3460. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3454, in step 3456, the large allocation prize opening control means MP35 turns on the high allocation prize opening release control flag in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b. To. Next, at step 3458, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 starts to open / close the distribution large winning opening C20 based on the set release mode, and proceeds to step 3460.

  Next, at step 3460, the allocation big prize opening control means MP35 refers to the allocation prize number counter MP36c and determines whether or not the counter value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10). If Yes in step 3460, the process proceeds to step 3464. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3460, in step 3462, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the timer value of the distribution round timer MP35t, and whether or not the opening period of the allocation large winning opening C20 has ended. Determine. If Yes in step 3462, the process proceeds to step 3464. Here, in the present example, the opening period of the large allocation winning opening C20 is 52 ms when the opening mode is “short opening”, and 28000 ms when the opening mode is “long opening B”. It should be noted that the predetermined number that normally closes the winning prize opening C10 and the predetermined number that closes the distribution winning prize opening C20 may be the same numerical value (for example, 10 is the same). However, it may be a different numerical value (for example, the former is 5 and the latter is 10 or the former is 10 and the latter is 5). In addition, the opening period in which the normal prize winning opening C10 is closed and the opening period in which the distribution winning prize opening C20 is closed are the same time value (for example, the same in 30 seconds). It may be a different time value (for example, the former is 10 seconds and the latter is 30 seconds, or the former is 30 seconds and the latter is 10 seconds). In addition, the predetermined period may differ depending on the jackpot symbol that is the winning opportunity for the special game, that is, the predetermined period related to the predetermined round in the special game (for example, the even-numbered round where the allocation big prize opening C20 is opened) is special. It may be different depending on the jackpot symbol that is the winning opportunity of the game, and a predetermined period related to a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) and a predetermined period related to a specific round (for example, the eighth round) in a special game May be different (the same is true in the odd-numbered round in which the normal winning opening C10 is normally opened).

  Next, at step 3464, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 forcibly ends the longest opening control of the distribution large winning opening C20 and closes it. That is, when a predetermined number of winnings are detected in the allocation big prize opening C20, or when the set opening pattern is finished, the opening / closing of the distribution big prize opening C20 is finished and closed. Next, at step 3466, the allocation big prize opening control means MP35 turns off the distribution big prize opening release controlling flag in the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MP35b. Next, at step 3468, the distribution big prize opening control means MP35 turns on the distribution big prize opening release end flag in the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and the next process {step 3500 (fourth) processing}. In addition, also when it is No in step 3452 or step 3462, it transfers to the next process {process of step 3500 (4th)}.

  Next, FIG. 136 is a flowchart of the distribution preparation time control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 3502, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b and determines whether or not the discharge waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the distribution large prize opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and whether the distribution large prize opening release end flag is on. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3504, in step 3506, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 turns off the large allocation winning opening release end flag in the flag area of the allocated gaming related information temporary storage section MP35b. Next, in step 3508, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 turns on a discharge waiting flag in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b. Next, at step 3510, the allocation prize winning control means MP35 closes the allocation prize waiting time (for example, the allocation prize winning port C20 to the allocation prize waiting timer MP35t-2 and then exists inside. It is a time to wait for the game ball being detected by the winning sensor, and in this example, 1900 ms) is set and started. The distribution winning awaiting flag in the flag area of the related information temporary storage means MP35b is turned on. Next, in step 3514, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 stops the round end waiting time (for example, the excitation of the solenoid driving the large distribution winning opening C20 in the distribution round end timer MP35t-3). It is the total time of the closing time for waiting for the time until the distribution winning prize opening C20 is actually closed and the preparation time for preparing the start of the next round. In this example, 200 ms (140 ms + 60 ms) is set. At the same time, in step 3516, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 turns on the distribution round end standby flag in the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and proceeds to step 3518. In the case of No in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3518.

  Here, in this example, the waiting time at the end of the sorting round is set to 200 ms, but this is the closing of the sorting electric accessory C21d of the sorting prize winning opening C20 (from the time when the solenoid is turned off to the time when it is almost completely closed. Is the sum of the time required for 140) and the preparation time of 60 ms until the next opening. By providing the preparation time in this way, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and the like by interrupting the drive of the solenoid and the motor that drive the opening and closing of the big prize opening and suppressing the heat generation. Further, in this example, the distribution round end waiting time (200 ms) is configured to be shorter than the discharge waiting time (1900 ms), and the next time during the waiting period for the game balls in the big prize opening to be discharged Since the opening of the grand prize winning opening (normal winning prize opening C10) related to the round can be started, the special game can proceed smoothly. Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the specific numerical values and modes listed here. For example, in this example, a preparation time is provided after closing the special winning opening during the round of special games. Although configured as described above, a preparation time may be provided before the special winning opening is opened during the execution of a special game round.

  Next, at step 3518, the allocation big prize control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and determines whether or not the allocation round end standby flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the allocation round end timer MP35t-3 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 3520, in other words, in the case where the above-described round end waiting time has ended, in step 3522, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). (Increment). By this process, the counter value becomes an odd number, and the process of the next round to be described later (for example, the S3100 (fourth) normal big prize opening control process) is started. Next, at step 3524, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 turns off the distribution round end standby flag in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and proceeds to step 3526. Note that if the answer is No in step 3518 or step 3520, the process proceeds to step 3526.

  Next, at step 3526, the allocation large prize opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and determines whether or not the allocation prize waiting flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3526, in step 3528, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the allocation winning standby timer MP35t-2 and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in other words, in the case where the above-described allocation winning wait time has ended, in step 3530, the allocation large winning opening control unit MP35 is in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage unit MP35b. Turn off the distribution winning awaiting flag. Next, at step 3532, the allocation large prize opening control means MP35 passes the specific area prize waiting time (for example, the prize winning sensor in the distribution large prize opening C20 within the prize valid period) to the specific area prize waiting timer MP37t. It is the time to wait for the game ball to reach the specific area C22. In this example, 600 ms) is set and started, and in step 3534, the distribution prize winning control means MP35 is related to the distribution game. The specific area winning standby flag in the flag area of the information temporary storage means MP35b is turned on, and the routine goes to Step 3536. Here, in this example, the specific area winning waiting time (600 ms) is started at the end of the sorting winning award waiting time (1900 ms) set when the distribution large winning opening C20 is closed. For example, the allocation large winning a prize opening C20 is closed after the allocation large winning a prize opening closing time (2500 ms) which is a distribution winning awaiting time (1900 ms) + a specific area winning waiting time (600 ms). The same processing can be executed by setting it occasionally. Note that if the answer is No in step 3526 or step 3528, the process proceeds to step 3536.

  Next, at step 3536, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b and determines whether or not the specific area winning waiting flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 3536, in step 3538, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 refers to the specific area winning standby timer MP37t and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 3538, in other words, when the above-mentioned specific area winning waiting time has ended, in step 3540, the large allocation winning opening control unit MP35 is in the flag area of the allocated gaming related information temporary storage unit MP35b. The specific area winning awaiting flag in the area is turned off. Next, in step 3542, the allocation big prize control means MP35 turns on the discharge confirmation permission flag in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and the next process {step 3550 (fourth) ) Processing}. In addition, also in the case of No in step 3504, step 3536, or step 3538, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3550 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 137 is a flowchart of the distribution winning control process according to the subroutine of step 3550 (fourth) in FIG. First, at step 3552, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b and determines whether or not the distribution control continuing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3552, in step 3554, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b and determines whether or not the discharge ball abnormality flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3554, in step 3556, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and whether or not the specific area winning standby flag is off. Determine.

  In the case of Yes in step 3556, in other words, when the allocation prize winning C20 is being opened or during the allocation prize waiting time, in step 3558, the allocation prize winning control means MP35 is a distribution prize detection device. It is determined whether or not C20s (distribution large prize entry ball sensor) has detected a new ball. In the case of Yes in step 3558, in step 3559, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the allocation winning prize counter MP36c. Next, at step 3560, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 sets a prize ball command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and proceeds to step 3561. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3558, the processing proceeds to step 3561 without executing the processing of step 3559 and step 3560.

  Next, at step 3561, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the specific area entry detecting device C22s (specific area winning sensor) detects a new entry. In the case of Yes in step 3561, in step 3562, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the counter value of the allocation winning prize counter MP36c is larger than the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c. In the case of Yes in step 3562, in step 3563, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the entry into the specific area C22 is the first entry in the special game being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3563, in step 3564, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 performs a sub-main control on a specific area entry effect execution command for displaying that a game ball has entered the specific area C22. Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the unit SM side. Next, at step 3565, the allocation big prize opening control means MP35 turns on the probability variation transfer reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 3569. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3563, in other words, if it is not the first entry in the special game being executed, the processing proceeds to step 3569 without executing the processing of step 3564 and step 3565. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3562, in other words, when entering the specific area C22, when the counter value of the distribution winning prize counter MP36c is equal to or less than the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c (for example, detection of entry) In the case where a game ball that has not been entered enters a specific area), in step 3566, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 sends an error notification command for displaying that an error has occurred to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission. Next, at step 3568, the allocation prize winning control means MP35 sends a fraud detection command for notifying the game hall staff that fraud has been detected to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the hall computer HC. Set and go to step 3569. Next, at step 3569, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c, and proceeds to step 3570. Note that if the result is No in step 3561, the process proceeds to step 3570.

  Next, at step 3570, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the discharge ball detecting device C33 (discharge sensor) detects a new ball (discharge). In the case of Yes in step 3570, in step 3571, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c, and performs the next process {process of step 3600 (fourth)}. Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3570, the process of step 3571 is not executed, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3600 (fourth)}. Also in the case of No in step 3552, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3600 (fourth) process}.

  Here, in this example, when a game ball enters the discharge ball detection device C33 (discharge sensor) or the specific region entrance detection device C22s (specific region winning sensor), 1 is added to the count value of the discharge number counter MP35c. It is configured to (increment). In other words, since the specific area winning sensor also serves as the discharge sensor, the number of sensors necessary for the discharge confirmation can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Furthermore, the distance between the winning sensor and the discharging sensor can be shortened compared to the case where the discharging sensor is provided at the end of the specific area winning sensor, and the special game can be made smoother by shortening the waiting time for discharging the game ball. It can progress. In addition, this example is an example to the last, and it is not limited to this at all. For example, it may be configured such that a game ball that has entered the distribution prize winning opening C20 finally passes through one discharge sensor. .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3556, in other words, in the case where it is during the specific area effective period after the end of the allocation prize waiting time (in the specific area winning awaiting period, 600 ms), in step 3572, the allocation large prize opening control means. The MP 35 determines whether or not the specific area entry detection device C22s (specific area winning sensor) has detected a new entry. In the case of Yes in step 3572, in step 3573, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the counter value of the distribution winning prize counter MP36c is larger than the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c. In the case of Yes in step 3573, in step 3574, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the entry into the specific area C22 is the first entry in the special game being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3574, in step 3575, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 performs a sub-main control on a specific area entry effect execution command for displaying that a game ball has entered the specific area C22. Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the unit SM side. Next, at step 3576, the allocation big prize control means MP35 turns on the probability change transfer reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the process goes to step 3579. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3574, in other words, if it is not the first entry in the special game being executed, the processing proceeds to step 3579 without executing the processing of step 3575 and step 3576. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3573, in other words, when entering the specific area C22, when the count value of the distribution winning prize counter MP36c is equal to or less than the count value of the discharge number counter MP35c (for example, detection of entry) In the case where a game ball that has not been entered enters a specific area), in step 3577, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 sends an error notification command for displaying that an error has occurred to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission. Next, at step 3578, the allocation prize winning control means MP35 sends a fraud detection command for notifying the game hall staff that fraud has been detected to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the hall computer HC. Set and go to step 3579. Next, at step 3579, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 adds 1 to the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c (increment), and proceeds to step 3580. Note that if the result in Step 3572 is No, the process proceeds to Step 3580.

  Next, at step 3580, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the discharge ball detection device C33 (discharge sensor) detects a new ball (discharge). In the case of Yes in step 3580, in step 3581, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 adds 1 to the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c (increment), and the next process {process of step 3600 (fourth)} Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3580, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3600 (fourth)} without executing the process of step 3581.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3554, in other words, in the case where the discharged ball is abnormal, in step 3582, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 is newly updated with the specific area entrance detection device C22s (specific area award sensor). It is determined whether or not an incoming ball is detected. In the case of Yes in step 3582, in step 3583, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the counter value of the distribution winning prize counter MP36c is larger than the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c. If Yes in step 3583, the process moves to step 3586. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3583, in other words, at the time of entering the specific area C22, when the counter value of the distribution winning prize counter MP36c is equal to or less than the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c (for example, entry detection) When a game ball that has not been entered enters a specific area), in step 3584, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 sends an error notification command for displaying that an error has occurred to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission. Next, at step 3585, the allocation prize winning control means MP35 sends a fraud detection command for notifying the game hall staff that fraud has been detected to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the hall computer HC. Set and go to step 2433. Next, at step 3586, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 adds 1 to the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c (increment), and proceeds to step 3588. In the case of No in step 3582, the process proceeds to step 3588.

  Next, at step 3588, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 determines whether or not the discharge ball detection device C33 (discharge sensor) detects a new ball (discharge). In the case of Yes in step 3588, in step 3590, the large allocation winning opening control means MP35 adds 1 to the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c (increment), and the next process {process of step 3600 (fourth)} Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3588, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3600 (fourth)} without executing the process of step 3590.

  Next, FIG. 138 is a flowchart of discharge ball abnormality detection processing according to the subroutine of step 3600 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 3602, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MP35b and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3602, in step 3604, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 has the same counter value of the distribution winning prize counter MP36c and the counter value of the discharge number counter MP35c (all winning game balls are normal). Is discharged). In the case of Yes in step 3604, in step 3606 and step 3608, the allocation prize winning control unit MP35 determines that there is no discharge ball abnormality, and the discharge is in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage unit MP35b. Turn off the confirmation permission flag and the discharge ball abnormality flag. Next, at step 3610, the allocation big prize control means MP35 turns on the normal discharge completion flag in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and the next process (process of step 3416). Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3604, in step 3612, the allocation big prize control means MP35 determines that a discharge ball abnormality has occurred and is within the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b. , Turn on the discharge ball abnormality flag. Next, at step 3614, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 sends a command for transmitting a discharge ball abnormality command for notifying that the discharge ball abnormality has occurred to the sub-main control unit SM side. The trust buffer MT10 is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3416). In the case of No in step 3602, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3416).

  Next, FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the shielding member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3650 (fourth) in FIG. First, at step 3652, the distribution large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MP35b and determines whether or not the shielding member drive control flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3652, in step 3654, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b and determines whether or not the normal discharge completion flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 3654, the process proceeds to step 3656, and a process of driving the shielding member C22a is executed. In the case of No in step 3654, the processing of step 3678 and step 3680 is executed, and the driving of the shielding member C22a is forcibly terminated.

  Next, in step 3656, the shielding member drive control unit MP38 refers to the sorting round timer MP35t, and determines whether or not the timer value is within a predetermined period A (for example, 0 ≦ A <52 ms). To do. In the case of Yes in step 3656, in step 3658, the shielding member drive control unit MP38 opens the shielding member C22a, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3416). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3656, in step 3660, the shielding member drive control unit MP38 refers to the sorting round timer MP35t, and the timer value is a value within a predetermined period B (for example, 52 ≦ B <3052 ms). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 3660, in step 3662, the shielding member drive control unit MP38 closes the shielding member C22a, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 3416). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3660, in step 3664, the shielding member drive control means MP38 refers to the distribution round timer MP35t, and the timer value is a value within a predetermined period C (for example, 3052 ≦ C <30500 ms). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 3664, in step 3666, the shielding member drive control unit MP38 opens the shielding member C22a, and proceeds to the next process {process in step 3700 (fourth)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3664, in step 3668, the shielding member drive control means MP38 refers to the sorting round timer MP35t, and the timer value is a value within a predetermined period D (for example, 30500 ≦ D <32500 ms). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 3668, in step 3670, the shielding member drive control means MP38 closes the shielding member C22a, and proceeds to the next processing {processing in step 3700 (fourth)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3668, in step 3672, the shielding member drive control means MP38 refers to the sorting round timer MP35t, and the timer value is a value within a predetermined period E (for example, 32500 ≦ D <32552ms). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 3672, the shielding member drive control means MP38 opens the shielding member C22a in step 3675 and proceeds to the next process {the process in step 3700 (fourth)}.

  Here, the processing of step 3678 and step 3680 will be described. In this example, when the shielding member C22a is driven, it is opened and closed based on a fixed driving pattern regardless of the opening and closing mode of the large allocation prize opening C20 (by adopting such a configuration, the program capacity is reduced). Can be reduced). Even when the shielding member C22a is being driven, if the game ball is normally discharged, the driving of the shielding member C22a is forcibly terminated. Here, in this example, the longest time for which the driving of the shielding member C22a is forcibly terminated without causing the discharge ball abnormality is the time when the open mode of the long open B is selected as the open pattern of the sorting large winning opening C20. {Specifically, a period (in this example, the opening time (in this example, 28000 ms) + the allocation prize waiting time (in this example, 1900 ms) + the specific area prize waiting time (in this example, 600 ms)) , 30500 ms)}. As can be seen from this, the process when the distribution round timer value is greater than the predetermined period C (the process of S3668 to S3674) is a process executed only when an abnormal discharge ball occurs. In other words, when an abnormal discharge ball occurs due to the game ball being held inside, such as when a game ball is caught in the shielding member C22a, the blocking of the internal game ball is eliminated by driving (releasing) the shielding member C22a. The shielding member C22a is driven to the open state with the intention of making it. In addition, this example is an example to the last, and it is not limited to this at all, For example, you may comprise so that opening and closing of shielding member C22a may be repeated until discharge ball abnormality is eliminated.

  Here, as described above, when the shielding member C22a is driven, the shield member C22a is configured to open and close based on a certain driving pattern regardless of the opening / closing mode of the distribution large prize opening C20. 1) In the case of short opening, it does not enter the specific area C22 (that is, the special game ends as a result of entering the specific area C22 in spite of the short opening of the allocation prize winning opening C20). (Avoidance of possible occurrence of a situation where the game changes to the probability variation game state later), and (2) entering the specific area C22 when the length is released (that is, despite the fact that the allocation big prize opening C20 is long open). It is preferable to adopt a driving pattern such as avoiding a situation in which the player does not enter the specific area C22 and may not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is finished. Here, in this example, as described above, as shown in the opening / closing timing comparison image of FIG. 129, first, the shielding member C22a is opened simultaneously with the allocation large winning opening C20. Then, the predetermined period A is set to end before the game ball that has entered immediately after the allocation big prize opening C20 is released reaches the specific area C22 (from the distribution big prize opening C20 to the specific area). Set based on flow time to C22). For example, the predetermined period A is set to a value less than or less than {one game ball launch time (game ball launch interval)}. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the entry into the specific area C22 when the above-mentioned (1), that is, the large allocation winning opening C20 is short-opened (+ at the time of the first opening at the time of long-opening A). Can do. Next, in the predetermined period B (or predetermined period A + predetermined period B), the predetermined number which is the end condition of the round is before the winning detection is detected (that is, the number is detected by the distribution winning detection device C20s). Or before all the predetermined number that is the end condition of the round is detected to be discharged (that is, before the number is detected by the discharged ball detection device C33), for example, (predetermined number × game ball) It is set to a value less than or less than the firing speed per one). By configuring in this way, a predetermined number of balls (10 in this example) are entered in the large allocation winning opening C20 before reaching the predetermined period C in which the shielding member C22a is opened again at the time of long opening B. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the ball enters the specific area C22 during the subsequent predetermined period C, that is, the above-mentioned (2), that is, ensure that the ball enters the specific area C22 at the time of long release. it can. In addition, if the predetermined period B is too short, a game ball that has entered at the time of short opening will enter the specific area C22 within the predetermined period C that is subsequently executed. Therefore, it is desirable that the predetermined period B is longer than the time required for the game ball that has entered the large allocation prize opening C20 during the predetermined period A to pass through the shielding member C22a. More specifically, the predetermined period B (or the predetermined period A + B) is set to a value exceeding or more than {the launch time of one game ball (game ball launch interval)}. In this example, as the opening and closing timing, the predetermined period A is the opening period of the shielding member C22a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period may be a closing period. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball won at the time of short opening passes through the specific area C22.

  Returning to FIG. 139 again, in the case of No in step 3672, in other words, when all the driving patterns of the shielding member C22a have been executed, in step 3678, the shielding member drive control means MP38 closes the shielding member C22a. To do. Next, in step 3680, the shielding member drive control unit MP38 turns off the shielding member drive control in-progress flag in the flag area of the allocated game related information temporary storage unit MP35b, and performs the next process {step 3700 (fourth step ) Processing}. Even in the case of No in step 3652, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3700 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 140 is a flowchart of distribution round control end processing according to the subroutine of step 3700 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 3702, the allocation big prize control unit MP35 refers to the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage unit MP35b and determines whether or not the normal discharge completion flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3702, in step 3704 and step 3706, the allocation big prize control unit MP35 sets the normal discharge completion flag and the standby flag in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage unit MP35b. Turn off. Next, at step 3708, the allocation large winning opening control means MP35 stops and resets the allocation round timer MP35t. Next, at step 3710, the allocation big prize control means MP35 turns off the distribution control continuation flag in the flag area of the allocation game related information temporary storage means MP35b, and the next process {step 3800 ( The process proceeds to the process (4). Even in the case of No in step 3702, the process proceeds to the next process {step 3800 (fourth) process}.

  Next, FIG. 141 is a flowchart of the special game end control process according to the subroutine of step 3800 (fourth) in FIG. 126. First, in step 3802, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the end demonstration execution flag is on. If Yes in step 3802, the process proceeds to step 3812. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3802, in step 3804, the special game control means MP30 refers to the normal round end timer MP36t-3, and whether or not the round end waiting time (2700 ms in this example) in the final round has ended. Determine whether. In the fourth embodiment, the final round of the special game can be different depending on the main game symbol that is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of rounds may be fixed (for example, 16R). There is no problem.

  In the case of Yes in step 3804, in step 3806, the special game control means MP30 turns on the end demonstration execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3807, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and sets an end demonstration display execution command to the sub side (in the control command transmission process of step 3999). And transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 3808, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, sets the end demo execution timer MP38t to the end demo execution time (for example, 2000 ms), and starts it. Then, the process proceeds to step 3812.

  Next, in step 3812, the special game control means MP30 refers to the end demonstration execution timer MP38t and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 3812, in step 3814, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the discharge ball abnormality flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3814, in step 3816, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the end demo extension flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3816, in step 3818, the special game control means MP30 sets an end demonstration display completion command to the sub side (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 3999). ) Next, in step 3820, the special game control means MP30 turns off the end demonstration execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3822, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3824, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 3850 (fourth), the special game control means MP30 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3814, in step 3830, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the end demo extension flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 3830, in step 3832, the special game control means MP30 turns on the end demo extension flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000). Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2930, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000). If NO in step 3816, the special game control means MP30 turns off the end demo extension flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in step 3828, and performs the next processing (step 3000). The process proceeds to (1). Note that if the answer is No in step 3804 or step 3812, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3000).

  As described above, in this process, when the abnormality of the discharged ball is detected, the end demonstration extension flag is turned on, and the special game end demonstration display is extended until the abnormality of the discharged ball is resolved. Further, when the abnormality of the discharged ball is resolved, the process of step 3818 to step 3850 (fourth) is performed by executing the process of turning off the end demo extension flag in step 3828, and the abnormality of the discharged ball is detected. It is configured to be executed in the next interrupt process in which the above is resolved. The end demo execution time set in the end demo execution timer MP38t may be configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit and the big hit symbol. For example, (1) non-time shortened game state (non-electric support) If the long open big hit won in the middle) {the big hit that becomes long open in the round (4R in this example) driven by the shielding member C22a} is the first demonstration, (2) non-time-reduced gaming state If it is a short open big hit won during (non-electric support) {a big hit that becomes short open in the round (4R in this example) driven by the shielding member C22a}, the end demonstration is the second time, (3) No. 1 hour> 2nd time, (4) Long open big hit won in the time-saving game state (during electric support) {Big hit that becomes long open in the round (4R in this example) driven by the shielding member C22a} If the end demo is 3 hours, (5) Short open big hit won in the time-saving gaming state (during electric support) {Ending demonstration when it is a big hit that becomes short open in the round (4R in this example) driven by the shielding member C22a} Is the second time, (6) the third time <the second time (7) For the above (1) to (6), the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the specific area effective time at the long open big hit Is based on the assumption that the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the specific area effective time in the short open big hit, and the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the specific area effective time in the long open big hit The end demo time may be the second time. In addition, as an effect to be executed at the end demonstration time in the case of such a configuration, for example, when the end demonstration time is the first time, “RUSH rush!” When the end demonstration time is the second time, “END ..”, the transition is made and the effect of informing that the so-called consecutive resort state where the big hit can occur continuously in a short period of time has started.・ ”(That is, the purpose of enabling execution of an effect to notify that the so-called consecutive resort state has ended without shifting to the probability variation gaming state or the time shortening gaming state), and when the end demonstration time is the third hour Even if it is configured as “RUSH continuation!” (That is, the effect that the transition to the probability variation gaming state or the time shortening gaming state is made again and the so-called continuation state is continued can be executed). Good.

  Next, FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 3850 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 3852, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3852, in step 3854, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3856, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, at step 3858, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in Step 3860, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and determines whether or not the second main game hold ball exists. In the case of Yes in step 3860, in step 3862, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and after the special game on the first main game side is over (the opportunity for winning the special game is reached). It is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is the first main game symbol). In the case of Yes in step 3862, in step 3864, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the first main game limited frequency flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 3867. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3862, in step 3866, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the second main game limited frequency flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 3867. To do.

  Next, in step 3867, the specific game control means MP50 sets an end demonstration effect execution continuation command to the sub side (transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 3999), Control goes to step 3868. Note that if the result is No in step 3852 or step 3860, the process also proceeds to step 3868. Next, in step 3868, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, at step 3870, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 3872, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3000). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether or not a specific area C22 is entered during execution of a special game, the game is always shifted to a time-reduced game state with a limited number of times after the special game ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during execution of the special game (in other words, after the special game is finished, the game does not enter the probability variation game state). In such a case, it may be configured not to shift to the time-saving gaming state. In addition, regardless of whether or not transition to the probabilistic variation gaming state, the limited number of time-saving gaming state (main game symbol variation number) is determined (variable) based on the jackpot symbol and gaming state May be.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured such that the normal winning opening C10 is opened in the odd-numbered rounds and the allocated large winning opening C20 is opened in the even-numbered rounds, and the discharged balls are monitored in all the even-numbered rounds. On the other hand, the ball monitoring is not performed in all odd rounds. In addition, when a discharge ball abnormality occurs, the next round (for example, 5R, odd number round) of the round (for example, 4R, even number round) in which the discharge ball abnormality has occurred starts. If the discharge ball abnormality has not been resolved at the start of the round (for example, 6R, even number round), the next round (for example, 6R, even number round) until the discharge ball abnormality is resolved Is configured not to start. When the discharge ball abnormality is resolved, the next round (for example, 6R, even number round) is started after one interruption (0.004 seconds later) from the resolution timing. In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of rounds executed in the special game is 12R, the minimum number of rounds is 4R, the round in which the specific area C22 is valid is the 4th round, and the number of execution rounds depends on the type of special game However, the round in which the specific area C22 is valid is executed in all special games. In the fourth embodiment, the round in which the shielding member C22a is driven and the round in which the specific area C22 is effective are the 4R rounds, and the monitoring of the discharged balls is all the even rounds, but is not limited thereto. The round in which the shielding member C22a is driven, the round in which the specific area C22 is effective, and the round in which the discharge ball is monitored may be all set as the 4Rth (the same round).

  Next, FIG. 143 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2008 (fourth) and step 2010 (fourth). That is, as processing of the sub-main side routine, first, in step 2008 (fourth), sub game control means (sub main The control unit SM refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a demonstration effect end command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2008 (fourth), in step 2010 (fourth), the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM is in the special game end demonstration in the flag area of the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b. The continuation flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2050. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2008 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 2050. Although not shown, the special game end demonstration continuation flag is also turned off when a special game is won.

  Next, FIG. 144 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2250 (fourth) in FIG. First, in step 2280, the effect display control means SM20 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and whether or not the special game end demonstration continuation flag (the flag turned on in step 4069) is on. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2280, in step 2282, the effect display control means SM20 continuously displays the probability change transition end demonstration display (the end demonstration effect displayed when shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends) ( Until the special game end demonstration continuation flag is turned off, display is continued during symbol variation and symbol variation stop), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2208). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2280, in step 2284, the effect display control means SM20 determines the effect contents based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208).

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. The difference from this embodiment is step 4050 (fourth), that is, after setting a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winnings in step 2416, in step 4050 (fourth), background effect display control is performed. The means SM23 executes a special game end effect execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900).

  Next, FIG. 146 is a flowchart of special game end effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 4050 (fourth) in FIG. 145. First, in step 4052, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a specific area entry command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 4052, in step 4054, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific area entry flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 4056. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4052, the process proceeds to step 4056.

  Next, in step 4056, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not an end demonstration effect execution command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 4056, in step 4058, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the specific area entry flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 4058, in step 4060, the background effect display control means SM23 commands related to probability change transition end demonstration display (end demo effect that informs the player that the game will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game). Is set, and the process proceeds to Step 4064. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4058, in step 4062, the background effect display control means SM23 displays a normal transition end demo display (an end demo effect that informs the player that the game does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends). This command is set, and the process proceeds to step 4064. Note that if the answer is No in Step 4056, the process proceeds to Step 4064.

  Next, in step 4064, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not an end demo display completion command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 4064, in step 4066, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the specific area entry flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 4066, in step 4068, the background effect display control means SM23 continuously displays the special game end demonstration display (continuously displays after the special game ends). Next, in step 4069, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game end demonstration continuation flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 4072. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4066, in step 4070, the background effect display control means SM23 deletes the special game end demonstration display (deletes at the end of the special game), and proceeds to step 4072. . Next, in step 4072, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific area entry flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 4074, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900) also in the case of No in step 4064.

  Here, the right part of the figure is a special game end demonstration effect image diagram. As shown in the figure, in the fourth embodiment, as a special game end demonstration effect, a probabilistic change end demo is displayed when transitioning to a probability change gaming state after the special game ends, and the probability change after the special game ends. When the transition to the amusement center state is not performed, a normal transition end demo is displayed. When the probability transition end demo is displayed, the second main game suspension upper limit number (in this example, after the end of the special game) is displayed. 4) The probability transition end demonstration is continuously displayed until the symbol variation for 4) ends.

  As described above, the fourth embodiment is configured such that the special game end demonstration display can be continuously displayed during the symbol fluctuation and the symbol stop after the special game is finished (four fluctuations in the limited frequency state). Even if there is no hold during the continuous display, the special game end demonstration display is continuously displayed and the game is not executed for a predetermined time even if the period when the hold does not exist (to the prize opening). Game waiting demonstration effects that will be displayed in the case of no entry, no discharge ball, no symbol variation, no special game execution, etc. In addition, the effect of the jackpot change in the situation where the probability change transition demonstration is displayed is different from the effect of the jackpot change in the situation where the probability change end demonstration is not displayed (particularly the effect in the probability variation gaming state). You may comprise as follows. In addition, the display area and the display mode of the decorative symbols in the situation where the probability transition end demonstration is displayed are displayed smaller than the situation where the probability transition end demonstration is not displayed in the upper right of the effect display device SG (when the jackpot is reached) The display of the decorative symbol is fixed and the display of the decorative symbol is variably displayed during the fluctuation of the main game symbol), and the probable transition end demonstration is displayed in the lower left of the effect display device SG. You may display smaller than the situation which is not. In addition, when it is configured to be able to execute an effect that changes the hold display mode of the trigger hold as the pre-reading effect, the special game is started in a situation where there is a trigger hold in which the hold display mode is changed. When the probability transition end demonstration is displayed after the end, the hold display mode of the trigger hold may be configured as a normal hold display mode (a hold display mode in which the hold display mode is not changed). Also, in the probability variation gaming state, even after the limited frequency state has ended (even after four variations have ended), the variation pattern candidates of the main game symbol may transition to different states multiple times (different limiting frequencies). You may transition to a state multiple times).

≪Action≫
Next, the effect | action in 4th Embodiment is demonstrated, referring FIGS. 147-151.

<Long open A>
In this example, description will be given focusing on “a plurality of rounds” in “a certain special game” including a unit game of long open A. Specifically, a description will be given by taking as an example the first round to the end of the second round of a special game (in this example, a special game related to the 7A symbol). Here, in the case of this example, in the first round of the special game, the normal prize winning opening C10 operates in the order of “28000 ms open / 1300 ms close / 52 ms open / close” (long open A). In this example, before the end of the opening period of the special prize opening (the normal big prize opening C10 or the distribution big prize opening C20) during the special game, the big prize opening (the normal big prize opening C10 or the distribution) When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have entered the grand prize opening C20), the round currently being executed is terminated, and the grand prize opening (usually the big prize opening C10 or the distribution big prize). The mouth C20) is configured to close.

(In the case of long open A)
First, FIG. 147 is a timing chart showing the operation contents when the opening mode of the normal special winning opening C10 is the long opening A.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure (start timing of the first round of the special game), since the first round is an odd number, the normal winning opening C10 is released (2800 ms is released).

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the normal prize winning opening C10 is closed (1300 ms closing) when 28000 ms has elapsed since the opening of the normal big winning prize opening C10.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the normal prize opening C10 is opened (52 ms open) when 1300 ms has elapsed since the closing of the normal prize opening C10.

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the normal prize opening C10 is closed when 52 ms has elapsed since the opening of the normal prize opening C10. It should be noted that the simultaneous closing time of the distribution large winning opening C20 and the normal large winning opening C10 starts from this timing.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the second round starts when 200 ms, which is the round end waiting time (the time combining the closing time and the preparation time), has elapsed since the closing of the regular prize opening C10. At the same time, since the second round is an even-numbered round, the sorting prize winning opening C20 is opened (28000 ms is opened). Each round period is configured in the order of opening, closing, and preparation. In the figure, the period from the timing 4 to this timing (200 ms) is the simultaneous closing time of the distribution large winning opening C20 and the normal large winning opening C10.

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the distribution prize winning opening C20 is closed when 28000 ms has elapsed since the opening of the distribution prize winning opening C20.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the third round is triggered by the elapse of 200 ms, which is the round end waiting time (the time combining the closing time and the preparation time) since the closing of the allocation prize winning opening C20. Is started

(In the case of long open B / when the discharge ball abnormality is not detected)
Next, FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing the operation content when the discharge ball abnormality is not detected in the case where the open mode of the distribution large winning opening C20 is long open B.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure (the start timing of the fourth round of the special game), since the fourth round is an even-numbered round, the distribution big prize opening C20 is opened (28000 ms is opened) and the distribution big prize opening C20. The inner shielding member C22a is opened (52 ms is opened). In addition, at this timing, the effective period between the distribution winning prize opening C20 and the specific area C22 and the discharge ball detection period are started.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the shield member C22a is closed (closed at 3000 ms) when 52 ms has passed since the opening of the allocation prize winning opening C20 and the shield member C22a.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the shield member C22a is opened (27448 ms open) when 3000 ms has passed since the shield member C22a was closed.

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the distribution prize winning opening C20 is closed when 28000 ms has elapsed since the opening of the distribution prize winning opening C20. It should be noted that the simultaneous closing time of the distribution large winning opening C20 and the normal large winning opening C10 starts from this timing.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the fifth round is triggered by the fact that 200 ms, which is the round end waiting time (the time combining the closing time and the preparation time), has passed since the closing of the allocation prize winning opening C22. At the same time, since the fifth round is an odd-numbered round, the special prize opening C10 is normally opened (28000 ms open). Each round period is configured in the order of opening, closing, and preparation. In the figure, the period from the timing 4 to this timing (200 ms) is the simultaneous closing time of the distribution large winning opening C20 and the normal large winning opening C10.

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, when the 1900 ms has elapsed since the closing of the allocation prize winning C20, the validity period of the allocation prize winning C20 ends. Note that the period from the timing 4 to the actual timing (1900 ms) in the figure is the game ball detection grace time from the closing of the special winning opening.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the validity period of the specific area C22 ends when 2500 ms has elapsed since the closing of the allocation prize winning opening C20. Further, at this timing, since no abnormality of the discharged ball is detected, the driving of the shielding member C22a is forcibly terminated, and the discharged ball detection period is also ended. Note that the period (600 ms) from the timing 6 to the present timing in the figure is the time from the end of the game ball detection time to the end of the discharge time.

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the normal prize opening C10 is closed when 28000 ms has elapsed since the opening of the normal prize opening C10.

  Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the fifth round is ended when 200 ms, which is a round end waiting time (a time combining the closing time and the preparation time), has passed since the closing of the regular prize opening C10. Then, the sixth round is started, and since the sixth round is an even-numbered round, the sorting prize winning opening C22 is opened (28000 ms is opened). In addition, when the sixth round is started, the shielding member C22a is opened (52 ms open), and the effective period between the sorting prize winning opening C20 and the specific area C22 and the discharge ball detection period are started. .

  In addition, as described above, in the fourth embodiment, the simultaneous closing time for the distribution winning prize opening C20 and the normal winning opening C10 is 200 ms, the game ball detection grace time after closing the winning prize opening is 1900 ms, The time from the end of the ball detection time to the end of the discharge time is 700 ms, and the simultaneous closing time of the allocation big winning opening C20 and the normal big winning opening C10 is the shortest. In this way, by shortening the simultaneous closing time of the allocation grand prize opening C20 and the normal grand prize opening C10, the game balls launched during the special game are allocated to the allocation big prize opening C20 and the normal grand prize opening C10. Thus, it is possible to minimize the fact that the player exits from the outlet D36 without entering the ball, thereby securing the player's profit.

(Long open B / Discharge ball abnormality detection)
Next, FIG. 149 is a timing chart showing the operation contents when an abnormal discharge ball is detected in the case where the open mode of the distribution large winning opening C20 is long open B.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure (the start timing of the fourth round of the special game), since the fourth round is an even-numbered round, the allocation large prize opening C20 and the shielding member C22a in the distribution large prize opening C20 are opened. (52 ms open) is executed. In addition, at this timing, the effective period between the distribution winning prize opening C20 and the specific area C22 and the discharge ball detection period are started.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the shield member C22a is closed (closed at 3000 ms) when 52 ms has passed since the opening of the allocation prize winning opening C20 and the shield member C22a.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the shield member C22a is opened (27448 ms open) when 3000 ms has passed since the shield member C22a was closed.

  Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the distribution prize winning opening C20 is closed when 28000 ms has elapsed since the opening of the distribution prize winning opening C20.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the 8th round is triggered by the fact that 200 ms, which is the round end waiting time (the time combining the closing time and the preparation time), has passed since the closing of the allocation winning prize opening C20. At the same time, since the eighth round is an even-numbered round, the normal winning opening C10 is normally opened (opening for 28000 ms). Each round period is configured in the order of opening, closing, and preparation.

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, when the 1900 ms has elapsed since the closing of the allocation prize winning C20, the validity period of the allocation prize winning C20 ends.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, triggered by the passage of 27448 ms from the opening of the shielding member C22a, the shielding member C22a is closed (2000 ms is closed) and the valid period of the specific area C22 ends. Further, at this timing, since the abnormality of the discharge ball is detected, the driving of the shielding member C22a is continued (not forcibly terminated), and the discharge ball detection period is also continued.

  Next, at timing 8 in the figure, the shielding member C22a is opened due to abnormal discharge ball and lapse of 2000 ms from the closing of the shielding member C22a. Next, at timing 9 in the figure, the shielding member C22a is closed because it is abnormal in the discharge ball and 52 ms has elapsed since the opening of the shielding member C22a.

  Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, the normal prize opening C10 is closed when 28000 ms has elapsed since the opening of the normal prize opening C10. Note that the sixth round, which is the next round, is not started because the discharge ball abnormality has not been resolved at this timing.

  Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, since the discharge ball abnormality has been eliminated, the discharge ball detection period ends, and a preparation time until the start of the next round of 4 ms (1 interrupt) is started. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, the 5th round is ended when 4 ms (1 interrupt) has elapsed since the elimination of the discharge ball abnormality, the 6th round is started, and the 6th round is an even number round. For this reason, the distribution prize winning opening C20 is opened (52 ms open). In addition, when the ninth round is started, the shielding member C22a is opened (52 ms is opened), and the effective period between the large prize winning slot C20 and the specific area C22 and the discharge ball detection period are started. .

(In case of short open / in case of abnormal detection of discharged ball)
Reference is now made to FIG. In the short-opening unit game, the opening operation of the large allocation winning opening C20 is completed at the timing 2 in the figure, and the discharged ball abnormality is confirmed at the timing 5 in the figure, which is 2500 ms later. Here, when the discharge ball abnormality is not detected, the driving of the shielding member C22a is finished simultaneously with the end of the predetermined period B, and the driving for the subsequent predetermined periods C, D, and E is not executed.

(In the case of short open / discharge ball abnormality detection)
Reference is now made to FIG. In the short-opening unit game, when the discharge ball abnormality is detected at the timing 5 in the figure, the driving of the shielding member C22a for the predetermined period C, D, E is continued until the discharge ball abnormality is resolved. . In addition, when the opening operation of the regular prize opening C10 in the fifth round is continued, the opening time and / or preparation time in the fifth round is extended to the elimination of the discharge ball abnormality, 6 rounds will not start. Thereafter, when the driving operation of the shielding member C22a continues at the timing of 7 in the figure when the discharge ball abnormality is resolved, the drive operation is forcibly terminated and the discharge ball detection period is ended, and the next timer interrupt processing is performed. The sixth round is started at the timing of 8 in the figure to be executed. In addition, in the 4R big hit where the 4R eye is long open or short open, there is an abnormal discharge ball detection after the end of the 4R, and if the abnormal discharge ball is not resolved, the distribution big prize opening C20 and the normal big prize opening C10 Are closed, and the distribution prize winning period is kept off after 1700 ms from the end of 4R. In such a case, the discharge ball detection period remains on, and the shielding member C22a remains closed after the end of the period E opening.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the discharge ball abnormality occurs in a certain round (in this example, the even number round and the fourth round) related to the opening and closing of the distribution prize winning opening, and in the next round When the ball discharge abnormality has not been resolved even after the round end waiting time (the time of closing time and preparation time) has elapsed after the opening / closing operation of the round related to opening / closing of a certain special prize opening has ended Is configured to extend the round end waiting time of the round related to the opening and closing of the normal prize winning opening. In addition, when the discharge ball abnormality is resolved in a situation where the round end waiting time of the round related to opening and closing of the normal prize winning opening is extended, a predetermined time (for example, one interrupt) from the time when the discharge ball abnormality is resolved By configuring the next round (even-numbered round) to start after the time (4 ms) has elapsed, it is necessary to execute the control of opening / closing of the big prize winning opening in the next round after reliably eliminating the discharge ball abnormality. Will be able to. In addition, the variation mode (variation time) selected when the number of variations of the main game symbol becomes a predetermined number in the game in the probability variation game state (and the time shortening game state) with the number of times limited The candidates are configured to be different, the special game end demonstration effect can be continuously displayed even after the special game ends, and a novel effect can be executed as a villa effect immediately after the special game ends. Yes.

  In addition, in 4th Embodiment, it is the structure similar to this embodiment so that the 2nd main game start opening electric accessory B11d can open long (when "D2" stops) also in a non-time reduction game state. The longest one opening time (5 seconds) at the time of the long opening is the longest time among all opening modes of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. In addition, when the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened in an open mode in which the longest one opening time is executed, the second main game start opening electric accessory on the effect display device SG. You may perform the effect which alert | reports that B11d will open long.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, it is configured such that the game balls discharged from the out port D36 during the special game are less likely to be generated by the opening and closing modes of the normal special winning port C10 and the distribution large winning port C20, and the special game ends Although the configuration is such that the special game end demonstration effect can be continuously displayed later, a configuration of a gaming machine that makes the configuration more user-friendly can be given. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the fourth embodiment, and only changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 152 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is that the second main game start port {second main game start port (2) B10- 2}. The second main game start port (2) B10-2 has a second main game start port entrance detection for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second main game start port (2) B10-2. A device (2) B11s-2 is provided.

  By configuring as described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the game proceeds with a right hand strike during a special game. In such a case, during the special game, When the game ball enters the second main game start port (2) B10-2, the second main game hold can be caused. Therefore, even if the special game related to the first main game side in the non-time-reduced game state satisfies the transition condition to the probability variable game state (first hit), the upper limit of the second main game hold at the end of the special game A number (or one or more) can be generated, and a consecutive resort suggestion effect that continuously displays the probable transition end demonstration display after the special game ends can be appropriately executed.

(Fifth embodiment)
In the present embodiment, in the game in the probability variation game state (and time-reduced game state) with a limited number of times, the variation mode that is selected when the number of variations of the main game symbol has reached a predetermined number Although the (variation time) candidates are different (switched), it is possible to realize a highly interesting gameability different from the present embodiment as the gameability in the probability variation game state. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 153 is a flowchart of the control process of the first (second) main game diagram according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 9 in the fifth embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 1411-1 (fifth), step 1450 (fifth), step 1441 (fifth) and step 1442 (fifth), that is, in step 1410-2, After determining the stop symbol related to the game symbol, in step 1411-1 (fifth), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and the limited frequency flag is on. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1411-1 (fifth), in step 1450 (fifth), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411-1 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 1412.

  If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol in step 1430, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b in step 1441 (fifth), and the stop symbol is a small hit symbol. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1441 (fifth), in step 1442 (fifth), the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Move to 1500. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1441 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 1500. In addition, in 5th Embodiment, it is added as conditions that it is not a small hit game as a change start condition.

  Next, FIG. 154 is an example of a main game table referred to in the main game symbol control process in the fifth embodiment. A feature of the fifth embodiment is that a small hit is provided on the second main game side. Although details will be described later, it is configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state in response to the small hit. In the time-reduced game state, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is only a short time (non-reach fluctuation, less than 30 seconds in this example), while the fluctuation time at big hit is long (reach fluctuation). In this example, only 30 seconds or longer). In the fifth embodiment, the reach variation occurs when the variation time is 30 seconds or longer.

  Next, FIG. 155 is an example of a limited frequency table in the fifth embodiment. As a feature of the fifth embodiment, the limited frequency state is set only in the probability variation gaming state (refer to the limited frequency table when determining the variation mode), and the variation time at the big hit is a long time (reach variation). Yes, in this example, it is only 30 seconds or more), while the fluctuation time at the time of loss and small hitting is only a short time (non-reach fluctuation, in this example, less than 30 seconds). The difference from the main game table 3 is the table contents referred to at the time of a small hit, and the fluctuation time at the small hit is a long time (reach fluctuation, when referring to the main game table 3, in this example, 30 seconds or more), and only a short time (non-reach variation, less than 30 seconds in this example) when referring to the limited frequency table.

  Next, FIG. 156 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1500 in FIG. 153 in the fifth embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 1530 (fifth), that is, after turning off the main game probability change flag in step 1510, in step 1530 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 has a limited frequency. The limited frequency flag in the flag area of the related information temporary storage means MN52b is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1512.

  Next, FIG. 157 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 1590 (fifth) and step 1591 (fifth). That is, after turning off the specific game flag in step 1554, special game control is performed in step 1590 (fifth). The means MP30 turns off the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1591 (fifth), the special game control means MP30 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c to zero, and proceeds to step 1556.

  Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is step 1611 (fifth) and step 1850 (fifth), the purpose of which is a distribution game (unit game that opens the second big prize opening C20 having a specific area). ) Can be executed. That is, in step 1611 (fifth), the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the currently executed round is a distributed game execution round (in this example, the fourth R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (fifth), in step 1850 (fifth), the allocated game execution control means MP36 executes an allocated game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1611 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 1612 and the same processing as in this embodiment is executed.

  Next, FIG. 159 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of Step 1850 (fifth) of FIG. 158 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 1852, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1852, in Step 1854, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is the long open symbol (3A / 5A. 7A · 3B · 5B · 7B). In the case of Yes in Step 1854, in Step 1856, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses a long release pattern (for example, a 15-second release pattern) as the release pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. Then, an opening pattern designed so as to definitely enter the specific area C22 is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in step 1858, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses the short open pattern (for example, 0. 0) as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. An opening pattern designed so that non-entering into the specific area C22 is determined for 1 second is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1860.

  Next, at step 1860, the allocated game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1862, the distributed game execution control means MP36 turns on the distributed game continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1864, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set release pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

  Next, at step 1866, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. To do. If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1866, in step 1868, the allocation game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (the set opening pattern) of the second big winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, at step 1870, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, at step 1872, the assigned game execution control means MP36 turns off the assigned game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1874, the allocated game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the allocated game execution round. In the case of Yes in Step 1874, in Step 1876, the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to Step 1878. . Also in the case of No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, at step 1878, the assigned game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the assigned game execution round), and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1634). Even in the case of No in step 1868, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 in FIG. 158 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1680 (fifth), step 1682 (fifth) and step 1686 (fifth), that is, in step 1680 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 is specified. With reference to the flag area of the game related information temporary storage means MB30b, it is determined whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (fifth), in step 1682 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, Control goes to step 1652. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680 (fifth), in step 1686 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example) to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. , Step 1658 follows. The predetermined number B may be the same value as the predetermined number A, or a different value may be set in the time reduction counter MP52c based on the big value symbol.

  Next, FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (fifth) of FIG. 40 in the fifth embodiment. Note that the processing of the figure is not provided in the present embodiment, but since it is provided in the second embodiment, differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail. The difference from the second embodiment is step 1788 (fifth) to step 1790 (fifth), and the purpose is limited to the case after winning the small hit in the probability variation gaming state. To shift to a frequency state. That is, after setting the small hit end display instruction command (command to the sub side) in step 1774, in step 1788 (fifth), the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. It is determined whether or not the current probability variation gaming state. In this example, the processing (or description) relating to the gaming state such as “in the probability varying gaming state” or “whether or not the probability varying gaming state” is “probability varying gaming state → probability varying gaming state and time reduction” The game state may be “a game state” or may be “a probability-variable game state → a time-reduced game state” (in the fifth embodiment, when the game state is a probability-change game state, the game state is a time-reduced game state). In the case of Yes in step 1788 (fifth), in step 1789 (fifth), the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means. Next, in step 1790 (fifth), the small hit game control means MP40 is a predetermined value {“(initial value of the probability variation counter MP51c / 2) −1” as the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, In this example, 39} is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910). In the fifth embodiment, the initial value to be set in the limited frequency counter MN52c is “(the initial value of the probability variation counter MP51c / 2) −1”. When the reach reaches three times, the game reach that the third reach always becomes a big hit (details will be described later). Each numerical value may be changed. For example, when the initial value of the limited frequency counter value is “X” and the initial value of the probability variation counter value is “Y”, “X = (Y / Z) −1. It is also possible to change the value of “Z” to generate “Z + 1” times reach in the probability variation gaming state, so that the reach of the “Z + 1” time will always be a big hit. It can be realized. The game can be realized even if the limited frequency counter value is changed, and there is no problem if “X ≧ (Y / Z) −1”. In addition, “X” that is the initial value of the limited frequency counter value, that is, the period of the limited frequency state may be provided as long as the above-described condition “X ≧ (Y / Z) −1” is satisfied. No problem (it will have multiple limited frequency states). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the limited frequency state after the end of the small hit game is different depending on the selected small hit symbol.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when a small win is won, a transition is made to a probability-variable gaming state and a limited frequency state (variation mode decision candidates transition), and when a big win is won, a probability-variable gaming state and an unrestricted frequency state (Change from the candidate when the variation mode determination candidate is in the limited frequency state to the candidate when in the non-limited frequency state again). In the case of a loss, it may be configured to shift to the limited frequency state.

  Next, FIG. 162 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2250 (fifth) in FIG. 22 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2286, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the current probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2286, in step 2288, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the change time of the symbol change is not less than a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2288, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content of the symbol variation as the specific reach effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2286 or step 2288, in step 2292, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content of the symbol variation based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (in step 2208). Process).

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment indicates that the symbol variation related to the small hit is executed in the game in the probability variation gaming state (and the time shortening gaming state) with a limited number of times. As an opportunity, if the candidate of the selected variation mode (variation time) is different and the candidate of the selected variation mode (variation time) is different (in the limited frequency state) When the specific reach effect is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, the third time) in the probability variation gaming state, the specific reach effect is executed in the probability variation gaming state by configuring so that the symbol variation related to the loss is not performed. The symbol variation is related to the jackpot variation, so that the player pays attention to the result of the specific reach effect executed during the probability variation, and the executed specific reach. Even if it is an effect related to losing, since the number of executions until the specific reach production of the predetermined number of times approaches, attention is also paid to the number of executions of the specific reach production, and the fun of the game is improved. .

  In the fifth embodiment. The specific reach effect is configured to be executed only in the symbol variation related to the big hit or the small hit, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be executed in the symbol variation related to the loss. In such a configuration, small hits and loses can be executed for a long time (reach variation) in the probability variation gaming state and the unrestricted frequency state, while in the probability variation gaming state and the limited frequency state. It is desirable that only a short time (non-reach variation) symbol variation is executed. It should be noted that the limited frequency state only needs to differ in the table contents to be referred to when determining the variation mode in a predetermined period. For example, “the end of the special game → the probability variation gaming state and the limitation frequency state → the probability variation gaming state and the non- Limited frequency state → Non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-limiting frequency state ”and“ End of special game → Probability variation gaming state and limitation frequency state A → Probability variation gaming state and limitation frequency state B → Non-probability variation gaming state and non-limitation ” “Frequency state” has the same meaning.

(Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment)
In the fifth embodiment, the limited reach state is triggered by the fact that the symbol variation related to the small hit is executed, and thus the specific reach for the predetermined number of times (in this example, the third time) in the probability variation gaming state. When the production is executed, the symbol variation related to the specific reach production is determined to be a big hit variation, but the gameability similar to that of the fifth embodiment is realized by other configurations. Is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 163 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol control process according to the subroutine of Steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 9 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. Changes from the fifth embodiment are step 1445-1 (fifth modification 1), step 1445-2 (fifth modification 1), step 3900 (fifth modification 1) and step 3950 (fifth modification 1). Yes, that is, after the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined in step 1410-2, in step 1445-1 (fifth variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 stores the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. Referring to the flag area, it is determined whether or not the limited frequency A flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1445-1 (fifth variation 1), in step 3900 (fifth variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 executes a limited frequency A variation mode determination process to be described later. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1445-1 (fifth modification 1), in step 1445-2 (fifth modification 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 sets the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. It is determined whether or not the limited frequency B flag is on. If YES in step 1445-2 (first modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1413. If NO, the process proceeds to step 1412. As described above, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, two types of processing related to the limited frequency are provided (two types of limited frequency states are provided). Further, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, since no small hit is provided, the processing relating to the small hit is not executed. In the fifth embodiment, whether the limited frequency A state (the limited frequency A flag is on) or the limited frequency B state (the limited frequency B flag is on) after the special game ends is determined. It is configured to be determined based on the jackpot symbol that triggered the transition of the special game, but whether the limited frequency A state or the limited frequency B state is reached after the special game ends, the type and jackpot of the jackpot symbol It may be configured to be determined by a combination with the game state of the time, for example, if the jackpot symbol A is won in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, the jackpot related to the jackpot symbol A When the jackpot symbol A is won in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state after the end, the transition is made to the limit frequency B after the jackpot relating to the jackpot symbol A is completed. It may be. Further, in such a configuration, even when the big hit symbol is a long open big hit symbol, the limited frequency is used when there is no game ball entering the specific region C22 in a period in which the specific region C22 is valid. You may comprise so that it may not change to a state (when a game ball enters into the specific area | region C22, it transfers to a limited frequency state and a limited frequency state changes).

  Next, FIG. 164 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3900 (fifth variation 1) in FIG. 163 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3902, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52 and determines whether or not the counter value G is in the first stage range A (50 ≧ G> 31). In the case of Yes in step 3902, in step 3904, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3902, in step 3906, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52, and is the counter value G the first specific fluctuation execution value A (G = 31)? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3906, in step 3908, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. To decide. Next, in step 3909, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the first specific reach effect execution command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). The limited frequency table 2 includes a plurality of types of tables having different table contents such as the limited frequency table 2-1 and the limited frequency table 2-2. 2 may be configured such that the reference to the limited frequency table 2-1 or the limited frequency table 2-2 is different (for example, when G = 31, the limited frequency table 2- 1 is referred to, and when G = 1, the limited frequency table 2-2 is referred to). With such a configuration, the variation mode to be selected, the trend of the variation time, and the reach effect to be executed can be made different depending on the value of G. Further, when G is a predetermined value (for example, G = 31), the reach effect is always executed as the effect related to the symbol variation, and the reach effect is executed until the reach effect is executed. You may comprise so that the selection tendency of a variation aspect, selection candidate, and production | presentation tendency may differ after that (For example, the said reach production is performed with reference to the limited frequency table 1-1 until the said reach production is performed). After that, the limited frequency table 1-2 is referred to).

  Next, at step 3910, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52 and determines whether or not the counter value G is in the second stage range A (30 ≧ G> 1). In the case of Yes in step 3910, in step 3912, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery, and the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol. And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3910, in other words, when the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is the second specific fluctuation execution value A (G = 1), in step 3914, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 Based on the game side random number and the result of lottery determination, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2. Next, in step 3915, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the second specific reach effect execution command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). As described above, the first modification from the fifth embodiment is configured such that, during the specific game, two specific reach effects with different effect modes of the first specific reach effect and the second specific reach effect are executed. Has been. Further, when the limited frequency counter value G is “50 ≧ G ≧ 31” as the first stage and the limited frequency counter value G is “30 ≧ G ≧ 1” as the second stage, the final stage of each stage Due to the fluctuation, a specific reach effect is generated, and the specific reach effect is configured to be different in the case of the first stage and the case of the second stage. Further, when the big hit is made in the second stage, the first stage is made again after the big hit.

  Next, FIG. 165 is a flowchart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3950 (fifth variation 1) in FIG. 163 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3952, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52 and determines whether or not the counter value G is in the first stage range B (50 ≧ G> 41). In the case of Yes in step 3952, in step 3954, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the main game random number and the result of lottery determination, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. ) And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3952, in step 3956, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52, and is the counter value G the first specific fluctuation execution value B (G = 41)? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3956, in step 3958, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 based on the main game random number and the result of lottery, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. To decide. Next, in step 3959, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the second specific reach effect execution command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Next, in step 3960, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52 and determines whether or not the counter value G is in the second stage range B (40 ≧ G> 11). In the case of Yes in step 3960, in step 3962, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the main game random number and the result of lottery determination, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3960, in other words, when the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is the second specific variation execution value B (G = 11), in step 3964, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 With reference to the frequency counter MN52, it is determined whether or not the counter value G is the second specific variation execution value B (G = 11). In the case of Yes in step 3964, in step 3966, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. To decide. Next, at step 3967, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the second specific reach effect execution command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (by the control command transmission process of step 1930). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3964, in other words, if the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is in the third stage range B (10 ≧ G), in step 3968, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 Based on the random number and the lottery result, the limited frequency table 1 is referenced to determine the variation mode (variation time) for the main game symbol, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step 1413 processing). The limited frequency B variation mode determination process is also configured to execute two specific reach effects as in the limited frequency A variation mode determination process. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, the probability variation gaming state is configured to continue 80 variations after the end of the special game, but the limited frequency state is the limited frequency A state (the limited frequency A flag is set). Both the ON state and the limited frequency B state (the state where the limited frequency B flag is ON) are configured to end with 50 fluctuations after the end of the special game, and 30 fluctuations after the limited frequency state ends. In the period until the end of, when reach fluctuation occurs, it is determined that the reach fluctuation is a big hit.

  Next, FIG. 166 is an example of the limited frequency table in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. As a feature of the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the limited frequency table 1 is referred to, only a short fluctuation time (a fluctuation time that does not become a reach fluctuation) is selected at the time of loss, while at the time of a big hit Only a long time (variation time for reach fluctuation) is selected. Further, when the limited frequency table 2 is referred to, only a long variation time (variation time for reach variation) is selected regardless of the result of the determination. With this configuration, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is a specific variation execution value (for example, the first specific variation execution value, etc.). ), The symbol variation is always reach variation, and when the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is not the specific variation execution value, it is deterministic that if the symbol variation reaches reach variation, it will be a big hit. It is comprised so that. Also, with this configuration, when the reach variation is executed in the probability variation gaming state, either the big hit variation or the loss variation when the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is the specific variation execution value. In addition, since the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c becomes the specific variation execution value twice (first specific variation execution value, second specific variation execution value) in the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state When the third reach fluctuation is executed, it is determined that the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation. Although the number of times that the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c becomes the specific variation execution value in the probability variation gaming state can be changed, it is desirable that the number of times does not differ depending on the limited frequency state. If the number of times is three, it is definite that the fourth reach variation is a big hit, and “the number of times the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c becomes a specific variation execution value in the probability variation gaming state + 1” reach. The fluctuation is configured to be deterministic to be a big hit fluctuation.

  Next, FIG. 167 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 158 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. Changes from the fifth embodiment are step 1690 (fifth modification 1) to step 1693 (fifth modification 1), that is, after turning on the main game probability change flag in step 1654, step 1690 (first modification). In the fifth variation 1), the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1691 (fifth variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and the stop symbol is a limited frequency A symbol (limited frequency A variation mode determination process). It is a jackpot symbol to be executed, and in this example, it is determined whether it is 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1691 (fifth variation 1), in step 1692 (fifth variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 determines the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. Is turned on, and the flow shifts to Step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1691 (fifth variation 1), in step 1693 (fifth variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 has the limited frequency within the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. The B flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1656. As described above, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, after the special game is finished, when the game shifts to the probability variation game state, depending on the type of jackpot symbol that triggered the special game, The limited frequency table to be referred to may be different (the limited frequency state to be transferred may be different). By configuring in this way, the player cannot recognize how much the symbol variation, which is the reach variation when the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is the specific variation execution value, is the variation after the end of the special game (or Reach fluctuation when the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is a specific fluctuation execution value at what fluctuation after the end of the special game when there is only one kind of limited frequency state. The player recognizes whether or not the symbol variation is executed, and the gameability is impaired).

  Next, FIG. 168 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (fifth modification 1) in FIG. 22 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2286, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a first specific reach effect execution command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2286, in step 2288, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content related to the symbol variation as the first specific reach effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2286, in step 2290, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the second specific reach effect execution command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2290, in step 2292, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content related to the symbol variation as the second specific reach effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2290, in step 2294, the effect content related to the symbol variation is determined based on the main game symbol, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step 2208 processing). Here, the specific reach production (the first specific reach production, the second specific reach production) is a reach production executed in the probability variation gaming state, and in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, the specific reach production is performed. When executed three times, the symbol variation related to the third specific reach production is determined to be a big hit variation. In addition, the content of the effect that is decisive that it is a big hit variation when executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 3 times) in the probability variation gaming state is not limited to this, and a specific moving image is executed. Alternatively, even if a pseudo continuous variation (a symbol variation in which a temporary stop is performed a plurality of times, which is shown to the player as if a plurality of symbol variations have been executed in a single symbol-side variation) is executed. Good.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, if No in step 2286 or step 2288, in step 2292, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content related to the symbol variation based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, and the next The process proceeds to (the process of step 2208).

  Next, FIG. 169 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2300 in FIG. 18 in Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 2348 (fifth modification 1) and step 2349 (fifth modification 1), that is, after turning off the symbol changing flag in step 2334, step 2348 (fifth modification). In the modified 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the specific reach effect has been executed by the symbol variation (limited frequency in the probability variation gaming state). It can be performed with state symbol variation and symbol variation associated with jackpots of non-limited frequency states). In the case of Yes in step 2348 (fifth variation 1), in step 2349 (fifth variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 performs an effect based on the number of times that the specific reach effect is executed in the probability variation gaming state. The display is continued until the end of the probability variation gaming state, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). Here, the effect based on the number of times that the specific reach effect is executed in the probability variation gaming state is, for example, (1) the number of reach changes executed in the probability variation gaming state, and (2) the probability variation gaming state. The background effect changes as the number of reach fluctuations executed in the game increases (for example, from daytime to evening to night), and (3) the number of reach fluctuations executed in the probability fluctuation game state increases. The image of the displayed character changes (for example, “I wear a small aura → I wear a large aura → I wear an oversized aura”, “A character is an elephant → A character is a lion → A character is a giraffe” ) Or the like. It should be noted that the above-mentioned “in the probability variation gaming state” means that the game changes to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends, and in the period in which the probability variation gaming state is maintained. Meaning the period until the number of changes (80 fluctuations in this example) that the probability variation gaming state will end without big hit in the state, or the period until big hit in the probability variation gaming state Yes. In this example, the specific reach effect can be executed as the effect related to the symbol variation for the predetermined number of times after the end of the special game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “50 remaining times!” Etc. may be configured to perform an effect of notifying the remaining short time (such as the remaining number of times that the time-reduced gaming state will be terminated depending on the number of times the main game symbol has been changed). Is configured to be executed regardless of whether the predetermined number of symbol variations is a big hit or a loss, and after the jackpot is over, the effect is notified after the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state. The effect selection tendency until the predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is executed is the first effect selection tendency, and the predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is a big hit (for example, the effect of informing the remaining number of short times and the reach effect) If the design variation of the predetermined number of times is lost, the design variation of the predetermined number of times is changed. The subsequent effect selection tendency may be different from the first effect selection tendency (for example, the effect mode to be executed is different, the selection rate of the effect mode to be executed is different, etc.) as the second effect selection trend. Good.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modified example from the fifth embodiment shifts to the limited frequency state based on the jackpot symbol after the special game ends, and reaches the predetermined number of fluctuations after the special game ends. By configuring to execute a specific reach effect related to losing, a specific reach effect is obtained in a situation where the game is in a probability variation gaming state and the limited frequency state has ended (or the limited frequency state has been switched). Can be configured to be deterministic that the symbol variation related to the specific reach production is a big hit variation, and is similar to the fifth embodiment in a configuration different from the fifth embodiment. Gameability can be realized.

  In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, the variation mode candidate group to be referred to when the variation mode is determined is two types (limited frequency state, non-limited frequency state), but the number of types is There is no problem even if it is changed. For example, two types of limited frequency states, limited frequency state A and limited frequency state B, are provided (transition in the order of “limited frequency state A → limited frequency state B → unlimited frequency state”), and the period of limited frequency state A The specific reach effect may be executed once, and the specific reach effect may be executed once in the period of the limited frequency state B.

(Sixth embodiment)
In the present embodiment, in the game in the probability variation game state (and the time-reduced game state) with a limited number of times, the variation that is selected when the number of variations of the main game symbol becomes a predetermined number Although the configuration is such that the candidates for the modes (variation times) are different, the gameability similar to that of the present embodiment can be realized by other configurations. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 170 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol control process in the sixth embodiment. As the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, “3A · 3B” is a big hit with no 2R ball, “5A · 5B” is a big hit with an 8R ball, and “7A · 7B” is a big hit with a 12R ball. In addition, the big hit with no ball is a big hit where the big winning opening is short-opened in all rounds during the big hit and the game ball is not allowed to enter the big winning port. It is a big hit where the big prize opening becomes long open and game balls can enter the big prize opening in any round during the big hit.

  Next, FIG. 171 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 10 in the sixth embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 1452 (sixth) and step 1480 (sixth), that is, in step 1452 (sixth), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c. Then, it is determined whether or not the counter value G is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 10). If Yes in step 1452 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1454. If No, the process proceeds to step 1458. Further, after determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol at step 1454 or step 1458, at step 1480 (sixth), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines the stage information (limited frequency) regarding the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c. A command related to whether the counter value is within the first stage range or the second stage range) (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1930), The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). In the sixth embodiment, in the period in which the limited frequency counter value G is in the first stage range (the number of changes in the main game symbol) and the period in which the limited frequency counter value G is in the second stage range (the number of changes in the main game symbol), The configuration is such that “the period of the first stage range> the period of the second stage range”, but is not limited to this, “the period of the first stage range ≦ the period of the second stage range”. You may comprise.

  Next, FIG. 172 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram in the sixth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment is that the table contents (contents of selection candidates) of the limited frequency table 1 and the limited frequency table 2 are different at the time of loss. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the table contents are changed, and the table contents of the limited frequency table 1 and the limited frequency table 2 do not have to be the same.

  Next, FIG. 173 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2250 (sixth) in FIG. 22 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2294-1, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2294-1, the reach effect display control means SM25 confirms the current stage information (first stage information or second stage information) in step 2294-2. Next, in step 2294-3, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b, and the confirmed step information is the first step information (the limited frequency counter value is within the first step range). It is determined whether or not the information is. In the case of Yes in step 2294-3, in step 2294-4, the reach effect display control means SM25 hides the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c (not displayed on the effect display device SG, for example, not visible to the player). ). Next, in step 2294-5, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b, and is information that can be given to the hold for trigger hold (the hold that becomes the maximum profit). It is determined whether or not (provided at 4014) exists. In the case of Yes in step 2294-5, in step 2294-6, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b, and whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation related to the trigger suspension. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2294-6, in step 2294-7, the effect content of the symbol variation is determined with reference to the first stage effect content determination table on the basis of the result of the main game symbol and the variation mode, The process proceeds to the process (the process of step 2208) (see FIG. 174 for the first stage effect content determination table). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2294-5 or 2294-6, in step 2294-8, the reach effect display control means SM25 displays the effect content of the symbol variation {within the consecutive villa determination exclusive effect suspension or the symbol variation is It is determined that the maximum profit jackpot (in this example, the effect of notifying that 12R is a big jackpot and “7A · 7B”)}, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  If No in step 2294-3, the reach effect display control means SM25 displays the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c in step 2294-9 (the remaining probability variation number is displayed, for example, on the effect display device SG). Make it visible to the player). Next, at step 2294-10, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content of the symbol variation with reference to the second stage effect content determination table based on the result of the main game symbol and the variation mode, The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208) (see FIG. 174 for the second stage effect content determination table).

  If NO in step 2294-1, in step 2294-11, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content based on the result of the main game symbol and the variation mode, and the next process (in step 2208). Process). As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the remaining probability variation count (the remaining number of symbol variation stop counts at which the probability variation gaming state ends) is not displayed in the first stage, and the remaining probability variation count is not displayed in the second phase. Is configured to display.

  Here, FIG. 174 is an example of the effect determination table in the probability variation state. As shown in the figure, the first stage effect content determination table and the second stage effect content determination table have different table selection candidates, and the special effect A is an effect in which the big hit is deterministic. In the case of the first stage (when the limited frequency counter value is within the first stage range), it occurs only when there is a big hit with a ball. In the second stage (the limited frequency counter value is In the case of within the second stage range), it can occur in both big hits with and without big balls. In addition, the final effect without the appearance of the ball (the content of the effect in which the big hit without the outgoing ball becomes definitive) occurs only in the first stage, and does not occur in the second stage. In addition, the specific effect B occurs at the time of a big hit or a loss, and also occurs at the first stage or the second stage. However, when the symbol variation related to the specific effect B is a hit, It will be decisive that there will be a big hit with a ball.

  Next, FIG. 175 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2400 (sixth) in FIG. 18 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2412 and step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. A big hit start display is performed on the SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of the big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2416. In the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2416.

  Next, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning a prize winning on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side ( It may be executed as needed based on the gameplay and the type of jackpot).

  Next, in step 2424, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the big hit progress display. Next, in step 4000 (sixth), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an over-winning effect execution process described later. Next, in step 2426, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the background effect display control means SM23 executes a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big win). Next, in step 2430, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). . Note that if the answer is No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

  Next, FIG. 176 is a flowchart of overwinning effect execution processing according to the subroutine of Step 4000 (sixth) in FIG. 175 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 4002, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and over-wins in the running round (in one round, to the big winning opening that triggers the end of the round) It is determined whether or not (a winning exceeding the number of winnings) has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4002, in step 4004, the background effect display control means SM23 confirms the determination result of the on-hold status and the stop symbol determination result related to the second main game side. Next, in step 4006, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the hold that becomes the maximum profit jackpot (7B in this example) is within the hold on the second main game side. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in Step 4006, in Step 4008, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for executing the special consecutive resort suggestion effect in the next round in which the over winning is generated, and proceeds to Step 4012. Here, the rendezvous suggestion effect is a rendition that suggests to the player whether there is a big hit in the second main game side hold. This is an effect of informing the player that there is a maximum profit jackpot (7B in this example) in the side hold. Note that if the result in Step 4002 is No, the process proceeds to Step 4012. When the round in which the over winning is generated is the final round in the special game being executed, the special consecutive villa suggesting effect is not executed because there is no next round. In addition, the special consecutive resort suggestion effect may be configured to occur only in a specific round in the special game. For example, when the first round that is always executed in every jackpot is over-winning, the second round It may be configured such that a special renso suggestion effect can be executed. In addition, the special consecutive villa suggesting effect may be configured to occur only during the execution of the maximum profit jackpot (the jackpot for which the maximum number of rounds are executed, in this example, 7B) (the opportunity for over winning is the most). Because it is a lot of special games).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4006, in step 4010, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for executing the normal consecutive resort suggestion effect in the next round in which the over winning is generated, and proceeds to step 4012. Here, the normal ream suggestion effect is an effect that tells the player whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit other than the maximum profit big hit (7B in this example) in the hold on the second main game side. It is. It should be noted that the rendering mode of the Renso suggestion effect is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the normal Renso suggestion effect can be executed even when there is a hold that becomes the maximum profit jackpot. Similar to the fourth embodiment, a specific area C22 is provided, and when a special game is executed, if a game ball enters the specific area C22, the special area C22 is shifted to the probability variation game state after the special game ends (so-called so-called configuration). , Tamasho Machine), and the special consecutive villa suggestion effect can be executed when there is a hold that becomes a big hit in which the second big prize opening C20 becomes long open in the distribution game execution round in the second main game hold It may be configured. Also, whether there is a hold that becomes reach fluctuation (long-time fluctuation, fluctuation with high expectation level of big hit, etc., for example, special effect A, special effect B, etc.) within the hold for the special consecutive resort suggestion effect It is also possible to produce an effect that swears whether or not, that is, if the reach fluctuation is a big hit or a loss, a special villa suggestion can be executed. In other words, is the reach fluctuation a big hit? It may be configured such that a special villa suggestion effect can be executed as an effect of determining whether or not reach variation is lost. By configuring as such, it is determined whether or not it will be a big hit depending on the effect display mode of the special consecutive villa suggestion effect (no big hit symbol or profit type is decided), or whether the maximum profit big hit is decided or not It will be notified whether the change pattern is selected or whether a specific effect is selected.

  Next, in step 4012, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special villa suggestion effect has been executed in the special game being executed. In step 4012, the background effect display control means SM23 adds information indicating that the trigger is on hold to the first maximum profit jackpot in the hold on the second main game side (this process makes the trigger hold). The content of the effect related to the symbol variation until the end of the symbol variation becomes the content of the rendezvous confirmed effect), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2426). Even in the case of No in step 4012, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2426). In addition, it may be configured to change the effect during the special game being executed when the special longage suggestion effect is executed, and the effect after the special game does not differ depending on whether or not the special longage suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured as described above, and it is desirable that the player can recognize that the player is going to play a long game immediately after the end of the special game. In addition, in the effect in the symbol variation related to the trigger hold after the end of a special game, the effect during execution of the special game related to the trigger hold, in the effect related to the symbol change from the end of the certain special game to the start of the change related to the trigger hold However, it may be configured to execute a special effect (an effect that is not executed when the on-hold consecutive resort is not executed), that is, even when the special consecutive resort suggestion is not executed in the certain special game. A special effect may be executed after the end of a certain special game until the end of the special game related to the trigger hold.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, when the limited frequency state is different, whether or not the display related to the remaining probability variation number is executed, and the execution contents of the executed effect contents (special effect A, etc.) , Etc. can be configured differently, and, by over-winning the special winning opening during a special game, it is possible to further enhance the fun of the game by configuring the subsequent production mode to be different. It will be possible.

(1) << Characteristic configuration in this embodiment >>
(1-1) Board Surface Configuration (1-1-1) Game Area In this example, the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which game balls flow down mainly on the left side of the board surface) Even if it is fired at a second firing strength that is stronger than the firing strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball flows down to the right side of the board surface), the game ball easily flows down to the center of the board surface. Is also configured to allow entry.

(1-1-2) Electric Power In this example, in contrast to the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball mainly flows down on the left side of the board), the second launch strength is stronger than the first launch strength. A main game start port (second main game start port) with an electric accessory is placed on a path that can flow when fired at a launch strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball flows down to the right side of the board) doing.

(1-1-3) Main Game Start Port In this example, the first main game start port is disposed substantially at the center of the game area, and the second main game start port is disposed on the right side of the game area. And (1) When the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball mainly flows down to the left side of the board surface) is launched, it is easy to enter the first main game start port, while the second main game It is difficult to enter the starting port. (2) When the second launch strength is greater than the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball flows down to the right side of the board surface), The first main game start port and the second main game start port are arranged so that it is easy to enter the game start port but difficult to enter the first main game start port.

(1-1-4) Grand Prize Winning Port (1-1-4-1) Position Two big winning holes are arranged side by side at the approximate center with the center (vertical direction) of the board as a reference.

(1-1-5) Display Device Although not particularly shown in this example, the jackpot symbol displayed on the main game symbol display device is a big game in the special game related to the jackpot symbol even if the player visually recognizes it. It is comprised so that it may become difficult to recognize the opening aspect of a winning opening.

(1-2) Control (1-2-1) Main side control (1-2-1-1) Launcher In this example, the launcher has a launcher that can adjust the launch intensity of the game ball by the player's operation. The launching device has a game ball firing interval (launch rate per shot when continuously launched) of 600 ms (100 game balls fired per minute). The launching device is not the main side control but the prize ball paying side control.

(1-2-1-2) When the power is cut off / when the power is turned on In this example, the power supply to the RAM is maintained by the backup power supply even when the power is cut off, so that the information at the time of the power interruption can be maintained. ing.

(1-2-1-3) Special Game In this example, the special game release pattern is determined based on the main game symbol that triggered the special game.

(1-2-1-4) Specific Game In this example, the probability variation gaming state is configured to end when a predetermined number of main game symbol variations have been made.

  In this example, after the special game is over, the game is in a time-saving game state until a predetermined number of main game symbol changes are made. As a result, the winning probability on the auxiliary game side is improved, the fluctuation time of the main game symbol / auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and further, the main game start port (second main game start) when the auxiliary game is won The opening time of the electric accessory placed in the mouth) is configured to be relatively longer than that in the normal gaming state. In the example, the release mode B) is configured to be selected only in the normal gaming state.

(1-2-1-5) Limited Frequency In this example, in the probability variation gaming state, the table that refers to the variation mode of the main game symbol is three stages (limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3 In this order) (so-called three-stage ST).

  In this example, the variation mode determination table to be referred to can be changed depending on the number of reservations in any one of the three stages ST (in this example, the first stage and the third stage). In other stages (second stage in this example), the variation mode determination table to be referred to is not changed depending on the number of holdings. In all stages, when the result of lottery determination and the number of reserved balls are the same, the contents of the tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side are the same.

  In this example, when there are fluctuations related to the loss of the main game symbol and there are two or three holding balls, the fluctuation time (3 seconds) that is most easily selected in the second stage of the three-stage ST and the third stage is the most. In the fluctuation time (5 seconds) that is easy to select, the third stage has a longer fluctuation time. On the other hand, in the case of fluctuations related to the big hit of the main game symbol and two or three holding balls, the fluctuation time (10 seconds) that is most easily selected in the second stage of the three stage ST and the most selected in the third stage In the easy fluctuation time (5 seconds), the second stage has a longer fluctuation time.

(1-2-1-6) Auxiliary game In this example, when the auxiliary game stop symbol is hit and the electric accessory is released, the release mode that is opened for the longest time in one release (in this example, open) Aspect B) can only be selected during the normal gaming state.

(1-2-2) Sub-main side control

(1-2-2-1) Pre-reading effect In this example, the pre-reading effect can be executed only during a predetermined period (31st to 80th fluctuations) during the specific game.

In this example, when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations straddles the effect stage, the pre-reading effect is not executed.
(1-2-2-2) Other effects

  In this example, if a hold on the second main game side occurs during a normal game state (non-stochastic game state and non-time-reduced game state), a specific game is being played when the second main game side is on hold. The effect content is determined using the effect content determination table similar to (especially the 31st to 70th changes).

  In this example, the effect of each change in a predetermined period (71st to 80th changes) during a specific game is configured to execute an effect for notifying the result of the success after executing a common effect regardless of the result of the success / failure. ing.

  In this example, based on the number of consecutive jackpots (not counted in the first hit), the effect displayed during the jackpot execution is a special effect, and the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is being opened for the longest time. When the big hit is due to the suspension generated by the entry, even if the big hit is the first hit, it is counted as the number of consecutive resorts.

(2) << Characteristic Configuration in Modification 1 from the Present Embodiment >>

(2-1) Pre-reading effect In the first modification from the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect can be executed even when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations crosses the end (or switching) of the stay stage. Has been. Also, each period {e.g., three periods of "short effect stage" (1st to 30th change), "long effect stage" (31st to 70th change), and "fixed effect stage" (71st to 80th change)} The frequency of occurrence of the pre-reading effect is different depending on.

  In addition, when a pre-reading effect occurs across the end (or switching) of the stay stage, the big hit expectation degree related to the pre-reading effect is higher than the case where the end of the predetermined period is not crossed. Has been.

  Moreover, when the stay stage is completed (or switched) during the execution of the pre-reading effects over a plurality of variations, the pre-reading effects can be interrupted.

(3) << Characteristic Configuration in Modification 2 from this Embodiment >>
(3-1) Limited frequency In the second modification from the present embodiment, a plurality of effect content determination tables are provided in a certain effect mode, and which effect content table is to be determined with reference to which effect content table during special games. The player can be arbitrarily selected by operating the sub input button.

(3-2) Power interruption return In the second modification from the present embodiment, when power interruption recovery, a certain mode is set as a default effect mode.

(3-3) Sub input button In the second modification from the present embodiment, the player is a member that can be operated, and a sub input button that can transmit operation input information to the sub main control unit is provided. Yes.

(4) << Characteristic Configuration in Modification 3 from the Present Embodiment >>

(4-1) Control (4-1-1) Main side control (4-1-1-1) Specific game In the modified example 3 from this embodiment, if a special game is won during a normal game, Assuming that the number of changes of the main game symbol that becomes a probability-variable game state after execution of the special game is a predetermined number A (80 in this example), the change of the main game symbol that becomes a time-reduced game after execution of the special game There are a predetermined number A (80 times in this example) and a predetermined number B (30 times in this example).

(4-1-1-2) Limited Frequency In the third modification from the present embodiment, the number of changes in the main game symbol that becomes a time-reduced game after the execution of the special game is the predetermined number A (in this example, 80 (In particular, the specific game related to the long specific game symbol), the three-stage ST is configured to refer to the table in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3, When the number of changes of the main game symbol that becomes a time-reduced game after execution of the special game is the predetermined number B (30 times in this example) (specific game related to the short specific game symbol), the limited frequency table 1 The limited frequency table 4 is referred to without reference.

  In addition, in the case where the number of changes of the main game symbol that becomes a time-reduced game after execution of the special game is the predetermined number A (80 in this example) (particularly, a specific game related to a similar short specific game symbol) The three-stage ST is configured to refer to the limited frequency table 4 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3 in this order, and in the first stage, the main game symbol that becomes a time-saving game after the execution of the special game The same limited frequency table 4 is referred to when the number of fluctuations is the predetermined number B (in this example, 30 times) (a specific game related to the short specific game symbol).

  In the specific game related to the short specific game design, after referring to the limited frequency table 4 different from the limited frequency table 1 referred to in the first stage of the specific game related to the long specific game design, the long specific game design is displayed. The main game table 3 different from the limited frequency table 2 referred to in the second stage of the specific game is referred to.

  In the third modified example from the present embodiment, when the short specific game symbol is won in the normal game, the number of times the main game symbol is changed to a time-reduced game after the special game is a predetermined number B (30 in this example). The limited frequency table 4 is a table related to the variation mode determination to be referred to. On the other hand, when the short specific game symbol is won during the specific game (in the probability variation game state or in the time shortening game state), the number of times of change of the main game symbol that becomes the time reduction game after the special game is the predetermined number of times A ( In this example, it is 80 times), and the table for determining the variation mode to be referred to is the three-stage ST of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3.

(5) << Characteristic configuration in Modification 4 from this embodiment >>

(5-1) Special Game In the fourth modification from the present embodiment, the special game release pattern is determined based on the main game symbol that triggered the special game. In addition, the opening pattern of the special game consisting of a predetermined number of unit games (2R in this example) and the opening pattern of the small hit game are configured to be substantially the same opening pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the special game or the small win is won by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning opening.

(5-2) Specific Game In the fourth modification from the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is won at the time of the specific game, an effect of notifying that the remaining number of fluctuations of the probability fluctuation is maintained is executed. . In addition, if a short open big hit symbol is won at the time of a specific game, an effect that informs that the remaining number of fluctuations of probability fluctuation is reset is executed, so that it can be an effect mode that differs depending on the number of remaining fluctuations of the current probability fluctuation. It is configured.

(5-3) Limited frequency In the modified example 4 from this embodiment, the short opening big hit (4A, 4B which becomes 2R special game) and the small hit are provided, and the opening mode is substantially the same. Yes. In addition, when the short opening big hit is won during the three stage ST, after the short opening big hit, the first stage table of the three stage ST (in this example, the limited frequency table 1) is referred to (in the limited frequency counter). On the other hand, when winning a small hit during the three-stage ST, the limited frequency table referred to at the time of winning the small hit is continuously referred to (the limited frequency counter value is maintained). (However, if the variation won in the small hit is the final variation of the limited frequency table that is referenced, the limited frequency table corresponding to the next stage is referred after the small hit).

(5-4) Production during specific game In the modified example 4 from the present embodiment, when winning a small hit during a specific game, the probability variation re-set failure production is performed as the probability variation re-set failure production (in the probability variation game state). If the winning is a short-open big hit during a specific game, the remaining will be left as a promising re-setting success effect. It is configured to execute an effect of informing that the probability variation count is reset (updated to a value set after the special game). In addition, the probability change re-set success effect that is executed when a short opening big hit is won during a specific game is configured so that different effects are executed depending on the number of remaining probability changing times when winning the short opening big hit. .

(6) << Characteristic configuration in Modification 5 from this embodiment >>

(6-1) Limited frequency In the modified example 5 from the present embodiment, in order to secure the time for performing the stage transition effect, in the final variation at each stage (in this example, the first stage and the second stage), It is configured to refer to a dedicated variation mode determination table in which a variation mode (variation time) that can execute the stage transition effect is selected.

(6-2) Stage transition effect In the fifth modification from the present embodiment, when the final change in the stage is lost, the stage suggests a stage transition (stage transition effect). Has been. Further, since the stage transition effect is not executed at the time of winning, if the stage transition effect does not occur due to the final change of the effect stage, it becomes definite that the final change is a change related to the big hit.

(7) << Characteristic configuration in Modification 6 from this embodiment >>
(7-1) Big Bonus Symbol In Modification 6 from this embodiment, the big hit symbol (5A, 5B, 7A, 7B) that shifts to the probability varying gaming state after the end of the special game, and the probability varying gaming state after the special game ends. There are jackpot symbols (4A, 4B) that do not shift to.

(7-2) Limited Frequency In Modification 6 from the present embodiment, the switching timing of the variation mode determination table to be referenced can be different depending on the jackpot symbol.

  In the modified example 6 from the present embodiment, there is a pattern related to switching of the variation mode determination table to be referenced, which is selected only in the case of the probability variation gaming state in the specific gaming state.

(8) << Characteristic configuration in Modification 7 from this embodiment >>

(8-1) Special Game Completion Demo In Modification 7 from this embodiment, after the opening time of the big prize opening related to the final round of special games is over, the special game period is changed until it becomes possible to change the main game symbol. The game end demo can be displayed. In addition, the execution time of the special game end demonstration is configured to be determined based on the jackpot symbol related to the special game.

  Also, when there is a big hit hold in the hold (especially in the hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, the special game ends for a period until the timing of the substantial change end of the big hit hold. The same (or substantially the same) image as the demo can be displayed on the front layer of the display area.

  In addition, when there is no big hit hold in the hold (especially in the hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, the period until all of the hold existing at that time ends variably, The same (or substantially the same) image as the special game end demonstration is configured to be displayed on the front layer of the display area.

(9) << Characteristic configuration in the second embodiment >>

(9-1) Board Surface Configuration In the second embodiment, a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter is provided inside the second grand prize opening C20.

(9-2) Control (9-2-1) Main side control (9-2-1-1) Special game / special game In the second embodiment, during special game {or a big prize having a specific area C22 Period in which the mouth is open (if the grand prize opening is opened and closed several times in one round, the interval period that is a temporary closing period in the round or after the opening of the big prize opening in a certain round If a game ball entering the specific area C22 is detected during the period including the period for detecting the discharge of the game ball, etc.}}, it is possible to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is completed. Has been.

  In the second embodiment, when there is a game ball in a specific area during a special game, the probability variation gaming state and the predetermined number of times A (80 in this example) after the special game. A time-saving game of A (80 times in this example) is made, and the three-stage ST limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3 is referred to. On the other hand, if there is no game ball in a specific area during a special game, after the special game, a non-stochastic game state and a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example) are reduced in time, The game table 3 is referred to.

  In the second embodiment, the number of time-reduced games that are given when a probability variation game state is set after a special game is a predetermined number X (80 in this example), and a non-probability variation game state is set after a special game The number of time-reduced games given to is a predetermined number Y (50 in this example), and XY = 30 times coincides with 30 times of the number of fluctuations in the first stage of the three-stage ST. Yes.

(9.1) << Characteristic Configuration in Modification 1 from Second Embodiment >>

(9.1-1) Board Surface Configuration Modification 1 from the second embodiment has a 2-2 main game start opening B30 into which a game ball can enter.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, there is a distribution start port unit C50 that alternately distributes the entered game balls to the first main game start port A10 and the 2-2 main game start port B30. Yes.

(9.1-2) Control (9.1-2-1) Main-side Control In the first modification from the second embodiment, the entry of a game ball into the 2-2 main game start port B30 is detected. In this case, the second main game random number is obtained, and the second main game side can be put on hold.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, the main game suspension is digested in the order in which the main game suspension occurs (so-called winning order digestion).

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, after the start of a specific game, 1 to 8 (the maximum total number of the first main game side and the second main game side on hold) variation, 9th variation, 10 to 70 variation The 71st to 80th changes are configured to determine the change mode with reference to different change mode determination tables (limited frequency tables). In the 1st to 8th fluctuations, the variation mode determination table to be referred to is different depending on whether or not the game is a specific game immediately after the first hit. In addition, in the ninth variation, when the variation is a loss variation, only one variation mode is selected. The loss variation at the first to eighth variation after the start of the specific game is configured to have a relatively short variation time (in this example, 1 second).

(9.1-2-2) Sub-side control In the first modification from the second embodiment, after the start of the specific game, 1 to 8 (the maximum total number of reserves on the first main game side and the second main game side) ) In the case of a big hit at the time of change, after the common effect is executed during the change, the effect corresponding to the content of the big hit is executed. It should be noted that the series of effects can be selected if it is a big hit on the first main game side during the specific game.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, after the start of a specific game (especially the probability variation / time-reduced game state), the 8th (total number of pending totals on the first main game side and the second main game side) It is possible to notify the player that the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state with effects related to the next variation (variation of the ninth variation after the start of a specific game) that has started to be all due to a loss variation. It is configured as follows.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, after the start of a specific game (especially the probability variation / time-reduced gaming state), the tenth and subsequent changes (the maximum total number of holds on the first main game side and the second main game side) After informing the player that the game will shift to the probability variation gaming state), the player can be notified of the upper limit variation number (remaining number of times) of the specific game.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the trigger hold that changes the hold display mode is generated by lottery, either the hold before the trigger hold or the hold after the hold that occurs after the trigger hold is displayed. It is comprised so that an aspect can also be changed.

(9.2) << Characteristic Configuration in Third Embodiment >>

(9.2-1) Board Surface Configuration In the third embodiment, there is a large winning opening C30 into which a game ball can be inserted, and the number of large winning holes is one.

  Inside the special winning opening C30, a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter is provided.

  Inside the big prize opening C30 is a member that restricts entry into the specific area C22, and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the specific area C22 and a game ball difficult to enter the specific area C22 ( A shielding member C22c is provided that can be in a closed state (or inaccessible).

(9.2-2) Control (9.2-2-1) Main Side Control In the third embodiment, there is only one opening pattern of the shielding member C22c, and the opening mode of the shielding member C22c in each round is as follows. , Either the opening pattern or always closed. Note that the driving of the shielding member C22c related to the opening pattern ends the opening of the special winning opening in the round (the completion of the predetermined opening pattern of the large winning opening or the predetermined number of balls entering the large winning opening). After that, the shield member C22c is closed when the predetermined period has elapsed, and the shielding member C22c is closed.

  In the third embodiment, when a discharge ball abnormality occurs, the next round is not shifted (the discharge ball detection period is extended), the discharge ball abnormality is recovered (the discharge ball detection period ends), and the preparation period After the elapse of time, it is configured to shift to the next round.

(9.2-3) Limited Frequency In the third embodiment, the main game table 3, the limited frequency table 1, as tables that can be referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol related to the second main game side, There are five tables, a limited frequency table 2, a limited frequency table 3, and a limited frequency table A, and the average variation time when referring to each variation mode determination table is the main game table 3 when the second main game side hits. Is 55.1 seconds, limited frequency table 1 is 2.0 seconds, limited frequency table 2 is 55.1 seconds, limited frequency table 3 is 5.0 seconds, limited frequency table A is 45.8 seconds, When the second main game loses and the number of holding balls is 0 or 1, the main game table 3 is 8.7 seconds, the limited frequency table 1 is 1.4 seconds, the limited frequency table 2 is 14.9 seconds, the limited frequency Table 3 is limited to 5.0 seconds The fixed frequency table A is 4.3 seconds. When the second main game side is lost and there are 2 or 3 holding balls, the main game table 3 is 8.7 seconds, and the limited frequency table 1 is 1.4. Second, the limited frequency table 2 is 8.7 seconds, the limited frequency table 3 is 5.0 seconds, and the limited frequency table A is 4.3 seconds.

(9.2-4) Sub-side control In the third embodiment, when the discharge ball abnormality occurs, it is configured to notify that the discharge ball abnormality has occurred.

(9.3) << Characteristic Configuration in Modification 1 from Third Embodiment >>

(9.3-2) Control (9.3-2-1) Main side control In the first modification from the third embodiment, there are a plurality of opening patterns of the shielding member C22c, and the opening of the shielding member C22c is performed. The mode is configured to be determined by the number of rounds in the special game being executed, regardless of the main game symbol that is stopped.
(10) ≪Change mode≫

  Note that the configuration of the present embodiment is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The following are possible modifications from the present embodiment.

(10-1) Board surface configuration (10-1-1) Game area As a configuration of the change mode, the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which game balls mainly flow down on the left side of the board surface) A path (for example, arranged on the right side of the board surface) through which the game ball flows when it is fired at a second firing strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball mainly flows down to the right side of the board surface) is stronger than the firing intensity, A section having a width exceeding one gaming ball and less than two gaming balls, that is, a gaming ball that has entered the section later does not overtake the gaming ball that has previously entered the section. Configure as follows. A distribution winning opening and a normal winning opening are provided downstream of the exit of the section. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid a situation where a player enters a ball that greatly exceeds the upper limit of the number of balls entered in one round of the special game. In addition, an electric accessory is also provided downstream of the outlet of the section. By constituting in this way, excessive entry can be avoided while the electric accessory is open. In addition, the game area may have a specific area in which a special game is started when a game ball enters after the stoppage of the big hit symbol, separately from the big prize opening related to the distributed game. Good.

(10-1-2) Electric combination In this example, the electric combination is provided only at the second main game start opening, but both main game start openings may be provided only at the first main game start opening. Even if it is provided at any of the main game start ports, it may not be provided.

(10-1-3) Main game start port In this example, the first main game start port is arranged at the approximate center of the game area, and the second main game start port is arranged on the right side of the game area. It is not limited. For example, a mode in which a second main game start port is provided above or below (for example, directly below) the first main game start port (in this case, a second main game start port is installed directly below the first main game start port and (2) The main game start opening may be configured not to win the second main game start opening when the electric combination is attached when the electric play is closed). A mode provided on the right side of the position of the two main game start ports, a mode where only two start ports are provided (that is, a conventional first type), a mode where a plurality of one or both start ports are provided (for example, the first main game start port) The first main game start port A and the first main game start port B are provided, and a random number is acquired from a common random number generator regardless of which is won).

(10-1-4) Grand prize opening (10-1-4-1) Position (10-1-4-1-1) Vertical direction Up and down so that the two big prize openings overlap on the basis of the vertical direction You may arrange. In addition, either of the big winning openings may be on the top. Further, even if they do not overlap vertically with respect to the vertical direction, one large prize winning opening may be arranged on the upstream side along the flow path, and the other large winning prize opening may be arranged downstream thereof.
(10-1-4-1-2) Left and right direction The second firing strength (eg, the right side of the board on the right side of the board surface) that is higher than the first launch strength (eg, the strength of the game ball flowing down on the left side of the board surface). The big winning opening may be arranged at a position where it is easy to enter with a strength at which the game ball flows down. Moreover, you may provide one big winning opening in the left or the right on the basis of the position of the other big winning opening. For example, an aspect in which one big prize opening is provided on the right side with the center (vertical direction) of the board surface as a reference, and the other big prize opening is provided on the right side thereof. An aspect in which one big prize opening is provided, and the other big prize opening is provided on the right side of the board, one big prize opening is provided on the left side with respect to the center (vertical direction) of the board surface, and the other big prize opening is provided on the right side. Aspect to be provided, with the center (vertical direction) of the board surface as a reference, one large winning opening is provided on the left side, and the other large winning opening is provided on the left side, and the center of the board surface (vertical direction) is substantially centered An embodiment in which one large winning opening is provided on the left side and the other large winning opening is provided on the left side thereof.
(10-1-4-2) Size and shape In this example, the size of the distribution prize winning opening and the normal prize winning opening are substantially the same, but one size or shape may be different from the other size. .
(10-1-4-3) Type In this example, the first grand prize winning port and the second grand prize winning port are tilting type big winning mouths, but one or both of them is another type, for example, a game board (game The player can take a state protruding from the player side (hereinafter referred to as the advance state) and a state retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state). It may be a winning opening (so-called “velo-type attacker”), single-wing or double-wing type attacker (so-called “wing-type attacker” in a conventional type 2 game machine).

(10-1-5) Others In this example, although not particularly illustrated, a round number indicator lamp may be provided for displaying the number of rounds executed in the big hit.

  The light guide plate display device, which is an optical device mainly composed of a light guide plate and a light emitting element and produces an effect by surface light emission of the light guide plate, is viewed from the front of the effect display device (front side) and the rear surface of the center decoration. You may comprise so that it may provide in (back side). The mounting position of the light guide plate display device is not limited to this, and may be provided on the front side from the position as viewed from the player, for example, on the front surface of the center decoration, the front surface or the rear surface of the transparent plate, and further transparent. It is good also as a light-guide plate display apparatus which provided the display pattern in board itself and made the transparent plate the light-guide plate.

(10-2) Control-related (10-2-1) Main-side control (10-2-1-1) Launching device The launching device of the game ball will release the game ball when an abnormal discharge ball is detected or illegally detected. It may be configured to cancel. The launching device is preferably not the main side control but the prize ball paying side control, but may be the main side control.

(10-2-1-2) When power is turned off and turned on An information saving area is provided to back up game-related information at the time of power interruption, and backup power is supplied to the information saving area when power is interrupted. May be. In this case, a process that can acquire and restore the game-related information backed up in the information saving area is executed at the time of power recovery.

(10-2-1-3) Special game

  In this example, although not particularly shown, special games of the same round may be executed at the time of a big hit. In that case, you may comprise so that the player profit for every jackpot may differ by changing the opening mode of a big winning opening.

  In addition, the types of opening of the special winning opening in the special game may be reduced or increased. In addition, in one round, an “opening / closing mode” may be provided that repeats the opening operation for a predetermined time until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time is reached).

  In this example, the case where the small hit is not provided and the case where the small hit is provided on both the first main game side and the second main game side are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the first main game side is provided. Or provided only on the second main game side.

  The release pattern of the special game may be determined using a reference table, or the special game may be configured to be executed with a predetermined release pattern.

  The opening pattern of the special game may be determined by lottery instead of being determined based on the winning symbol. For example, a mode in which a special area in which a special game is started when a game ball enters after the jackpot symbol is stopped is provided separately from the second big prize opening (or the first big prize opening). With regard to the above, a random number is acquired upon the passage of the specific area, and based on the acquired random number, the content of the special game to be started and / or the game state to be transferred after the special game is finished can be determined. May be.

(10-2-1-4) Specific game When a special game is entered and a specific area is entered, the probability-variable game state that continues until the next jackpot occurs after the special game ends You may comprise so that it may transfer. Further, when the number of continuous transitions to the probability variation gaming state reaches a predetermined number, it may be configured to forcibly transition to the non-probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game after reaching the predetermined number of times. In addition, when a falling lottery executed for each change of the main game symbol is won, it may be configured to be able to shift to a non-probability variation game state.

  Although not particularly illustrated in the present example, even in the probability variation gaming state that continues until the next big hit, the variation mode determination table (for example, referred to for determining the variation mode as described in the above embodiment) (for example, The configuration related to the switching of the limited frequency table is applicable, but unlike the stochastic variation gaming state with a limited number of variations (so-called ST), the special game end point (when there is a big hit hold in the hold) In other words, since the end timing of the probability variation gaming state cannot be predicted, the period for referring to the variation mode determination table that is finally referred to (for example, the third stage in the three-stage switching) does not define the end period {or It is preferable that an extremely large number of times (for example, 65535 times) that does not substantially end is set as the upper limit value of the number of fluctuations}. . Also, in the probability variation gaming state that continues until the next big hit, if the next big hit does not become the next big hit (so-called addictive state), continue until the next time to prevent the player from feeling stressed If a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 30 fluctuations) have not been made a big hit during the probability fluctuation gaming state to be selected, the fluctuation selected from the fluctuation mode determination table referred to so far It is preferable that the variation mode determination table to be referred to is switched so that the variation mode is determined with reference to another variation mode determination table having a short average value of time (in particular, the variation time at the time of loss).

  In this example, during the execution of the special game, if there is no entry to the specific area, it is configured to shift to the non-stochastic variation gaming state / time reduction gaming state, but is not limited to this, During the execution of a special game, if there is no entry to a specific area (in other words, after the special game is over, the game does not enter the probability variation game state), so that it does not enter the time-reduced game state. It may be configured.

(10-2-1-5) Limited frequency

  In this example, in FIG. 10, the process of subtracting the limited frequency counter value (the process of step 1413) is executed after the process of step 1450. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the process of step 1420 (variation) It may be configured to execute after the time has expired.

  In this example, in FIG. 10, after the process of step 1430 (when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol), a process of setting a predetermined number of times in the limited frequency counter (the process of step 1431) is executed. The present invention is not limited, and a process of setting a predetermined number of times to the limited frequency counter may be executed after the end of the special game (for example, after step 1656 in FIG. 17).

  In the probability variation gaming state, the variation mode on the second main game side may be different depending on the number of reserved balls on the first main game side. For example, in the first stage of the three-stage ST, the first main game The table that the second main game side refers to when the number of reserved balls on the game side is 0 is the limited frequency table A, and when the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is 1 to 4, the second main game side refers to it. The table may be a limited frequency table B, and the limited frequency table A and the limited frequency table B may be configured such that the average value of the variation time is different (for example, the limited frequency table A has a longer average variation time). May be configured). Note that, as in this example, as shown in FIGS. 13, 37, and 46, if the configuration contents of the table to be referenced are different depending on the number of holds, for example, the table to be referred to when the number of holds is 0 to 1. A reference table group including a table to be referred to when the number of holdings is 2 to 3 is switched according to the number of fluctuations since a predetermined symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) is stopped. At the start, the table to be referred to when the number of holdings is 0 to 1 or the table to be referred to when the holding number is 2 to 3 is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of holding numbers, variation mode determination random numbers, special figure types (whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side), etc. in a certain table. The table may be configured so that the variation mode can be determined using the above information as a key.

  In this example, in the probability variation gaming state, the three types of limited frequency tables are sequentially referred to as the three-stage ST. However, the number of the limited frequency tables to be referred to is not limited to this and may be any number. . Further, although the table to be referred to is always constant in each stage, the present invention is not limited to this, and the table to be referenced may be changed even in one stage.

  In the present embodiment, the number of changes of the main game symbol staying at each stage in the three stages ST is fixed (first stage 30 times, second stage 40 times, third stage 10 times), but is not limited to this. It does not have to be fixed. For example, it may be configured so that the number of changes in the main game symbol staying at each stage can be different depending on the type of the main game symbol that triggered the special game, or the player can select (for example, the sub input button It may be configured to be selectable based on an operation or a game ball entering a specific entrance.

  A parallel frequency lottery on the first main game side and the second main game side is configured to be executable, and a limited frequency table (variation mode) referred to by a lottery at the time of winning the special game or after the special game is won. The determination table may be different. For example, if the jackpot symbol is a specific jackpot symbol, only the first variation on the first main game side after the execution of the special game is set to the long variation A (for example, 300 seconds), and if it is not the specific jackpot symbol, the special game is performed. Later, only the first fluctuation on the first main game side is set as the long fluctuation B (for example, 50 seconds), and the average fluctuation time is shorter than the long fluctuation A and the long fluctuation B on the second main game side (for example, 5 Second) table may be referred to. In this case, it is desirable that the special game triggered by the second main game symbol is more advantageous for the player than the first main game symbol.

  The special game according to the second main game symbol is more advantageous for the player than the special game according to the first main game symbol, and the reserved ball according to the second main game symbol is more advantageous than the reserved ball according to the first main game symbol. In the case of a gaming machine configured to digest first with priority, when a special game is won in a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced game state, and a transition is made to a probability-change game state and a time-reduced game state Alternatively, only the first change of the main game symbol may be a long-time change (for example, a change of 15 seconds). By configuring in this way, it becomes easy to store the reserved balls of the second main game symbol that is advantageous to the player during the long-term fluctuation of the main game symbol immediately after the transition to the specific game state. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect during the first one variation is the same effect as the special game end demonstration effect, and the reserved ball of the second main game symbol accumulates without knowing after the special game ends. The player may have an illusion if he is present.

  After the special game is over, the probability variation game state with a limited number of times (so-called ST) and transition to a specific game state A that is a time-reduced game state with a predetermined probability (for example, 70%). It is configured to shift to a specific gaming state B which is a gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and the same (substantially the same) is used to determine the variation mode of the main gaming symbol at the start of either the specific gaming state A or the specific gaming state B ) Or a similar limited frequency table, and in the case of the specific gaming state A, the average value of the number of times of variation for determining the variation mode with reference to the limited frequency table is larger than in the case of the specific gaming state B. May be. When configured in this way, the specific game state A and the specific game state B have substantially the same production mode, and it is difficult to determine which specific game state the player is just looking at the production. desirable. By configuring in this way, the player can specify a high profit for the player because the predetermined number of times (the effect based on the variation mode determined with reference to the limited frequency table) is long. It can be detected that there is a high possibility of staying in the gaming state A. Similarly, the greater the number of times of variation referring to the limited frequency table, the higher the degree of expectation that the number of times of variation that results in a time-saving game is large (the number of times of time reduction is large).

  The limited frequency table to be referred to can be changed according to the number of consecutive wins for a special game (number of consecutive games) during the probability varying game state (or / and the time-saving game state) without shifting to the normal game state. (For example, as the number of consecutive resorts increases, a shorter variation time becomes easier to select). In the case of a multi-stage ST (for example, a three-stage ST), the number of stays at each stage may be different depending on the number of consecutive villas (for example, in the case of a three-stage ST, the second-stage villa is one stage. : 30 rotations, 2 steps: 40 rotations, 3 steps: 10 rotations, the 5th stage is 1 step: 60 rotations, 2 steps: 20 rotations, 3 steps: 10 rotations, etc.).

(10-2-2) Sub-main side control

(10-2-2-1) Pre-reading effect In this example, the pre-reading effect can be executed only during a predetermined period (31st to 80th fluctuations) during the specific game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a prefetch effect can be performed even if it is outside the said predetermined period. In the case of such a configuration, the frequency of occurrence of the pre-reading effect may be different depending on each period (for example, three periods of the 1st to 30th variation, the 31st to 70th variation, and the 71st to 80th variation).

  Moreover, you may have the prefetching effect only for each said period, and may have the common prefetching effect which can be performed in two or more periods.

  In addition, when the prefetch effect is configured to be executable in a predetermined period (the 71st to 80th fluctuations) during the specific game, when the prefetch effect is executed, the result of the change during the predetermined period does not matter. The common effect {for example, the effect of prompting the sub input button to be pressed (see the image diagram in FIG. 24)} may not be executed (for example, the pre-reading effect is executed instead of the common effect).

  Even when the prefetching effect over a plurality of variations crosses the end of the predetermined period, the prefetching effect may be executed. In such a configuration, when a pre-reading effect occurs across the end of the predetermined period, the big hit expectation degree related to the pre-reading effect is higher than the case where the end of the predetermined period is not crossed. It may be configured. In addition, it is possible to execute an effect as if the completed predetermined period has been extended (for example, an effect that can be selected during the completed predetermined period) or an effect that is not selected in the stay stage where the user is currently staying. May be. When configured in this way, when the extension effect is executed, it may be configured so that it is deterministic that there is a big hit in the hold.

  In addition, as an example of an effect at the time of executing the pre-reading effect that makes it deterministic that there is a big hit in the hold, the effect of the effect stage that has already been completed may be executed as the pre-reading effect ( For example, the pre-reading effect of the long effect stage is executed on the fixed effect stage).

  In this example, although not particularly illustrated, the contents of the presentation may be made different depending on the number of suspensions at the time of digestion of the hold (so-called trigger hold) that triggered the execution of the prefetch effect. For example, when the number of holdings is small (0 or 1), even if the trigger holding is lost holding, the roaring effect is executed, while when the number of holdings is large (2 or 3), the trigger holding is performed. If the loss is on hold, the roaring effect may not be executed (or an effect with a relatively low expectation is executed). In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the roaring effect executed at the time of digestion of the loss hold is configured to execute the same (substantially similar) effect as the roaring effect that can be executed when the number of holds is large ( For example, the same variation time).

(10-2-2-2) Reservation-in-reed villa Although not specifically shown in this example, a special game end demo (displayed from the end of the special game until the next main game symbol can be changed) You may comprise so that a production | presentation) can be performed. In the case of such a configuration, in particular, when there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold at the end of the special game (in the case of preferential digestion of the second main game symbol, in the hold of the second main game symbol) It may be configured as if a big hit is suddenly generated immediately after the end of the special game by continuing the same effect as the special game end demonstration until the big hit is suspended or the fluctuation is stopped. In addition, in such a configuration, even when there is no big hit in the hold, the same game as the special game end demonstration is continued, so that a sense of expectation of becoming a reserved game in the hold You may comprise so that a production can be performed. In addition, when continuing the production substantially the same as the special game end demonstration, it is preferable that the production is displayed for a period of time equal to or longer than at least one change.

  In this example, although not shown in particular, in a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined round, a special game end demonstration) from the start of the special game until the change of the main game symbol becomes possible, it will be a big hit within the hold. When there is a hold, you may comprise so that the effect which alert | reports that (the in-hold extended villa advance notice effect) can be performed. In addition, when shifting from the normal gaming state (the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state) to the probability variation gaming state, it may be configured not to execute the on-hold extended resort notice effect. In such a configuration, a dedicated effect (or an effect that is executed in a predetermined situation such as a situation where the remaining ST number is small) may be executed at the time of the suspension of the big hit. In addition, the dedicated effect may be configured to be executed with a relatively short variation time compared to the average value of the variation times of the other jackpot effects. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called a ball-type gaming machine) that enters a probability-variable gaming state after the special game when a game ball enters the specific area during the special game, the specific It may be configured such that a game ball in the area can be executed by entering the game area in advance in the reserved area (the presence or absence of the in-hold area may differ depending on whether or not a specific area has been entered) For this reason, it is desirable to notify the on-hold range resort when the player enters the ball. For example, it is scheduled to win the winning lottery regardless of whether the game is in the probability variation game state or the non-probability variation game state. In such a case, it is possible to notify the on-hold consecutive resort without being triggered by the entry). As a notification method, for example, a game ball is placed in the specific area by an effect display device SG or an effect device provided in front of the effect display device SG (for example, a so-called movable object for effect or a light guide plate). When it is configured to be able to execute an effect of notifying that the specific area has been entered at the timing of entering the ball, the effect device for executing the on-hold extended resort notice effect and the entry to the specific area The effect device that performs the effect of notifying that the ball has been made may be the same (for example, “V” is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect of notifying that the ball has been entered into the specific area. When displaying the drawn image, the character color of the “V” is made different to suggest or notify the presence or absence of an on-hold consecutive resort, or different from the image drawn with the “V”. The image suggests whether there is a reserved renzo (For example, the movable body accessory for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where the production can be performed, or the light is applied to the light guide plate to form an image on the light guide plate.) When performing an effect of notifying that a specific area has been entered, such as by floating, an image that suggests or notifies the presence or absence of an on-hold extended villa is displayed on the effect display device SG, etc. ).

  Also, in the distribution game execution round in the special game, the prize display device SG or the effect device provided in front of the effect display device SG (for example, a so-called movable object for the effect, a light guide plate, etc.) An effect that prompts the player to launch (and enter) a game ball in the mouth (for example, an effect of displaying “Aim at V” on the effect display device SG, that is, a “firing instruction effect”) is configured to be executable. May be. In such a configuration, the “launch instruction effect” may be executed only at the time of the first hit, or may be configured such that the notification mode and the effect mode are different at the time of the first hit and at the time of the villa. In addition, before executing the “launch instruction effect” in the special game, an effect that suggests to the player the expectation that a round that is easy to enter the specific area will be executed (for example, “V button is obtained by pressing the button”). It may be configured to execute an effect that displays “Shiro!”. Further, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation to the player may be configured to be executed only at the first hit.

  In this example, although not shown in particular, if there is a big hit in a situation where there is a big hit in the hold (when it becomes a renage in the hold), the effect related to the big hit is a probability until the next big hit It may be configured to be able to be executed as a big hit with a high expectation that the floating gaming state will continue (for example, in the ball type game machine shown in the second embodiment, the game to the specific area C22 Even when the ball has not been entered, if the game is to be held within the hold, an effect is performed as if the game ball has entered the specific area C22 and the state has shifted to the probability variation gaming state. May be configured to obtain).

(10-2-2-3) Other effects In this example, it is configured to have a dedicated effect for a predetermined period during a specific game. It may be configured so that it can occur (even if the main game symbol fluctuates). In that case, the frequency of occurrence of the dedicated effect is different between the variation on the first main game side and the variation on the second main game side (for example, the variation on the first main game side is the variation on the second main game side). The frequency of occurrence of the dedicated effect may be higher than in the case of

  In this example, although not particularly illustrated, an effect suggesting that a predetermined period in a specific game is over (the predetermined period is switched) is executed (for example, executed at the last change during the predetermined period). You may comprise so that it can do. In the case of such a configuration, a part or all of the contents of the suggestion effect may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect is executed or not. Moreover, you may comprise so that the said suggestion effect may not be performed with the fluctuation | variation which becomes a big hit.

  In this example, although not shown in particular, a part or all of the production mode during a specific game is displayed at a predetermined timing during the special game or after the special game (for example, the special game end demonstration time, the first after the special game ends). The player may be selectable (for example, selectable by operating the sub input button SB) immediately before or after the limited frequency table to be switched is changed. In the case of such a configuration, when a power interruption occurs after the selection of the player, a predetermined production mode (for example, a production mode set as a default) that does not depend on the player's selection after the interruption is restored. ), A part or all of the effects during the specific game may be executed. In addition, the effect mode is configured so that it can be selected only at the time of the first hit, and in the specific game after the special game, the effect mode selected at the time of the first hit (or the effect mode automatically determined by the order, random number, etc.) You may comprise so that an effect can be performed. Further, the effect that prompts the selection of the effect mode may be displayed only at the time of first hit, and the effect related to the specific game after the special game after that may be configured to be selectable by satisfying a predetermined condition. , Can be selected by a certain number of consecutive villas (big hit), or can be selected (for example, during a big hit symbol stop display), start a big hit (during a big hit start demo display) or during a big hit (during a specific round) , A sub-input button operation) may be configured to be selectable or switchable (a hidden command that does not display an effect prompting the operation but can be selected or switched by performing a predetermined operation) May be). For example, after the opening of the special prize opening relating to special games, during the period from when the start of variation of the main game symbol is permitted, “sub input button pressed” → “sub input button pressed” → “input under cross key” → Select “Enter the bottom of the cross key” → “Enter the top of the cross key” → “Enter the top of the cross key” to re-select the effect mode selected at the first hit (or automatically select a different mode) You may comprise so that it may become possible. In addition, for example, as an effect during a specific game (or during a special game), an effect mode that switches according to the number of consecutive games (for example, every time the special character 1 becomes a big hit that shifts to a probability variation game state after the end of the special game, the enemy character 1 When the effect mode is selected at the time of first hit, the selection operation can be performed by holding down the sub input button when selecting the effect mode. , Succeeding the transition stage of the stage that was reached at the time of the previous series of big hits (a group of consecutive big hits without changing the main game symbol in the non-time-reduced / non-stochastic game state) (For example, the effect mode starts from an effect of defeating the character 5).

  In this example, although not specifically shown, the first change after a special game (especially, a special game state → a special game in which a probability change game state and a time reduction game state) is a special effect (for example, a long scale) You may comprise so that it can perform (production). Moreover, you may comprise so that an effect substantially the same as a special game completion | finish demo can be performed.

  In this example, although not shown in particular, the number of times of time-reduced games may be limited to a plurality of patterns (for example, three patterns of 30, 50, and 80 fluctuations). Without giving a notification, the effect is performed as if the limited number of time-reduced games has increased in a predetermined period after the start of the time-reduced game (for example, “short time + 5 times!” Is displayed) You may comprise so that the limitation number of actual time reduction games may be alert | reported by the end of a period.

  In this example, although not particularly illustrated, it may be configured so that the player can select a period and an order for referring to a certain effect content determination table during a specific game (for example, the sub input button SB is selected). Press to select the production content table).

  In this example, the number of consecutive resorts in a specific gaming state is counted, and when the number of consecutive resorts reaches a predetermined number, the ending effect display is executed. It may be configured so that various effects can be executed according to the game. For example, as the number of consecutive games increases, the effect mode in the specific game changes (the background changes, the opponent changes, etc.) It may be configured.

  In this example, in the success or failure stage in the fixed time effect, the effect that prompts the button operation and the effect that the background display color changes are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various effects such as an effect of whether or not (becomes reach) may be executed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the first main game symbol and / or the second main game symbol lose symbol (the main game symbol selected when the result of the lottery is lost) is a plurality of types (for example, It is also possible to have a configuration in which the loss B and the loss B are two) (in terms of the selection rate, it is preferable that the loss B is lower than the loss A). It is possible to adopt a specific example.

<Specific example 1>
When the loss A is selected, the variation mode selection candidate and / or the variation mode selection rate at the time of determining the variation mode of the main game symbol is different depending on the number of reservations immediately before the suspension digestion (in other words, the number of reservations is a predetermined number) If the number is less than that and the number of holds is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, a table with different selection trends of the main game symbol variation time is referred to, or the average value of the main game symbol variation time is different) When the loss B is selected, the variation mode selection candidate and / or the variation mode selection rate at the time of determining the variation mode of the main game symbol does not differ depending on the number of suspensions immediately before the suspension digestion (in other words, the number of suspensions is predetermined). A table in which the selection tendency of the variation time of the main game symbol is the same between the case where it is less than the number and the case where the number of holds is equal to or more than the predetermined number is referred to, or the variation time of the main game symbol is averaged The value is the same).

<Specific example 2>
When the loss B is selected, it is easier to select the main game symbol that has a relatively long variation time when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol than when the loss A is selected ( In other words, the average value of the variation time of the main game symbol is longer when the loss B is selected than when the loss A is selected. As shown in <Specific example 1>, when the loss A is selected, the variation mode selection candidate and / or the variation mode selection rate at the time of determining the variation mode of the main game symbol depending on the number of suspensions immediately before the suspension digestion May be configured as in <Specific Example 2> regardless of the state of the variation mode selection candidate and / or the variation mode selection rate.

<Specific example 3>
When a certain hold occurs, only when the loss B is scheduled to be selected at the time of digestion of the certain hold, the certain hold is a trigger hold (as shown in the above-described embodiment, so-called continuous production When a loss B is scheduled to be selected, the certain hold is more likely to be a trigger hold than when a loss A is scheduled to be selected.

<Specific Example 4>
When it is configured to have a plurality of types (for example, two of Loss A and Loss B) as the second main game symbols that are subject to symbol variation in the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state), the time-saving game In a situation where the state continues, the limited frequency state shifts (in other words, for each of a plurality of sections divided according to the number of symbol variations, the variation mode selection candidate at the time of determining the variation mode of the main game symbol and (Or the variation mode selection rate is different). In this case, for example, assuming that the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state) is 100 times, the limited frequency state a (symbol variation number = 1-20 times) → the limited frequency state b (symbol variation number = 21-95). Times) → limited frequency state c (number of symbol fluctuations = 96 to 100 times). When attention is paid to the limited frequency state b and the limited frequency state c, if the limited frequency state b is selected, depending on whether the loss A or the loss B is selected as the loss symbol of the second main game symbol. Thus, while <specific example 1> to <specific example 3> are applied and in the limited frequency state c, whether the loss A or the loss B is selected as the loss symbol of the second main game symbol Regardless of whether or not <specific example 1> to <specific example 3> are applied {that is, the variation mode selection candidate at the time of determination of the variation mode is different depending on the number of suspensions immediately before suspension digestion in either case A or loss B No, and it is not possible to hold the trigger (or it is difficult to do so)}, it may be configured such that the main game symbol variation mode and the main game symbol variation time are the same. In the case of the limited frequency state b, (1) in the loss A, the average value of the fluctuation time at the holding number a and the average value of the fluctuation time at the holding number b that is a holding number larger than the holding number a. The first difference appears, and in Loss B, there is no difference between the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings a and the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings b, or a second difference appears as the difference , The second difference may be smaller than the first difference, or (2) all possible selections at the time of a loss A with the holding number c (for example, four holding numbers) In the random number range assigned to the variation mode, the ratio of the random number range allocated for the variation mode that is most easily selected is defined as the occupation ratio α, and at the time of a loss B with the number of reservations c (for example, four reservations), In the range of random numbers assigned to all variations that can be selected. If the proportion of the random number range assigned to the variation mode that is easily selected is the occupation rate β, the occupation rate α is higher than the occupation rate β (that is, the variation mode that is most easily selected is concentrated). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value is easily selected.

<Specific Example 5>
When it is configured to have a plurality of types of lost symbols (for example, two of Loss A and Loss B) as the first main game symbol that is difficult to change in the time-saving gaming state (so-called electric support state), the time-saving game <Specific Example 1> to <Specific Example 3> are not applied regardless of whether Loss A or Loss B is selected as the Lost symbol of the first main game symbol in the situation where the state continues. That is, in either of the loss A and the loss B, the variation mode selection candidate at the time of determining the variation mode does not differ depending on the number of suspensions immediately before the suspension digestion, and cannot be (or is unlikely to be) a trigger suspension} or non-time There are a plurality of types of lost symbols (for example, two of Loss A and Loss B) as the second main game symbols that are difficult to change in a shortened gaming state (so-called non-electric support state). When configured in this manner, in a situation where the non-time-reduced gaming state continues, regardless of whether Lost A or Loss B is selected as the Lost Symbol of the second main gaming symbol, <Specific Example 1>- <Specific Example 3> is not applied {i.e., in any of the loss A and the loss B, the variation mode selection candidate at the time of the variation mode determination is not different depending on the number of suspensions immediately before the suspension digestion, and cannot be the trigger suspension (or May be adopted).

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (1)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (2)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (3)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be in a first variation period state in a specific period after execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, a limited frequency) that can be controlled so as to be in a second variable period state after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a specific number, counting from the end of execution of the special game. Variation mode determining means MN52),
If a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered during the execution of the special game, the first variation period state is set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area is specified during the execution of the special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that when there is no entry into a region (for example, the specific region C22), the first variation period state is not set after the execution of the special game.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (4)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period Value is configured to be the same,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (5)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be a first variation period state in a specific period after the execution of the special game, and in the case of the first variation period state, A variable period state control unit (for example, a limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52) that can be controlled to be in the second variation period state after a specific number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number;
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
When a special game has entered a specific area, the first variable period state is entered after the execution of the special game, while no special area has been entered when the special game is executed. In such a case, it is configured not to enter the first variable period state after the execution of the special game.
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (6)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
When a special game has entered a specific area, the first variable period state is entered after the execution of the special game, while no special area has been entered when the special game is executed. In such a case, it is configured not to enter the first variable period state after the execution of the special game.
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (7)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be a first variation period state in a specific period after the execution of the special game, and in the case of the first variation period state, A variable period state control unit (for example, a limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52) that can be controlled to be in the second variation period state after a specific number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number;
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
When a special game has entered a specific area, the first variable period state is entered after the execution of the special game, while no special area has been entered when the special game is executed. In such a case, it is configured not to enter the first variable period state after the execution of the special game.
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period Value is configured to be the same,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (8)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
If the specific number of times is scheduled to be reached by the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first variable period state, the specific number of times is determined based on information about the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition. The pre-reading effect display content is not displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) both before reaching the specified number of times and after reaching the specified number of times, or before reaching the specified number of times and the specified number of times. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to have different selection probabilities as to whether or not to display the hold pre-reading effect display contents on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) in both of the times after the arrival.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (9)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
If the specific number of times is scheduled to be reached by the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first variable period state, the specific number of times is determined based on information about the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition. The pre-reading effect display content is not displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) both before reaching the specified number of times and after reaching the specified number of times, or before reaching the specified number of times and the specified number of times. The pre-reading effect display content is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) in both of the times after the arrival, or the pre-reading effect display content is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, only before reaching the specific number of times) The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the selection probabilities of display on the effect display device SG) are different.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (10)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The shortest value of the variation display period of the identification information related to the case where the result of the success / failure determination in the first variation period state is non-winning is the identification related to the case where the result of the determination of the success / failure in the second variation period state is non-winning The longest value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the determination of success / failure in the first variable period state is winning is shorter than the shortest value of the variable display period of information. It is configured to be longer than the longest value of the variation display period of the identification information related to the case where the result of the success / failure determination is winning,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (11)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
The shortest value of the variation display period of the identification information related to the case where the result of the success / failure determination in the first variation period state is non-winning is the identification related to the case where the result of the determination of the success / failure in the second variation period state is non-winning The longest value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the determination of success / failure in the first variable period state is winning is shorter than the shortest value of the variable display period of information. It is configured to be longer than the longest value of the variation display period of the identification information related to the case where the result of the success / failure determination is winning,
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (12)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
When the special game is executed, there are a normal special game and a first low profit special game and a second low profit special game which are more disadvantageous to the player than the normal special game. When one low-profit special game is executed, after the execution of the first low-profit special game, the first variable period state can be set again. When executed, it is configured to maintain the second variable period state after completion of execution of the second low profit special game,
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (13)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inaccessible or open state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
When a special game is executed in the high probability lottery state and the high frequency release state, after the execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the high frequency release state in which the specified number of times becomes the predetermined number of times, and When the special game is executed in the low probability lottery state and the low frequency release state, the high probability lottery state and the above-mentioned It is configured not to be in the first variable period state while being able to be a high frequency open state where the specified number of times is less than the predetermined number of times,
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (14)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the first variation period state are set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area at the time of execution of the special game. When there is no entry to the game, the low probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game, and the first variation period state is not set.
According to the presence / absence of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of execution of the special game, the high-frequency release state in which the specified number of times is different after the execution of the special game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (15)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the first variation period state are set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area at the time of execution of the special game. When there is no entry to the game, the low probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game, and the first variation period state is not set.
When a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered during the execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game, the predetermined number of times is set to a high-frequency open state, If there is no entry into a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game, the specified number of times is a second number less than the first number of times. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be in a high-frequency open state.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (16)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the first variation period state are set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area at the time of execution of the special game. When there is no entry to the game, the low probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game, and the first variation period state is not set.
When a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered during the execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game, the predetermined number of times is set to a high-frequency open state, If there is no entry into a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game, the specified number of times is a second number less than the first number of times. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the high frequency release state is set, and the difference between the first number and the second number is the specific number.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (17)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold;
A first success / failure determination unit (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-A) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain first random number, when the conditions for permission / inhibition determination relating to a certain first random number are satisfied;
First identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A). 1 main game symbol determination means MN41-A),
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) )When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold;
A second success / failure determination unit (for example, a second main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-B) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain second random number, when a condition for determining whether or not the result is appropriate for the second random number is satisfied;
Second identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B). 2 main game symbol determination means MN41-B),
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the information is variably displayed; The first random number and the second random number are configured so that the success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied from the first acquisition order.
After the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is played. A means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player, and as the execution contents of the special game, it is easier to enter the first special game and the specific area (specific area C22) than the first special game. Two special games, special game control means (for example, special game execution means MP33) for executing a special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ), And when the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode than when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, In the second special game, it is configured to increase the rate of executing special games,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit Until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to maintain a high probability lottery state,
The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first period, and the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information are the first And at least a second variable period state that is a second period different from the period of the above, and when it becomes a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, the first variable period state is controlled, In the first variation period state, after the execution of the special game is completed, the second variation period state can be set after reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times. Has been
The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the specified number of times is not less than a total number of the upper limit number of the first hold and the upper limit number of the second hold.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (18)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold;
A first success / failure determination unit (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-A) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain first random number, when the conditions for permission / inhibition determination relating to a certain first random number are satisfied;
First identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A). 1 main game symbol determination means MN41-A),
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) )When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold;
A second success / failure determination unit (for example, a second main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-B) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain second random number, when a condition for determining whether or not the result is appropriate for the second random number is satisfied;
Second identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B). 2 main game symbol determination means MN41-B),
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the information is variably displayed; The first random number and the second random number are configured so that the success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied from the first acquisition order.
After the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is played. A means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player, and as the execution contents of the special game, it is easier to enter the first special game and a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) than the first special game. Special game control means (for example, special game execution means MP33) that has a second special game and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ), And when the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode than when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, In the second special game, it is configured to increase the rate of executing special games,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit Until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to maintain a high probability lottery state,
The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first period, and the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information are the first And at least a second variable period state that is a second period different from the period of the above, and when it becomes a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, the first variable period state is controlled, In the first variation period state, after the execution of the special game is completed, the second variation period state can be set after reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times. Has been
When the first identification information or the second identification information can be displayed corresponding to the variation display, and in the first variation period state, the first identification information stop identification information or the second identification information stop identification information As the effect when the game is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, the execution content of the special game scheduled after the stop display is the first special game and the second special game The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific effect with the same execution content in the effect.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (19)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold;
A first success / failure determination unit (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-A) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain first random number, when the conditions for permission / inhibition determination relating to a certain first random number are satisfied;
First identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A). 1 main game symbol determination means MN41-A),
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) )When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold;
A second success / failure determination unit (for example, a second main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-B) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain second random number, when a condition for determining whether or not the result is appropriate for the second random number is satisfied;
Second identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B). 2 main game symbol determination means MN41-B),
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the information is variably displayed; The first random number and the second random number are configured so that the success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied from the first acquisition order.
After the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is played. A means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player, and as the execution contents of the special game, it is easier to enter the first special game and a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) than the first special game. Special game control means (for example, special game execution means MP33) that has a second special game and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ), And when the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode than when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, In the second special game, it is configured to increase the rate of executing special games,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit Until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to maintain a high probability lottery state,
The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first period, and the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information are the first And at least a second variable period state that is a second period different from the period of the above, and when it becomes a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, the first variable period state is controlled, In the first variation period state, after the execution of the special game is completed, the second variation period state can be set after reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times. Has been
When a special area (for example, the specific area C22) has entered a ball when a special game is executed, the fact that the ball has been entered is notified, and in the first variation period state after the execution of the special game is completed. Does not clearly indicate that it is in a high-probability lottery state, but clearly indicates that it is in a high-probability lottery state at approximately the same timing as the transition from the first variation period state to the second variation period state after the execution of the special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (20)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold;
A first success / failure determination unit (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-A) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain first random number, when the conditions for permission / inhibition determination relating to a certain first random number are satisfied;
First identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A). 1 main game symbol determination means MN41-A),
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) )When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold;
A second success / failure determination unit (for example, a second main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-B) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain second random number, when a condition for determining whether or not the result is appropriate for the second random number is satisfied;
Second identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B). 2 main game symbol determination means MN41-B),
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the information is variably displayed; The first random number and the second random number are configured so that the success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied from the first acquisition order.
After the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is played. A means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player, and as the execution contents of the special game, it is easier to enter the first special game and a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) than the first special game. Special game control means (for example, special game execution means MP33) that has a second special game and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ), And when the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode than when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, In the second special game, it is configured to increase the rate of executing special games,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit Until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to maintain a high probability lottery state,
The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first period, and the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information are the first And at least a second variable period state that is a second period different from the period of the above, and when it becomes a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, the first variable period state is controlled, In the first variation period state, after the execution of the special game is completed, the second variation period state can be set after reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times. Has been
A hold image that is the same as the total number of the remaining first hold and the remaining second hold can be displayed on a predetermined hold display section (for example, the common hold display section SG14). And the first specific hold that becomes one of the remaining first hold and the second hold, and the second specific hold that satisfies the validity determination permission condition after the first specific hold exists. In this case, based on the content temporarily stored as the first specific hold and / or the content temporarily stored as the second specific hold, it corresponds to the display content of the hold image corresponding to the first specific hold and the second specific hold. A pachinko gaming machine configured to change display contents of a reserved image.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (21)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold;
A first success / failure determination unit (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-A) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain first random number, when the conditions for permission / inhibition determination relating to a certain first random number are satisfied;
First identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A). 1 main game symbol determination means MN41-A),
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) )When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold;
A second success / failure determination unit (for example, a second main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-B) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain second random number, when a condition for determining whether or not the result is appropriate for the second random number is satisfied;
Second identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B). 2 main game symbol determination means MN41-B),
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the information is variably displayed; The first random number and the second random number are configured so that the success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied from the first acquisition order.
After the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is played. A means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player, and as the execution contents of the special game, it is easier to enter the first special game and a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) than the first special game. Special game control means (for example, special game execution means MP33) that has a second special game and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ), And when the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode than when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, In the second special game, it is configured to increase the rate of executing special games,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit Until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to maintain a high probability lottery state,
The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first period, and the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information are the first And at least a second variable period state that is a second period different from the period of the above, and when it becomes a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, the first variable period state is controlled, In the first variation period state, after the execution of the special game is completed, the second variation period state can be set after reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times. Has been
The specific number of times is configured not to be less than the total number of the upper limit number of the first hold and the upper limit number of the second hold,
When a special area (for example, the specific area C22) has entered a ball when a special game is executed, the fact that the ball has been entered is notified, and in the first variation period state after the execution of the special game is completed. Does not clearly indicate that it is in a high-probability lottery state, but clearly indicates that it is in a high-probability lottery state at approximately the same timing as the transition from the first variation period state to the second variation period state after the execution of the special game. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (22)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold;
A first success / failure determination unit (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-A) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain first random number, when the conditions for permission / inhibition determination relating to a certain first random number are satisfied;
First identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A). 1 main game symbol determination means MN41-A),
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) )When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold;
A second success / failure determination unit (for example, a second main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-B) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain second random number, when a condition for determining whether or not the result is appropriate for the second random number is satisfied;
Second identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B). 2 main game symbol determination means MN41-B),
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the information is variably displayed; The first random number and the second random number are configured so that the success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied from the first acquisition order.
After the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is played. A means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player, and as the execution contents of the special game, it is easier to enter the first special game and a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) than the first special game. Special game control means (for example, special game execution means MP33) that has a second special game and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ), And when the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode than when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, In the second special game, it is configured to increase the rate of executing special games,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit Until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to maintain a high probability lottery state,
The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first period, and the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information are the first And at least a second variable period state that is a second period different from the period of the above, and when it becomes a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, the first variable period state is controlled, In the first variation period state, after the execution of the special game is completed, the second variation period state can be set after reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times. Has been
When the first identification information or the second identification information can be displayed corresponding to the variation display, and in the first variation period state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information As the effect when the game is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, the execution content of the special game scheduled after the stop display is the first special game and the second special game It is configured to be able to execute a specific effect in which a part or all of the execution content in the effect is common with
In the case of a high probability lottery state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner and the special game is executed, and the execution of the special game is completed. Later, when the high probability lottery state is entered again, it is configured not to enter the first variation period state and / or to execute an effect different from the specific effect, or after the end of the execution of the special game Even if it is a probability lottery state, if there is no first hold, it is configured not to enter the first variation period state and / or to execute an effect different from the specific effect It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (23)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold;
A first success / failure determination unit (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-A) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain first random number, when the conditions for permission / inhibition determination relating to a certain first random number are satisfied;
First identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A). 1 main game symbol determination means MN41-A),
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) )When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold;
A second success / failure determination unit (for example, a second main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-B) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain second random number, when a condition for determining whether or not the result is appropriate for the second random number is satisfied;
Second identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B). 2 main game symbol determination means MN41-B),
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the information is variably displayed; The first random number and the second random number are configured so that the success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied from the first acquisition order.
After the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is played. A means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player, and as the execution contents of the special game, it is easier to enter the first special game and a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) than the first special game. Special game control means (for example, special game execution means MP33) that has a second special game and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ), And when the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode than when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, In the second special game, it is configured to increase the rate of executing special games,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit Until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to maintain a high probability lottery state,
The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first period, and the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information are the first And at least a second variable period state that is a second period different from the period of the above, and when it becomes a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, the first variable period state is controlled, In the first variation period state, after the execution of the special game is completed, the second variation period state can be set after reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times. Has been
If there is a specific hold that satisfies any of the remaining hold, either the first hold or the second hold, based on the content temporarily stored as the hold, the specific hold The pre-reading effect that suggests or reports the presence of the event can be executed by a predetermined effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), and the first hold or the second hold that remains in the first variation period state. When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times by the execution of the unit, the pre-reading effect is configured not to be executed by the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
In either one of the first variation period state or the second variation period state, it is configured such that the execution frequency of the hold prefetch effect is lower than the execution frequency of the hold prefetch effect in the other, or the first change period state Alternatively, in any one of the second variation period states, the pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the total number of execution patterns of the reserved pre-reading effect is smaller than the total number of execution patterns of the reserved pre-reading effect in the other.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (24)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold;
A first success / failure determination unit (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-A) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain first random number, when the conditions for permission / inhibition determination relating to a certain first random number are satisfied;
First identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A). 1 main game symbol determination means MN41-A),
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means (for example, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) )When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold;
A second success / failure determination unit (for example, a second main game winning / failure lottery unit MN11-B) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the certain second random number, when a condition for determining whether or not the result is appropriate for the second random number is satisfied;
Second identification information display content determination means (for example, first identification information) that determines stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B). 2 main game symbol determination means MN41-B),
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means (for example, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) performs the second identification. A second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the information is variably displayed; The first random number and the second random number are configured so that the success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied from the first acquisition order.
After the stop identification information of the first identification information or the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20) is played. A means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state for the player, and as the execution contents of the special game, it is easier to enter the first special game and a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) than the first special game. Special game control means (for example, special game execution means MP33) that has a second special game and executes the special game with the execution contents of either the first special game or the second special game,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. When there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a game state transition control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) that controls to be able to enter a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is completed. ), And when the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode than when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, In the second special game, it is configured to increase the rate of executing special games,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit Until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to maintain a high probability lottery state,
The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information is the first period, and the average value of the variable display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information are the first And at least a second variable period state that is a second period different from the period of the above, and when it becomes a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, the first variable period state is controlled, In the first variation period state, after the execution of the special game is completed, the second variation period state can be set after reaching the specific number of times that the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number of times. Has been
When a special area (for example, the specific area C22) has entered a ball when a special game is executed, the fact that the ball has been entered is notified, and in the first variation period state after the execution of the special game is completed. Does not clearly indicate that it is in a high-probability lottery state, but clearly indicates that it is in a high-probability lottery state at approximately the same timing as the transition from the first variation period state to the second variation period state after the execution of the special game. Configured to
When the number of repetitions of the unit is the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information that will reach the specific number of times, and the predetermined mode is not scheduled to be stopped and displayed during the variable display The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the variable display period of the variable display can take only a predetermined period.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (25)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C30) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) can enter,
A member attached to a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) and capable of being displaced to a first position and a second position, and when displaced to the first position, the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) When the game ball is unable to enter or difficult to enter compared to the second position and is displaced to the second position, the game ball can enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) or is compared with the first position. And a variable member (for example, a shielding member C22c) configured to facilitate entry,
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
Based on the random number, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination (for example, determination unit MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed by the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the variable display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C30) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means (for example, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) an advantageous state for the player until the opening / closing end condition is satisfied. Game control means MP30),
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered; With
The number of the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) is one,
At the time of execution of a unit game that is a predetermined execution time at the time of execution of the special game, the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) located at the first position in accordance with a predetermined displacement mode predetermined with time. Is moved to the second position, while the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is maintained at the first position without being displaced at the time of execution of the unit game that is executed other than the predetermined execution time. A pachinko gaming machine configured to displace a variable member (for example, a shielding member C22c) according to a specific displacement mode different from the predetermined displacement mode.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (26)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C30) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) can enter,
A member attached to a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) and capable of being displaced to a first position and a second position, and when displaced to the first position, the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) When the game ball is unable to enter or difficult to enter compared to the second position and is displaced to the second position, the game ball can enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) or is compared with the first position. And a variable member (for example, a shielding member C22c) configured to facilitate entry,
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
Based on the random number, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination (for example, determination unit MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed by the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the variable display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C30) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means (for example, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) an advantageous state for the player until the opening / closing end condition is satisfied. Game control means MP30),
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered; ,
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period The first variation is controlled so that it can be set to the first variation period state in the high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is finished, and the unit from the start of variation display of the identification information to the stop display. In the case of a period state, a variable period state control means (for example, a control unit that can be controlled to be in a second variable period state after the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specific number after the execution of the special game is completed) , Limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52),
The number of the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) is one,
At the time of execution of a unit game that is a predetermined execution time at the time of execution of the special game, the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) located at the first position in accordance with a predetermined displacement mode predetermined with time. Is moved to the second position, while the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is maintained at the first position without being displaced at the time of execution of the unit game that is executed other than the predetermined execution time. The variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is configured to be displaced according to a specific displacement mode different from the predetermined displacement mode.
If a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered when a special game is executed, the special game is executed regardless of the type of stop identification information of the identification information that triggered the execution of the special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in the first variation period state after the execution of the game.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (27)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C30) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) can enter,
A member attached to a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) and capable of being displaced to a first position and a second position, and when displaced to the first position, the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) When the game ball is unable to enter or difficult to enter compared to the second position and is displaced to the second position, the game ball can enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) or is compared with the first position. And a variable member (for example, a shielding member C22c) configured to facilitate entry,
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
Based on the random number, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination (for example, determination unit MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed by the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the variable display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C30) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means (for example, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) an advantageous state for the player until the opening / closing end condition is satisfied. Game control means MP30),
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered; With
The number of the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) is one,
At the time of execution of a unit game that is a predetermined execution time at the time of execution of the special game, the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) located at the first position in accordance with a predetermined displacement mode predetermined with time. Is moved to the second position, while the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is maintained at the first position without being displaced at the time of execution of the unit game that is executed other than the predetermined execution time. The variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is configured to be displaced according to a specific displacement mode different from the predetermined displacement mode.
At least a predetermined variable period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a predetermined period, and a specific variable period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a specific period different from the predetermined period If a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered when a special game is executed, regardless of the type of stop identification information of the identification information that triggered the execution of the special game, After the execution of the special game, the state is changed to a predetermined variable period. On the other hand, if there is no entry into a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of execution of the special game, the execution of the special game is triggered. Regardless of the type of stop identification information of the identification information, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in a specific variable period state after the end of execution of the special game.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (28)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C30) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) can enter,
A member attached to a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) and capable of being displaced to a first position and a second position, and when displaced to the first position, the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) When the game ball is unable to enter or difficult to enter compared to the second position and is displaced to the second position, the game ball can enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) or is compared with the first position. And a variable member (for example, a shielding member C22c) configured to facilitate entry,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
If the conditions for determining whether or not to determine whether or not to satisfy the condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not to execute the determination based on the random number (for example, a determination unit for determining whether or not to win)
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed by the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the variable display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C30) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means (for example, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) an advantageous state for the player until the opening / closing end condition is satisfied. Game control means MP30),
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered; ,
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state and a third variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a third period different from the first period and the second period, and the execution of the special game ends In the high probability lottery state at a later time, control is performed so that the first variation period state can be established, and from the start of the identification information variation display to the stop display as one unit. From the above, after the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specific number of times, a variable period state control means (for example, limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52) that can be controlled to be in the second fluctuation period state,
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The number of the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) is one,
At the time of execution of a unit game that is a predetermined execution time at the time of execution of the special game, the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) located at the first position in accordance with a predetermined displacement mode predetermined with time. Is moved to the second position, while the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is maintained at the first position without being displaced at the time of execution of the unit game that is executed other than the predetermined execution time. The variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is configured to be displaced according to a specific displacement mode different from the predetermined displacement mode.
If a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered when a special game is executed, the special game is executed regardless of the type of stop identification information of the identification information that triggered the execution of the special game. After the execution of the game, the first variation period state is entered. On the other hand, if there is no entry into a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, the identification that triggered the execution of the special game Regardless of the type of stop identification information, it is configured to be in the third variable period state after execution of the special game,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the one unit related to at least a part of the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold prefetch effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit. A pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be non-displayable (for example, an effect display device SG).

Pachinko machines related to this concept (29)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C30) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) can enter,
A member attached to a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) and capable of being displaced to a first position and a second position, and when displaced to the first position, the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) When the game ball is unable to enter or difficult to enter compared to the second position and is displaced to the second position, the game ball can enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) or is compared with the first position. And a variable member (for example, a shielding member C22c) configured to facilitate entry,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
Based on the random number, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination (for example, determination unit MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed by the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the variable display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed, a predetermined number of balls are entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening C30) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means (for example, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) an advantageous state for the player until the opening / closing end condition is satisfied. Game control means MP30),
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a win with a higher probability than the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling the player to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered; ,
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state and a third variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a third period different from the first period and the second period, and the execution of the special game ends In the high probability lottery state at a later time, control is performed so that the first variation period state can be established, and from the start of the identification information variation display to the stop display as one unit. After the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a specific number, the variable period state control means (for example, limited frequency fluctuation mode determination means MN52) that can be controlled to be in the second fluctuation period state,
The number of the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening C30) is one,
At the time of execution of a unit game that is a predetermined execution time at the time of execution of the special game, the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) located at the first position in accordance with a predetermined displacement mode predetermined with time. Is moved to the second position, while the variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is maintained at the first position without being displaced at the time of execution of the unit game that is executed other than the predetermined execution time. The variable member (for example, the shielding member C22c) is configured to be displaced according to a specific displacement mode different from the predetermined displacement mode.
If a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered when a special game is executed, the special game is executed regardless of the type of stop identification information of the identification information that triggered the execution of the special game. After the execution of the game, the first variation period state is entered. On the other hand, if there is no entry into a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, the identification that triggered the execution of the special game Regardless of the type of stop identification information, it is configured to be in the third variable period state after execution of the special game,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
The effect display content corresponding to the variation display period of the identification information can be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), and has a plurality of types of effect display states. The content of the effect display corresponding to the display is different depending on the type of the effect display state, and the player selects the type of the effect display state in at least one of the first variation period state and the second variation period state. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be selectable based on an operation.

  In the above example, there is a case where a high probability lottery state can be set after the execution of the special game when a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered. It is not limited to this, and any player may be provided with a privilege. In that case, for example, when there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22), a time-reduced gaming state is given (or the continuation count of the time-reduced gaming state is preferentially) When a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered, the number of executions of a further unit game in a special game is given (including a so-called small hit development jackpot function). it can.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (30)
A common entrance (for example, common entrance C51) that is an entrance into which game balls can enter;
A first entry port (for example, a first main game start port A10) provided downstream of a common entry port (for example, the common entry port C51), which is an entry port through which game balls can enter; ,
A second entrance (for example, a 2-2 main game start entrance B30 provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), which is an entrance to which a game ball can enter. )When,
The first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the second starting port (for example, 2-2) are set in the flow direction of the game balls that have entered the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). The main game start opening B30) is a member that is changed toward one of the main game start openings B30), and a plurality of game balls that have entered the common entrance entrance (for example, the common entrance entrance C51) A distribution member (for example, a distribution member C50y) that operates so as to be alternately distributed to a first main game start port A10) and a second start port (for example, a 2-2 main game start port B30);
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
An image display unit capable of displaying an image (for example, an effect display device SG);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) for controlling image display on the image display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. A first random number temporary storage means (for example, a first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the first hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold is digested and the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the entrance to the second start opening (for example, 2-2 main game start opening B30) When,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second hold is digested and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying the second identification information;
Stopped and displayed on the stop identification information displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) or stopped on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). In the case where the stop identification information is in a predetermined mode, it is provided with special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and the acquisition order of the first random number and the second random number is It is comprised so that the said variable display start conditions can be satisfied from what becomes first, and it does not enter a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51), and does not enter a 2nd start entrance (for example, 1st (2) Main game start opening B10) is provided with a ball entry path that allows entry into the ball, and it is easy to enter the second start port (for example, second main game start opening B10) from the ball entry path. As the gaming state concerned, It is easy to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) from the normal gaming state where it is difficult to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main gaming starting port B10) and the entering path. It is configured to take one of the specific gaming states,
When a certain first hold is newly generated, before satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold, the hold information related to the first hold is sub-game part ( For example, when a certain second hold is newly generated, it can be transmitted to the sub-control board S) before the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold is satisfied. It is configured to be able to transmit hold information related to a certain second hold to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
On the basis of the hold information, a hold display image capable of notifying the total number of the first hold that is not digested and the second hold that is not digested can be displayed on the image display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). Has been
As a display area that can display a hold display image on the image display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first hold display area and the first hold display area have a second hold display area that is different from the display area. Until the total number reaches a predetermined number, it becomes a normal display state in which a hold display image that is the same number as the total number is displayed in the first hold display area, and after the total number reaches the predetermined number, A configuration in which one or a plurality of on-hold display images displayed in the first on-hold display area can be hidden, and a special display state can be obtained in which one or a plurality of on-hold display images are displayed in the second on-hold display area. And when the total number further increases after entering the special display state, it is configured to display the hold display image for the increase number in the first hold display area,
Switching from the normal display state to the special display state is performed only in the normal gaming state, or configured so that it is easier to perform in the normal gaming state than in the specific gaming state. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by

Pachinko machines related to this concept (31)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) can enter,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of variable display and stop display of the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of variable display and stop display of the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-) that acquires a first random number based on a game ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10). A) and
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the first hold to occur;
First random number success / failure determination means (for example, first main game) for determining whether or not based on the first random number related to a certain first hold when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied A lottery means MN11-A),
First identification information display control means (for example, first and second control units) for controlling the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) to display the first identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display. 2 main game symbol control means MP11-C),
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-) that acquires a second random number based on a game ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10). B) and
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
A second random number determination unit (for example, a second main game) that performs a determination on the basis of a second random number related to a certain second hold when the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to the certain second hold is satisfied. Lottery means MN11-B),
Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second display control means for controlling to stop display after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g)). 2 main game symbol control means MP11-C), both the first identification information and the second identification information fluctuate in the variation display start condition of the first identification information and the variation display start condition of the second identification information. It is configured so that it can be satisfied when it is not displayed, and when both the first hold and the second hold occur, the variable display start condition of the first identification information is the second identification information. It is configured so that the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied in the order in which the occurrence occurred before the variable display start condition or in the order in which the occurrence occurred. And
The first random number success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is the result of the determination of success / failure and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second random number success / failure determination means (for example, After the winning / non-winning determination result by the second main game winning / losing lottery means MN11-B is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning prize, etc.) A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the mouth C20) in an advantageous state for the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the winning probability in the determination of success / failure is a predetermined probability and a high-probability lottery state in which the winning probability in the determination of success / failure is higher than the predetermined probability, and a low probability after the execution of the special game A means for either a lottery state or a high-probability lottery state, and when a special area (for example, a specific area C22) is entered during execution of a special game, Lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be in a high probability lottery state;
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the non-open easy state and the non-open easy state. The open state control means (for example, the second main game start port) that makes the open state easy when the object B11d) has the easy open state that is likely to be in the open state and is in the high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game. Electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B), the first random number winning / non-winning determining means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) is a winning determination result, and the first identification information is stopped and displayed. The case where the result of the determination by the second random number determination means (for example, the second main game winning lottery means MN11-B) is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed is more special than the case where the second identification information is stopped. Game execution Specific region of (for example, a specific region C22) are configured such that the inlet ball to the relatively easy,
If the lottery is in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of change display to the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information is taken as one unit, Until the number of unit repetitions reaches a predetermined number, a lottery state maintenance control unit (for example, probability variation game end condition determining unit MP51) capable of controlling to maintain a high probability lottery state;
As a gaming state related to the variable display period of the first identification information and the second identification information, the gaming state has at least a first variable period state and a second variable period state. A variable period state control unit (for example, a limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52) that can be controlled to be in the second variation period state after being repeatedly executed for a specific number of times that is less than a predetermined number of times is provided. The average value of the variable display period of the second identification information in the period state is configured to be shorter than the average value of the variable display period of the second identification information in the second variable period state, and the first random number validity determination High-probability lottery after execution of a special game executed after the result of the determination by means (for example, first main game winning / rejecting lottery means MN11-A) is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed When the state and the easy opening state are entered, the state is changed to the second variable period state after the execution of the special game, while the second random number determination means (for example, the second main game determination lottery means MN11-B) If the judgment result is winning and the high probability lottery state and the easy opening state are entered after the execution of the special game executed after the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the first after the execution of the special game. A pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be in a variable period state.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (32)
A start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
One or a plurality of variable prize openings (for example, the second big prize opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) can enter,
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a random number based on the entrance of the game ball into the start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
Based on the random number, a determination unit for determining whether or not to win (for example, a second main game winning lottery unit MN11-B);
Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means) for controlling the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) to stop display after the identification information is variably displayed. MP11-C),
After the winning / failing determination result (for example, second main game winning / not determining lottery means MN11-B) is a winning result and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) is played. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can be advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the winning probability in the determination of success / failure is a predetermined probability and a high-probability lottery state in which the winning probability in the determination of success / failure is higher than the predetermined probability, and a low probability after the execution of the special game A means for either a lottery state or a high-probability lottery state, and when a special area (for example, a specific area C22) is entered during execution of a special game, Lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be in a high probability lottery state;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
When executing the special game, there is a predetermined number of balls in the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) or until the predetermined time elapses (for example, the second large winning opening C20). ) Can be executed a plurality of times, and in a unit game at a predetermined execution time, an advantageous unit game that allows a player to enter a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) and a specific game It is configured to be able to execute one of the disadvantaged unit games that cannot be entered into the region (for example, the specific region C22) or difficult compared to the advantageous unit game,
As the predetermined execution times, at least a first execution time and a second execution time later than the first execution time are provided, and even in a special game in which the number of executions of the unit game is the same, it is advantageous. It is configured to be able to adopt the case where the execution time when the unit game is executed for the first time is the first execution time and the case where the execution time when the advantageous unit game is executed for the first time is the second execution time,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display control means (for example, the effect display control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). Production display control means SM20),
The special game is being executed either when the execution time when the advantageous unit game is executed for the first time is the first execution time or when the execution time when the advantageous unit game is executed for the first time is the second execution time. However, at the timing before the unit game related to the first execution time is executed, it is possible to execute the promotion suggestion effect that is the effect display content related to whether or not the advantageous unit game is executed,
In the case where the promotion suggestion effect is executed when the execution time when the advantageous unit game is executed for the first time is the first execution time, the advantageous unit game is notified for the first time while the advantageous unit game is executed for the first time. In the pachinko game machine, which is configured to notify that the advantageous unit game is not executed when the promotion suggestion effect is executed when the execution time to be executed is the second execution time. is there.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (33)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced in the open state, it is compared with when displaced in the closed state. The second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) allows the game ball to easily enter or enter the second starting port. A variable member (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A first variable winning opening (for example, a normal winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A second variable winning opening (e.g., a large allocation winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening (for example, a large allocation winning opening C20) can enter,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is stored until the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing as one hold;
When a first success / failure determination permission condition relating to a certain first hold is satisfied, first success / failure determination means (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery means MN11- A) and
Based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the first determination / non-permission determination means (for example, the first main game determination / not determination lottery means MN11-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is used until the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing as two hold;
When a second success / failure determination permission condition relating to a certain second hold is satisfied, second success / failure determination means (for example, second main game winning / failure lottery means MN11- B) and
Based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second success / failure determination means (for example, the second main game winning / not determination lottery means MN11-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device B20) performs the second identification. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after variably displaying information;
After the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second success / failure determination means (for example, After the result of the success / failure determination by the second main game winning / rejecting lottery means MN11-B) is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the predetermined variable winning opening (for example, the normal big winning opening C10) is predetermined. A game that can make the first variable prize opening (for example, the normal big prize opening C10) advantageous for the player until the number of balls or a predetermined period elapses is defined as a first unit game, and a second variable prize opening (for example, The second unit is a game that can make the second variable prize opening (for example, the distribution big prize opening C20) an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the distribution big prize opening C20) or a predetermined period elapses. Games, first unit games and Second unit executable special game execution means a special game to perform multiple unit gaming to perform any of the game (for example, special game execution means MP33),
There is a probability that the result of the success / failure determination in the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) and the second winning / failing determination means (for example, the second main game winning / notifying lottery means MN11-B) will be won. In the low probability lottery state with a predetermined probability, in the first win / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A) and in the second win / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B) A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of winning / failing determination is higher than the predetermined probability, and there is a ball entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during execution of the special game. In such a case, the high probability lottery state can be set after the execution of the special game. On the other hand, if there is no entry into the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, The game state transition control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that controls to be in the low probability lottery state after the end, and when the second hold is present, the first success / failure determination permission condition is not satisfied, Whether or not the first hold exists, the second hold determination permitting condition can be satisfied when the second hold exists, and the second success / failure determination means (for example, the second main determination unit) If the result of the success / failure determination by the game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-B) is the winner, the result of the success / failure determination by the first winner / rejection determination means (for example, the first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A) is the winner. It ’s configured to give the player a higher profit margin than
When executing the next unit game in which the first unit game is executed during execution of the special game, the second unit game is executed, and the next unit game in which the second unit game is executed during the execution of the special game is executed. Is configured to execute the first unit game,
When executing the second unit game for a predetermined number of times during the execution of the special game, a second variable prize opening (for example, allocation) is made so that the player can enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). While executing the second unit game execution mode A with the big prize opening C20) in the open state, when executing the second unit game other than the predetermined number of times during execution of the special game, the specific area (for example, , A second variable prize opening (for example, a large allocation prize opening) so that it is impossible to enter the specific area C22) or it is difficult to enter the specific area as compared with the second unit game execution mode A. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by executing a second unit game execution mode B in which C20) is opened.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (34)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced in the open state, it is compared with when displaced in the closed state. The second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) allows the game ball to easily enter or enter the second starting port. A variable member (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A first variable winning opening (for example, a normal winning opening C10) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A second variable winning opening (e.g., a large allocation winning opening C20) that can be in a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening (for example, a large allocation winning opening C20) can enter,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is stored until the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing as one hold;
When a first success / failure determination permission condition relating to a certain first hold is satisfied, first success / failure determination means (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery means MN11- A) and
Based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the first determination / non-permission determination means (for example, the first main game determination / not determination lottery means MN11-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is used until the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing as two hold;
When a second success / failure determination permission condition relating to a certain second hold is satisfied, second success / failure determination means (for example, second main game winning / failure lottery means MN11- B) and
Based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second success / failure determination means (for example, the second main game winning / not determination lottery means MN11-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device B20) performs the second identification. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after variably displaying information;
After the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second success / failure determination means (for example, After the result of the success / failure determination by the second main game winning / rejecting lottery means MN11-B) is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the predetermined variable winning opening (for example, the normal big winning opening C10) is predetermined. A game that can make the first variable prize opening (for example, the normal big prize opening C10) advantageous for the player until the number of balls or a predetermined period elapses is defined as a first unit game, and a second variable prize opening (for example, The second unit is a game that can make the second variable prize opening (for example, the distribution big prize opening C20) an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls are entered into the distribution big prize opening C20) or a predetermined period elapses. Games, first unit games and Second unit executable special game execution means a special game to perform multiple unit gaming to perform any of the game (for example, special game execution means MP33),
There is a probability that the result of the success / failure determination in the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A) and the second winning / failing determination means (for example, the second main game winning / notifying lottery means MN11-B) will be won. In the low probability lottery state with a predetermined probability, in the first win / fail determination means (for example, the first main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A) and in the second win / fail determination means (for example, the second main game win / fail lottery means MN11-B) A high-probability lottery state in which the probability of winning / failing determination is higher than the predetermined probability, and there is a ball entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during execution of the special game. In such a case, the high probability lottery state can be set after the execution of the special game. On the other hand, if there is no entry into the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, The game state transition control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that controls to be in the low probability lottery state after the end, and when the second hold is present, the first success / failure determination permission condition is not satisfied, Whether or not the first hold exists, the second hold determination permitting condition can be satisfied when the second hold exists, and the second success / failure determination means (for example, the second main determination unit) If the result of the success / failure determination by the game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-B) is the winner, the result of the success / failure determination by the first winner / rejection determination means (for example, the first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A) is the winner. It ’s configured to give the player a higher profit margin than
When executing the next unit game in which the first unit game is executed during execution of the special game, the second unit game is executed, and the next unit game in which the second unit game is executed during the execution of the special game is executed. Is configured to execute the first unit game,
When executing the second unit game for a predetermined number of times during the execution of the special game, a second variable prize opening (for example, allocation) is made so that the player can enter the specific area (for example, the specific area C22). While executing the second unit game execution mode A with the big prize opening C20) in the open state, when executing the second unit game other than the predetermined number of times during execution of the special game, the specific area (for example, , A second variable prize opening (for example, a large allocation prize opening) so that it is impossible to enter the specific area C22) or it is difficult to enter the specific area as compared with the second unit game execution mode A. C20) is executed to execute the second unit game execution mode B,
When the second unit game is executed during the execution of the special game, the second variable prize opening (e.g., whether the second unit game execution mode A or the second unit game execution mode B is executed) , Based on the number of game balls that have entered the distribution large winning opening C20) and the number of game balls discharged from the second variable winning opening (for example, the distribution large winning opening C20) (for example, It is possible to detect abnormalities in the distribution prize winning slot C20)
If an abnormality is detected in the second variable prize opening (for example, the distribution big prize opening C20) when the current second unit game is executed during the execution of the special game, the current second unit game is executed. After that, the first unit game is continued to be executed, while the first unit game that has been continuously executed is completed without the abnormality in the detected second variable winning opening (for example, the distribution winning prize opening C20) being resolved. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to wait for execution of the next second unit game when it is played.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (35)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced in the open state, it is compared with when displaced in the closed state. The second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) allows the game ball to easily enter or enter the second starting port. A variable member (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) configured to make it difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the mouth (for example, the second main game start port B10);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20);
A second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, a large allocation winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is stored until the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing as one hold;
When a first success / failure determination permission condition relating to a certain first hold is satisfied, first success / failure determination means (for example, a first main game winning / failure lottery means MN11- A) and
Based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the first determination / non-permission determination means (for example, the first main game determination / not determination lottery means MN11-A), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is used until the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) for temporarily storing as two hold;
When a second success / failure determination permission condition relating to a certain second hold is satisfied, second success / failure determination means (for example, second main game winning / failure lottery means MN11- B) and
Based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second success / failure determination means (for example, the second main game winning / not determination lottery means MN11-B), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display device B20) performs the second identification. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after variably displaying information;
After the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means (for example, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A) is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or the second success / failure determination means (for example, After the result of the success / failure determination by the second main game winning / rejecting lottery means MN11-B) is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the allocation big winning opening C20) is given to the player. Special game execution means (for example, special game execution means MP33) capable of executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state;
It has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state, and can be set to the specific game state after the execution of the special game. If the game is in a specific gaming state, the first identification information or the second identification information from the start of change display to the stop display is regarded as one unit, and the one unit is executed a predetermined number of times after the execution of the special game. Until it is played, gaming state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled so as not to enter the normal gaming state,
The first variation pattern table as a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and the second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information from the first variation pattern table And the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table at least a third variation pattern table having different selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information, and after the execution of the special game, the first variation pattern Variable period state control that can be controlled to be one of a first variable period state that refers to a table, a second variable period state that refers to a second variable pattern table, and a third variable period state that refers to a third variable pattern table Means (for example, limited frequency variation mode control means MN52),
Control is performed so as to be in the first variation period state in the specific game state after the end of execution of the special game, and in the case of the first variation period state, the one unit is second reserved from the end of execution of the special game. After the first specific number of times, which is less than the upper limit number, is configured to be able to change from the first variation period state to the second variation period state, and in the case of the second variation period state, the execution of the special game ends. After the first unit is performed the first specified number of times later, and after the second specified number of times greater than the first specified number of times, the second variable period state can be changed to the third variable period state. Configured,
In the case of the first variation period state, in both the variation display time of the first identification information and the variation display time of the second identification information, if the second variation period state and the second determination unit (for example, The second main game winner / lottery means MN11-B) is configured so that it is likely to be relatively longer than the variable display time of the second identification information when the result of the winner determination is non-winning. This is a pachinko machine.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (36)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable number of winnings or variable winnings are made until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined period elapses in the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20). Special game execution means (for example, special game execution) capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times that can make the mouth (for example, the first grand prize port C10, the second grand prize port C20) advantageous to the player Means MP33),
There are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port A10, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game In the case of a specific game state, a unit from the start of the identification information change display to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times from the end of the execution of the special game. Until, it is provided with game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Effect display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20) for controlling the effect display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG).
With
There are a plurality of high expectation effect candidates indicating that a special game may be executed as an effect executed at least in a specific game state, and the first group includes a plurality of high expectation effect candidates and Have multiple groups, including a second group that includes one or more high-expectation direction candidates,
In a situation where the specific gaming state is maintained, the high expectation effect candidate in the first group has priority over the high expectation effect candidate in the second group until a specific effect is displayed. It becomes the first production state that can be displayed as production,
In the case of the first effect state, after the special effect is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode and the special game is not executed, the high expectation effect in the first group is performed. While the high expectation stage production candidate in the second group is prioritized over the candidates, it becomes a second stage production state that can be displayed as production,
In the case of the first effect state, the specific effect is displayed, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, and the special game is executed. After the execution of the special game, the specific game is performed again. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in the first performance state when the state is reached.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (37)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable number of winnings or variable winnings are made until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined period elapses in the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20). Special game execution means (for example, special game execution) capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times that can make the mouth (for example, the first grand prize port C10, the second grand prize port C20) advantageous to the player Means MP33),
There are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port A10, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game In the case of a specific game state, a unit from the start of the identification information change display to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times from the end of the execution of the special game. Until, it is provided with game state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Effect display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20) for controlling the effect display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG).
With
There are a plurality of high expectation effect candidates indicating that a special game may be executed as an effect executed at least in a specific game state, and the first group includes a plurality of high expectation effect candidates and Have multiple groups, including a second group that includes one or more high-expectation direction candidates,
In a situation where the specific gaming state is maintained, the high expectation effect candidate in the first group has priority over the high expectation effect candidate in the second group until a specific effect is displayed. It becomes the first production state that can be displayed as production,
In the case of the first effect state, after the special effect is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode and the special game is not executed, the high expectation effect in the first group is performed. While the high expectation stage production candidate in the second group is prioritized over the candidates, it becomes a second stage production state that can be displayed as production,
In the case of the first effect state, the specific effect is displayed, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined mode, and the special game is executed. After the execution of the special game, the specific game is performed again. When it becomes the state, it is configured to be in the first production state,
When the first unit is performed a predetermined number of times that is less than the predetermined number of times without executing the special game, the next time the identification information is changed and displayed. In this case, the pachinko is configured such that a predetermined high-expected degree production candidate among the high-expected degree production candidates in the first group can be displayed as the specific production. Gaming machine.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (38)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20) capable of displaying identification information;
A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Based on the random numbers acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20) (for example, the first and second main game symbols). Control means MP11-C),
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a variable number of winnings or variable winnings are made until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined period elapses in the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20). Special game execution means (for example, special game execution) capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times that can make the mouth (for example, the first grand prize port C10, the second grand prize port C20) advantageous to the player Means MP33),
There are a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting port (for example, the first main gaming starting port A10, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game In the case of a specific game state, a unit from the start of the identification information change display to the stop display is taken as one unit, and the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times from the end of the execution of the special game. Up to the first special game in which the game state transition control means (for example, the specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled so as not to enter the normal game state is provided, and when the special game is executed, the unit game is executed a plurality of times. And is configured to be able to execute one of the second special games, which is executed more than once and is more profitable for the player than the first special game,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Effect display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20) for controlling the effect display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG).
With
There are a plurality of high expectation effect candidates indicating that a special game may be executed as an effect executed at least in a specific game state, and the first group includes a plurality of high expectation effect candidates and Have multiple groups, including a second group that includes one or more high-expectation direction candidates,
In the situation where the specific gaming state is maintained, the high expectation effect candidate in the first group can be displayed as the effect with priority over the high expectation effect candidate in the second group. The high expectation stage production candidate in the second group has priority over the high expectation stage production candidate in the first group, and is configured to be able to transition to the second production state that can be displayed as a production.
In the situation where the specific gaming state is maintained, in the case of the first effect state, the number of times information added or subtracted according to the execution of the one unit is not displayed, while the second effect state. In some cases, the count information is displayed,
When the first special game is scheduled to be executed in the first effect state, the identification information fluctuating display shows the specific high expectation effect candidate as the effect while the second effect is displayed. In the state, when the first special game is scheduled to be executed, the predetermined specific high-expected effect candidate is not displayed as an effect in the variation display of the identification information. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by that.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entrance judgment means, MJ11-A first main game start entrance entrance judgment means MJ11-B second main game start entrance entrance judgment means, MJ11-H auxiliary game start Entrance entrance determination means MJ11-C10 1st grand prize entrance entrance determination means, MJ11-C20 2nd exit entrance entrance determination means MJ11-C22 Specific area entrance determination means, MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A No. 1 main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 hold control means MJ31 hold digestion control means, MJ31j change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ32 Symbol holding means, MJ32-A first main game symbol holding means MJ32b-A First main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-B 2 main game symbol holding means MJ32b-B second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN game content determining means MN10 winning / losing lottery means, MN11-A first main game win / fail lottery means MN11ta-A first main game win / fail lottery table, MN11-B second main game win / fail lottery means MN11ta-B second main game pass / fail lottery table, MN11-H auxiliary game pass / fail Lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery table, MN20 Special game transition determination means MN40 Symbol content determination means, MN41-A First main game symbol determination means MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table, MN 1-H auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determining lottery table, MN50 variation mode determining unit MN51-A first main game variation mode determining unit, MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51 -B second main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN52 limited frequency variation mode Determination means, MN52ta limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52c limited frequency counter, MN52b limited frequency related information temporary storage means MP game progress means, MP10 display control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol variation management timer MP11 -H Auxiliary game symbol control means, MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP20-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP21-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP22t-B 2nd main game start opening electric accessory release timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determination means, MP32 special game content determination means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C first and second Two major winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP50 specific game control means, MP51 probability change end condition determination means MP51c probability change count counter, MP52 time reduction end condition determination means MP52c Time reduction counter, MB gaming state temporary storage means M 10-C first and second main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means B20b Special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means, MT10 command transmission buffer MH Prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s First main game start entrance detection device, A20 First main game symbol display device A21g First main game symbol display unit, A21h First main game symbol hold display unit B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game Start port B11s Second main game start port entrance detection device, B11d Second main game start port electric accessory B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game Technical symbol display part B21h Second main game symbol hold display part C First and second main game shared peripherals, C10 First big prize opening C11s First big prize opening prize detection device, C11d First big prize opening electric appliance C20 2nd grand prize opening, C21s 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21d
H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start port H11s auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S sub control board, SM effect display control Means (Sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decoration symbol display control means SM21n drawing display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b drawing related information temporary storage means , SM21t, drawing variation time management timer SM22, drawing hold information display control means, SM22b, drawing hold information temporary storage means SM26, hold prefetch effect execution control means, SM26k hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26c, prefetch effect execution counter, SM23c stay stage Management counter SM23c2 consecutive resort counter, SM23 background effect display control means SM23n background effect display content determination means, SM23b background effect related information temporary storage means SM24, notice effect display control means, SM24n notice effect display Content determining means SM24b Preliminary effect related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determining means, SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25ta Effect content determination table, SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Effect display means ( Sub-sub control unit), SS10 sub-information transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display-related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display area, SG12 first hold display section SG13 second hold display SB Sub input button, SBs Sub input button input detection device KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A first start opening where game balls can enter,
A second starting port where a game ball can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information;
An effect display unit capable of displaying the effect,
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a first random number based on a ball entering the first starting port;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, a first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as a first hold until the first success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
First success / failure determination means for executing the determination of success / failure based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means;
First identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the first validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, the first identification information is controlled so as to stop and display the stop identification information of the first identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit. Display control means;
A second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting port;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, a second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as a second hold until the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
Second success / failure determination means for executing the determination of correctness / failure based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means;
A second identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the second identification information based on the result of the determination of the validity by the second validity determination means;
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, the second identification information is controlled to stop and display the stop identification information of the second identification information after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit. Display control means;
When the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the first identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group, or If the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group, the player Special game control means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game Lottery state control means that can be controlled to be in a high probability lottery state in
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the second starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution of the special game;
The first variation pattern table as a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and the second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information from the first variation pattern table And a variation state that can be controlled to be either a first variation state that refers to the first variation pattern table or a second variation state that refers to the second variation pattern table after completion of execution of the special game. Control means, and when the second hold exists, the first success / failure determination permission condition is not satisfied, whereas the second success / failure determination permission condition can be satisfied regardless of whether or not the first hold exists. It is configured as
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
When one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed In, it is configured so that the execution contents of the special game are different from each other,
During the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a unit game that makes the variable prize opening advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable prize opening or a predetermined time elapses.
The unit in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is easier to enter the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group It is configured to be easier than entering a specific area in a game,
In the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the determination of success / failure by the first success / failure determination means is winning. The specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is configured to be relatively easy to stop and display, compared to the case where the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed.
If a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group has entered a specific area, the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variation state While
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, after the execution of the special game, the specific game state and the second variable state Configured to
As a table to be referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information is different from both the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table is further provided. Have
The unit from the start of change display to the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information as one unit, and in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, there is a ball entering a specific area. In such a case, after the execution of the special game has been completed and the one unit has been performed a predetermined number of times, the third variation state is referred to the third variation pattern table.
In the case of the first fluctuation state, when the number of holds related to the second hold at the time when the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and at the time when the second determination result permission condition is satisfied The result of the go / no-go decision by the second go / no-go judgment means when the second hold / hold decision permission condition is satisfied in the case where the hold number related to the second hold is the second hold number larger than the first hold number. While the average value difference of the predetermined time occurs in the average value of the fluctuation display time of the second identification information in the case of non-winning,
In the case of the third variation state, as the average value of the variation display time of the second identification information in the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the second failure determination means when the second failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won The average value difference for the predetermined time according to the number of holds related to the second hold at the time when the second success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied,
A pre-reading effect that suggests or notifies the presence of the second hold that satisfies the predetermined condition can be executed in the effect display unit,
In the case where the execution of the one unit related to the certain second hold is scheduled in the third change state even though a certain second hold occurs before the third change state is reached. The pre-reading effect corresponding to the certain second hold is not executed during the variation display of the second identification information prior to the third variation state.
Regardless of whether or not a specific game has entered a specific area corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, it is definite that the specific game state will be entered after the execution of the special game. While
Whether or not to enter a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is determined according to the presence or absence of entering the specific area in the unit game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group Configured to be
A specific condition that is executed when the change display of the second identification information is performed when the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means in the third variation state is satisfied when the second failure determination permission condition is satisfied. The effect is executed when the second identification information is displayed in a variable state when the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second determination / non-permission determination means is unwinned when the second determination of whether or not the second determination is satisfied. Is configured to not
More than the number of candidates related to the variable display time of the second identification information that can be selected when the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second success / failure determination means is a non-winning state, the third variation state and The number of candidates related to the variable display time of the second identification information that can be selected when the result of the success / failure determination by the second success / failure determination means is non-winning is configured to be smaller,
It is possible to execute a specific notice effect in advance in the effect display section to notify that the ease of entering a specific area is high
A specific suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the ease of entering a specific area is high can be executed in the production display unit,
When the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is executed, the specific notice effect can be executed before the start of the special game,
Even when a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is executed, or even when a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is executed, The specific suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the special game,
The stop identification information of the first identification information stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit is a specific group when the result of the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination means is won in the low probability lottery state and the normal gaming state While executing the special game executed when it is the specific stop identification information belonging to, while executing the specific suggestion effect,
The stop identification information of the second identification information stopped and displayed on the second identification information display unit is the specific group when the result of the determination of the success / failure by the second success / failure determination means is won in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state. It is configured not to execute the specific suggestion effect during the execution of the special game executed when the specific stop identification information belongs to ,
During the execution of a special game, it is possible to execute a launch instruction effect for encouraging a player to enter a specific area. When the launch instruction effect is executed, the launch instruction effect is displayed, and the launch instruction effect during the execution of the special game generated when the result of the success / failure determination is won in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be different from the effect display mode of the firing instruction effect when is executed .

Images